JP6518742B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  In a conventional gaming machine, determination information as to whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to a player is acquired and stored as a pending storage, and a special game is executed based on the pending storage when the start condition is established. The symbol variation display is executed, and the special game is executed when the result of the variation display is a special result.

  In such a gaming machine, in the specific gaming state (time reduction gaming state, probability variation gaming state) more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state is set so that the fluctuation time is easier to be shorter than the normal gaming state Prior to the decision, there has been a case where the determination information is determined in advance and the advance notice effect is executed based on the result of the determination (see Patent Document 1).

JP 2012-228400 A

  However, in the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned patent documents, there is a possibility that the interest of the game may be reduced.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described problems, and it is an object of the present invention to improve the interest of a game in a gaming machine that executes advance notice effects based on the result of prior determination.

In order to solve the above problems, the present invention executes the variation display of the symbol, and when the variation display is a special result, whether or not the special game is executed in the gaming machine capable of executing the special game advantageous to the player. Said variation based on the determination result of the determination means and the determination means for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information. A predetermined effect is performed based on the determination result of the variable display execution means for displaying, the prior determination means for determining whether or not to execute the special game before the determination means, and the prior determination means It is provided with a notice execution means for executing a notice effect, and a game state control means capable of controlling a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state in which the fluctuation time of the variable display tends to be shorter than the normal gaming state. , Said The executing means executes the preview effect at different rates in the normal gaming state and the specific gaming state, and the first preview effect performed in the specific gaming state adds a specific image to the symbol, and the addition is performed. It is an effect that indicates the degree of expectation that the special game is to be executed depending on the type of the specific image, and is the advance announcement effect that is not performed in the normal gaming state, and the type of the specific image added is And at least the first specific image and the second specific image, and when the type of the added specific image is the second specific image , the special game is expected to be executed rather than the first specific effect degree is capable of executing a high second specific effect, a second announcement attraction that is executed in the normal gaming state, this changing the hold image corresponding to the pending stored in one of several types The special game is said announcement attraction suggests expectation to be executed, who types the number of the pending images than kind number of the specific image is large, it is characterized by.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

It is a front view of a game machine. FIG. 2 is a partial perspective view of the gaming machine. It is a block diagram of a control means. (A-1) is a figure showing the big hit determination table for the first special symbol, (a-2) is a figure showing the big hit determination table for the second special symbol, (b) is a figure showing the reach determination table . (A) is a figure showing the special symbol determination table for big hit selection, (b) is a figure showing the special symbol determination table for losing. (A) is a figure showing a big hit game control table, (b) is a figure showing a large winning opening / closing control table for long game, (c) is a figure showing a large winning opening opening / closing control table for short game. (A) is a figure showing a game condition data determination table, (b) is a figure showing a game condition determination table. It is a figure showing the special figure fluctuation pattern judging table in a non time saving game state. It is a figure showing the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table in time saving game state. (A) is a diagram showing a hit determination table for normal symbols, (b) is a diagram showing a normal symbol determination table, (c) is a diagram showing a common pattern variation pattern determination table, (d) is an auxiliary game reference data determination FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a table, (e) is a diagram showing an auxiliary game control table, and (f) is a diagram showing a second start opening / closing control table. (A) is a diagram showing the configuration of the special symbol hold storage area of the main RAM, (b) is a diagram showing the configuration of each storage unit of the special symbol hold storage area, (c) is a normal symbol hold storage area of the main RAM A figure showing composition, (d) is a figure showing composition of each storage part of a usual design reservation storage area. It is a flowchart which shows the main process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the input control processing in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st starting opening detection signal input process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd starting opening detection signal input processing in a main control board. It is a flow chart which shows winning a prize gate detection signal input processing in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure special electric power control processing in the main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol memory determination processing in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot determination process in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol determination processing in the main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure fluctuation pattern determination processing in the main control board. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol change processing in the main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol stop processing in the main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit game processing in the main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot game end processing in the main control board. It is a flow chart which shows the drawing control processing in the main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol memory determination processing in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol change processing in the main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol stop processing in the main control board. It is a flow chart which shows the auxiliary game processing in the main control board. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing in a production control board. It is a flow chart which shows timer interruption processing in a production control board. It is a flowchart which shows the middle of the command analysis process in a production control board. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation of the command analysis process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of the starting opening prize in a production control board. (A) is a figure showing the structure of the presentation information storage area of sub RAM102c, (b) is a figure showing the structure of each memory | storage part of a presentation information storage area. It is a figure showing an example of a continuous notice production judging table. It is a figure showing the modification of a continuous notice production judging table. It is a flow chart which shows pre-reading zone production mode decision processing in a production control board. It is a figure showing an example of a pre-reading zone production scenario judging table. It is a figure showing an example of a final number determination table. It is a figure showing an example of a zone precursor presentation scenario determination table. It is a figure showing an example of the icon display mode scenario determination table for pre-reading zone production execution. (A) is a flowchart which shows continuous step-up notice production mode determination processing in a production control board, (b) is a flowchart which shows the chance eye notice production mode determination processing in a production control board. (A) is a figure showing an example of a continuous step-up advance production | presentation production scenario determination table, (b) is a figure showing an example of a chance eye preliminary production production scenario determination table. (A) is a flowchart which shows serif notice production mode determination processing in a production control board, (b) is a flow chart which shows the effect notice production mode determination processing in a production control board. (A) is a figure showing an example of a speech advance presentation effect scenario determination table, (b) is a figure showing an example of an effect announcement effect scenario determination table. It is a flow chart which shows icon change notice judging processing in a production control board. It is a figure showing an example of an icon change advance judgment table. FIG. 17 is a diagram showing an example of an icon final display mode determination table for normal change notification / throwing kiss notification in the normal gaming state. It is a figure showing an example of the icon last display mode judging table for notices of change usually during time saving game state. It is a figure showing an example of the icon display mode scenario determination table for the normal change notice in a normal game state. It is a figure showing an example of the icon display mode scenario determination table for throwing kiss notices in a normal game state. It is a figure showing an example of the icon final display mode determination table for handshake party advance notices. It is a figure showing an example of the words frequency judgment table for handshake party notices. It is a figure showing an example of the icon display mode scenario determination TBL determination table for handshake party advance notices. It is a figure showing an example of the icon display mode scenario determination table for handshake party advance notices. It is a figure explaining the normal mode which is a display mode of an icon, the 1st special mode, and the 2nd special modes 11-15, 21-23. It is a figure explaining the 3rd special modes 11-15, 21-25, and 31-35 which are the display modes of an icon. It is a figure explaining the 3rd special modes 41-45, 51-55, 61-65 which are the display modes of an icon. It is a figure explaining the 4th special mode 11-15, 21-24, 31, 41 which is a display mode of an icon. It is a flow chart which shows pending information update processing in a production control board. It is a flowchart which shows production mode setting processing in a production control board. It is a figure showing an example of a presentation mode determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the production | presentation symbol stop display pattern determination processing in a production | presentation control board. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a production symbol stop display pattern determination table for advance notice of a chance eye, (b) is a diagram showing an example of a production symbol stop display pattern determination table for a zone turning effect, (c) is for normal use It is a figure showing an example of a production | presentation symbol stop display pattern determination table (for production mode A). It is a flow chart which shows change production pattern determination processing in a production control board. It is a figure showing an example of the change production | presentation pattern determination table for non-execution time of zone precursor production and pre-reading zone production. (A) is a figure showing an example of the change production pattern determination table for execution of zone turning failure production 1 and (b) is a figure showing an example of the change production pattern determination table for execution of zone turning failure 2 (C) is a figure showing an example of the change production pattern determination table for the time of execution of a zone turning success production. It is a figure showing an example of the change production pattern determination table for during execution of pre-reading zone production. It is a figure showing an example of the fluctuation production pattern judging table for production mode B (high probability gaming state and time saving gaming state). It is a figure showing an example of the fluctuation production pattern judging table for production mode C (low probability gaming state and time saving gaming state). It is a flowchart which shows the exact production | presentation determination processing in a production control board. (A) is a figure showing an example of the accurate presentation pattern determination table 1, (b) is a figure showing an example of the accurate presentation pattern determination table 2. It is a flow chart which shows pre-reading zone production execution judging processing in a production control board. It is a flow chart which shows icon change notice execution judging processing in a production control board. It is a flow chart which shows pre-reading zone production end judging processing in a production control board. It is a flow chart which shows customer waiting display control processing in a production control board. It is a flow chart which shows right-handed display control processing in a production control board. It is a flowchart which shows the left hitting display control processing in a production control board. It is a figure showing the example of a display of the image display device in various game states. It is a figure showing the presentation flow of a notice of a handshake meeting. It is a figure showing a mode before a handshake meeting advance generate | occur | produces. (A) is a diagram showing a state in which a hold icon to be a target of a handshake meeting advance notice is displayed in the third special mode 11, and (b) is a hold icon displayed before the hold icon to be a target of a handshake view notice (C) is a diagram showing the appearance of a handshake meeting venue related to a handshake meeting advance notice, (d) is a handshake character and an escort pertaining to a handshake meeting advance notice. It is a figure showing a mode that the character appeared. It is a figure showing a mode that the pending | holding icon used as the object of a notice of a handshake meeting is waiting. It is a figure showing a mode that the pending | holding icon used as the object of a notice of a handshake meeting is waiting. It is a figure showing a mode that a handshake meeting advance is performed. It is a figure showing a mode that a handshake meeting advance is performed. (A) is a figure showing a mode immediately before the end of the handshake meeting advance notice, and (b) and (c) is a view showing a situation after the handshake meeting advance notice is finished. It is a figure showing the presentation flow of a throwing kiss notice. FIG. 18 is a diagram showing how the hold icon changes from the normal mode to the second special mode 13; (A) is a view showing a state before a throwing kiss notice is made, (b) is a view showing a character related to the throwing kiss notice, and (c) is a character showing a target for the throwing kiss notice. It is a figure showing a mode that it flew toward the icon. (A) is a diagram showing that the heart hit the icon of the target of the throwing kiss notice, and (b) is a view showing that the display mode of the icon is changed by the throwing kiss notice and the change is notified. FIG. 6C is a view showing a state after the end of the throwing kiss notice. (A) is a view showing a state before a throwing kiss notice is made, (b) is a view showing a character related to the throwing kiss notice, and (c) is a character showing a target for the throwing kiss notice. It is a figure showing a mode that it flew toward the icon. (A) is a diagram showing that the heart hit the icon of the target of the throwing kiss notice, and (b) is a view showing that the display mode of the icon is changed by the throwing kiss notice and the change is notified. FIG. 6C is a view showing a state after the end of the throwing kiss notice. (A-1) is a time chart for explaining an effect flow of zone turn effect and pre-reading zone effect (in the case of zone turn effect being executed with variation effect of 4 seconds), (a-2) is zone turn effect and pre-read Time chart for explaining the flow of effect of zone effect (when zone turn effect is executed by fluctuation effect of 8 seconds), (b-1) is the display pattern of effect design in zone turn success effect (change effect of 4 seconds (B-2) is a display pattern of the effect design in zone turn failure effect 1 (in case of 4 seconds of fluctuation effect, zone turn failure effect 1 is an example) (C-1) is a relation between the stop of the special symbol and the change of the display mode of the icon (in the case of 4 seconds of change effect, the zone turn success effect is executed) (C-2) shows the relationship between the stop of the special symbol and the change in the display mode of the icon (when the zone turn failure effect 1 is executed with a 4-second fluctuation effect). It is a time chart for (A) And (b) is a figure showing a mode before a zone precursor effect is performed, (c) and (d) is a mode that the display mode of the icon is a zone precursor effect by the 3rd special mode 41 is performed FIG. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing that a zone precursor effect according to the third special mode 4 is executed in the display mode of the icon, and (c) is a third special mode 5 and the third special mode with the icon displayed It is a figure showing a mode that zone presiding production by mode 2 (pre-reading zone production suggestion mode) is performed. (A) is a diagram showing that a zone precursor effect is being executed according to the third special mode 2 (pre-reading zone effect suggestion mode) and the pre-reading symbol constituting the zone turning effect is temporarily stopped in the display mode of the icon. In (b), the zone precursor effect according to the third special mode 2 (pre-reading zone effect suggestion mode) is executed as the display mode of the icon, and the pre-reading symbol and zone pattern constituting the zone turning effect are temporarily stopped The figure showing a mode, (c) is a pre-read symbol, zone symbol and rush that constitutes zone turn effect while the zone precursor effect according to the third special mode 2 (pre-reading zone effect suggestion mode) is executed as the icon display mode. It is a figure showing a mode that the symbol has stopped temporarily. In (a), while the zone precursor effect by the third special mode 2 (pre-reading zone effect suggestion mode) is being executed, the pre-read symbol, zone pattern and rush pattern that make up the zone turn effect are stopped. (B) and (c) show that zone notification effects are being performed according to the third special mode 3 (pre-reading zone notification effect mode) and the icon display mode is a pre-reading zone. It is a figure showing a mode that a zone background image is displayed. While showing zone information production by the 3rd special mode 3 (pre-reading zone effect informing aspect), and showing the pre-reading zone background image which shows that it is a pre-reading zone, the display mode of an icon is a figure showing a mode . (A) is a diagram showing how a zone notification effect is being performed by the third special mode 3 (pre-reading zone effect notification mode) in the display mode of the icon; (b) is a big hit informing notification in the icon display mode FIG. It is a figure showing a mode that a continuous step up notice production is performed. It is a figure showing a mode that SP reach production | presentation is performed after continuous step-up advance production | presentation production is performed. It is a figure showing a mode that a chance eye notice production is performed. It is a figure showing a mode that a speech advance production is performed. It is a figure showing a mode that an effect advance production is performed. It is a time chart in the case where the false effect production is performed during the fluctuation production, and the pseudo accurate light production is performed along with the start of the normal demonstration effect. It is a figure showing the example of presentation before the exact presentation is performed in change production. It is a figure showing the example of presentation when the exact presentation is performed in change production. It is a figure showing an example of production in case false false lighting production is performed with a start of customer waiting demonstration display. It is a time chart in case a false accurate presentation is performed in the middle of execution of a customer waiting demonstration display. It is a figure showing an example of production in case false false lighting production is performed during execution of customer waiting demonstration display. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the right hitting display when a game ball enters a 1st starting opening in a high probability time short game state. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the left hitting display at the time of changing from a probability change gaming state to a normal gaming state. It is a figure which shows the example of a display when a game ball passes a prize gate in the customer waiting state in a normal game state. It is a figure which shows the example of a display when a game ball passes a prize gate during the production | presentation symbol fluctuation | variation in a normal gaming state. It is a figure which shows the example of a display when a game ball passes a prize gate during menu screen display in the customer waiting state in a normal gaming state. It is a figure which shows a 1st modification about the example of a display when a game ball passes a prize gate during production | design pattern fluctuation | variation of a normal gaming state. It is a figure which shows a 2nd modification about the example of a display when a game ball passes a prize gate during production | design pattern fluctuation | variation of a normal gaming state. It is a flow chart which shows right-handed display control processing in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the left hitting display control processing in a 3rd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the left hitting display control processing in a 4th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the relationship between passage of the game ball to the prize-winning gate in 4th Embodiment, and control which concerns on a left hitting display. It is a flow chart which shows right-handed display control processing in a 5th embodiment.

First Embodiment
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described with reference to the drawings.

  As shown in FIG. 1, in the gaming machine Y, a gaming board mounting frame Y1, a glass door Y2 rotatably supported relative to the gaming board mounting frame Y1, and a gaming area 2A in which gaming balls flow down are formed. And the game board 2 that is present.

  The game board attachment frame Y1 is rotatably supported by an outer frame (not shown) fixed to the island facility of the game arcade, and is detachably attached.

  The glass door Y2 is detachably connected to the game board attachment frame Y1 via the hinge mechanism H at one end side in the horizontal direction, and is supported rotatably around the hinge mechanism H. Therefore, by rotating the glass door Y2 like a door with the hinge mechanism H as a fulcrum, the front surface portions of the game area 2A and the game board attachment frame Y1 can be opened and closed. The glass door Y2 covers the front portion of the game area 2A in a visible manner by a glass (transparent member) attached from the back side to a window provided at the center.

  Further, on the other end side of the glass door Y2, a lock mechanism R for fixing the glass door Y2 to the game board mounting frame Y1 is provided. Fixation by the lock mechanism R can be released by a dedicated key.

  The glass door Y2 is provided with a tray 50 for storing a plurality of gaming balls and a launch operation device 3 capable of an operation for launching the gaming balls. The launch operation device 3 is connected to a launch device 4 (see FIG. 3) capable of launching a game ball toward the game area 2A. The launcher 4 is provided on the front of the game board mounting frame Y1. The game balls stored in the tray 50 are supplied to the launch device 4.

  The launch operation device 3 includes a base 31 fixed to the glass door Y 2, a launch handle 32 rotatably provided on the base 31, and a handle illumination device 33 (a handle for emitting the launch handle 32 in a predetermined manner) Light emitting portion). The launcher 4 launches the game ball with a strength according to the rotation angle of the launch handle 32 (hereinafter referred to as "game ball launch strength").

  A plurality of handle illumination devices 33 (handle light emitters) are formed in a dome shape that constitutes the front portion of the emission handle 32 and bulges forward and is defined by a lens member capable of transmitting light. Light emitting elements (full color LEDs, lamps, etc.) are disposed. By emitting light from the LED / lamp, it is possible to execute a light-emitting effect (such as a precise light-emitting effect or a pseudo-precise light-emitting effect described later) that causes the emission handle 32 to emit light in a predetermined mode. Further, at the front end portion of the handle illumination device 33, an air outlet 34b is opened which serves as an outlet for air (air) sent from an air blower 34 described later.

  A blower 34 is provided at the back surface side of the glass door Y2 and at a position corresponding to the discharge operation device 3 for sending out air (air) through the inside of the base 31 of the discharge operation device 3 and the air outlet 34b. ing. By operating the blower motor 34a provided in the blower 34, a blower effect (such as the after-mentioned effect to be described later) for delivering the wind (air) in a predetermined manner toward the player's hand operating the discharge handle 32 is performed. It is possible to

  In the game area 2A of the game board 2, a frame-shaped decorative frame 29A, an inner rail member 29B having a curved shape, an outer rail member 29C, and a jackpot 8 described later are arranged directly below the game ball A guiding member 29D is provided on the upper surface of which a guiding path that can be guided toward the second starting port 7 is formed.

  The decorative frame 29A is fitted in a substantially central portion of the game board 2. Inside the decorative frame 29A, an image display device 14 formed of a liquid crystal display is fitted. Also, at the inner end portion of the decorative frame 29A, a presentation character device 17 is provided.

  The inner rail member 29B is disposed outside the decorative frame 29A, and the outer rail member 29C is disposed outside the inner rail member 29B. The game balls fired with a predetermined game ball firing strength rise between the inner rail member 29B and the outer rail member 29C and enter the game area 2A. In the game area 2A, a plurality of nails and a windmill are provided. The game ball entering the game area 2A can flow down in various directions by a plurality of nails and a windmill.

  In the left side area 2AL of the game area 2A, first to third general winning openings 11-1, 11-2, 11-3 are provided. In the right side area 2AR of the game area 2A, a fourth general winning opening 11-4 is provided. The first to fourth general winning opening detection sensors 11-1a, 11-2a, 11-3a, 11 are provided in the first to fourth general winning openings 11-1, 11-2, 11-3, 11-4, respectively. A predetermined number (for example, 10) is provided when the first to fourth general winning opening detection sensors 11-1a, 11-2a, 11-3a, 11-4a detect gaming balls. Game balls are paid out as prize balls (game value is given).

In addition, on the right lower side of the decorative frame 29A in the right side area 2AR of the game area 2A, a winning gate 10 capable of passing the game ball is provided. Therefore, the game balls flowing down the right area 2AR easily pass through the winning gate 10. The winning gate 10 is provided with a winning gate detection sensor 10a for detecting a game ball. Under the condition that the winning gate detection sensor 10a detects the game ball, a normal symbol lottery is performed as to whether or not the auxiliary game advantageous to the player is to be executed. The details of the normal symbol lottery will be described later.
Here, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, although the game balls flowing down the right side area 2 AR can easily pass through the winning gate 10, it is difficult to flow down toward the first starting opening 6 .

  At the lower part of the left side area 2AL of the game area 2A, below the image display device 14, there is provided a first starting opening 6 which is invariable and can always enter the ball. Therefore, the gaming ball flowing down the left area 2AL can easily enter the first starting opening 6. The first starting opening 6 is provided with a first starting opening detection sensor 6a that detects a game ball. A first special symbol lottery is performed to determine whether or not the jackpot game (special game) advantageous to the player is to be performed on condition that the first starting opening detection sensor 6a detects the game ball. The details of the first special symbol lottery will be described later. In addition, when the first starting opening detection sensor 6a detects a game ball, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball (a game value is awarded).

  A variable second starting port 7 is provided immediately below the first starting port 6. The second starting opening 7 is controlled by the second starting opening control device 70 either in the basic mode (closed mode) incapable of winning or in the special mode (open mode) in which winning is possible. The second starting opening 7 is also provided with a second starting opening detection sensor 7a that detects a game ball. A second special symbol lottery is performed as to whether or not the jackpot game (special game) advantageous to the player is to be executed on condition that the second starting opening detection sensor 7a detects the game ball. The details of the second special symbol lottery will be described later. In addition, when the second starting opening detection sensor 7a detects a game ball, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball (a game value is given).

  The second starting opening control device 70 includes a rotatable normal movable piece 70A and a second starting opening opening / closing solenoid 70B as a drive unit for rotating the normal movable piece 70A.

  Normally, the movable piece 70A is formed of a rectangular door member, and normally (except for a predetermined condition being met), stops in a state where the surface is flush with the game area 2A, and the second starting opening 7 is It is closed. The closing of the second starting port 7 by the normally movable piece 70A constitutes a basic aspect of the second starting port 7.

  On the other hand, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the normally movable piece 70A is pivoted forward about the rotation axis formed at the lower end to open the second starting port 7. The second starting port 7 is controlled in a special mode that can enter the ball. The opening of the second starting port 7 by the normally movable piece 70A constitutes a special mode of the second starting port 7. When the movable piece 70A opens the second starting opening 7, the movable piece 70A protrudes from the game area 2A, and can be guided to the second starting opening 7 by receiving the game balls flowing down.

  Note that the predetermined condition for the second starting opening control device 70 is that it is determined that an auxiliary game is to be executed in the normal symbol lottery by the passage of the game ball in the above-described winning gate 10. Therefore, the opening of the second starting opening 7 by the rotation of the movable piece 70A is performed when the gaming ball flows down the right area 2AR where the winning gate 10 can easily pass. That is, in the present embodiment, when the gaming ball flows down the right area 2AR, entering the second starting opening 7 is facilitated.

  A variable big winning opening 8 is provided downstream of the winning gate 10 in the right area 2AR. Therefore, the gaming ball flowing down the right side area 2AR can easily enter the big winning opening 8. The special winning opening 8 is controlled by the special winning opening control device 80 either in a basic mode incapable of winning or in a special mode in which a prize can be won. The special winning opening 8 is provided with a special winning opening detection sensor 8a for detecting a game ball. When the special winning opening detection sensor 8a detects a game ball, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball (a game value is given).

  The special winning opening control device 80 is equipped with a special movable piece 80A that can turn and a special winning opening opening / closing solenoid 80B as a drive unit that turns the special movable piece 80A.

  The special movable piece 80A is formed of a rectangular door member, and normally (except for a predetermined condition being met), the game is stopped in a state where the surface is flush with the game area 2A, and the special winning opening 8 is played The ball is closed so that it can not enter the ball. The closing of the special winning opening 8 by the special movable piece 80A constitutes the basic mode of the special winning opening 8.

  On the other hand, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the special movable piece 80A is pivoted forward about the rotation axis formed at the lower end to open the special winning opening 8 so that the gaming ball can enter. Opening of the special winning opening 8 by the special movable piece 80A constitutes a special mode of the special winning opening 8. The special movable piece 80A protrudes from the game area 2A when the special winning opening 8 is opened, and can be guided to the special winning opening 8 by receiving the game balls flowing down.

  In addition, with the predetermined conditions about big winning a prize mouth control device 80, the 1st special symbol lottery or the 2nd special symbol lottery mentioned above (hereinafter, the 1st special symbol lottery and the 2nd special symbol lottery are put together and the "special symbol lottery" In general, it is determined that a special game (jackpot game) is to be executed.

  A symbol display device comprising a first special symbol display device 20, a second special symbol display device 21 and a normal symbol display device 22 on the surface of the game board 2 and below the game area 2A, and a first special symbol hold A hold display comprising a display 23, a second special symbol hold display 24 and a normal symbol hold display 25 is provided.

  The first special symbol display device 20 is a variable display device that displays the result of the first special symbol lottery performed under the condition that the game ball enters the first starting opening 6, and the second special symbol display device 21 is The variable display device displays the result of the second special symbol lottery performed on the condition that the game ball enters the second starting opening 7.

  With the first special symbol lottery, we perform big hit judgment whether or not we win a big hit based on special figure judgment information acquired based on entering of game ball to the first start mouth 6 or in result of big hit judgment It refers to performing special symbol determination that determines the type of special symbol to be displayed on the first special symbol display device 20 based on the above. Also, with the second special symbol lottery, it is determined whether or not the jackpot has been won based on the special view determination information acquired based on the entry of the game ball to the second starting opening 7, or the second special symbol display It means to determine the type of special symbol to be displayed on the device 21 or the like. That is, it can be said that each special symbol lottery is a lottery for determining (determining) whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) which is advantageous to the player.

  When the first special symbol lottery is performed, the first special symbol is variably displayed in the first special symbol display device 20, and the first special symbol of the first special symbol for notifying the result of the first special symbol lottery after a predetermined time has elapsed Stop display is performed. In addition, when the second special symbol lottery is performed, the second special symbol display device 21 displays the second special symbol in a variable manner, and the second special symbol for notifying the result of the second special symbol lottery after a predetermined time has elapsed. The stop display of the symbol is performed.

  For example, the first special symbol display device 20 and the second special symbol display device 21 each have a plurality of LEDs arranged in a line. In the variable display of each special symbol, for example, a predetermined LED of the corresponding first special symbol display device 20 or the second special symbol display device 21 moves and blinks at a predetermined interval. And in the stop display of a special symbol, the specific LED showing the result of each special symbol lottery lights up.

  The normal symbol display device 22 is a variable display device that displays the result of the normal symbol lottery performed on the condition that the game ball passes through the winning gate 10. In the normal symbol lottery, it is determined whether or not the winning is made on the basis of the common drawing determination information acquired based on the passage of the gaming ball to the winning gate 10, or the normal symbol display device based on the result of the determination It means performing normal symbol determination which determines the kind of normal symbol to be displayed on 22 or the like. That is, it can be said that the normal symbol lottery is a lottery for determining (determining) whether or not to execute the auxiliary game advantageous to the player.

  When the normal symbol lottery is performed, the variable display of the normal symbol is performed in the normal symbol display device 22, and the stop display of the normal symbol for notifying the result of the normal symbol lottery is performed after a predetermined time has elapsed.

  For example, the normal symbol display device 22 has a plurality of LEDs. In the normal symbol variation display, for example, a predetermined LED of the normal symbol display device 22 blinks at a predetermined interval. Then, in the stop display of the normal symbol, a specific LED representing the result of the normal symbol lottery is turned on.

  By the way, even if the game ball enters the starting openings 6 and 7 during variation display of the special symbol or during the big hit game (special game) in which the big winning opening control device 80 operates, the variation display of the special symbol is immediately It is not necessarily performed and the result of a special symbol lottery is notified. That is, the variable display of the special symbol may be suspended under certain conditions. In the present embodiment, as the fixed condition, an upper limit value is provided for the number that can suspend the variation display of the special symbol. In the present embodiment, the upper limit value is set to "4" for each of the starting ports 6, 7. That is, the right to execute the variable display of the special symbol for each starting opening 6, 7 can be reserved up to four.

  The first special symbol holding display device 23 displays the number of holdings (U1: hereinafter referred to as "the first special drawing holding number") of the variable display of the first special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "the first special drawing fluctuation display") Do. The second special symbol holding display device 24 displays the number of holdings (U2: hereinafter referred to as the "second special view holding number") of the variable display of the second special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "the second special view variable display") Do. Each of the first special symbol hold display device 23 and the second special symbol hold display device 24 has, for example, a plurality of LEDs, and lights a predetermined LED according to the number of holdings.

  In addition, the upper limit reserve number is set to 4 similarly about the fluctuation display of the normal symbol (hereinafter referred to as "the common view fluctuation display"), and the number of reservations (G: hereinafter, the number of the common drawing suspension) Is displayed on the normal symbol hold display device 25). The normal symbol hold display device 25 includes, for example, a plurality of LEDs, and lights a predetermined LED according to the common drawing reserve number.

  In addition, the gaming machine Y is provided with an effect device for performing various effects. In the present embodiment, the effect device includes the image display device 14, the sound output device 15 (speaker), the effect illumination device 16 (effect light emitting unit), the effect product device 17, the effect button device 18, and the handle illumination device It is comprised by 33 (handle light emission part) and the air blower 34. As shown in FIG. The image display device 14 and the rendering service object device 17 are provided on the game board 2, and the sound output device 15, the effect illumination device 16, the effect button device 18, the handle illumination device 33 and the blower 34 are provided on the glass door Y2. ing.

  The image display device 14 performs effect display by an image by displaying various still images and moving images (movies) in accordance with the progress of the game. In the present embodiment, a liquid crystal display is used as the image display device 14. However, other types of display devices such as a plasma display and an organic EL display can also be used.

  The voice output device 15 (speaker) performs an effect by voice by outputting BGM (background music), SE (sound effect) and the like. The effect illumination device 16 comprises a game board illumination device provided on the game board 2 and a glass door illumination device provided on the glass door Y2, and the illumination directions of the lights of the respective lamps and LEDs provided in each illumination device By changing the light emission color, effects by illumination are performed. The presentation character object device 17 includes a movable portion 17A and a solenoid and a motor for operating the movable portion 17A, and operates the movable portion 17A to perform effects by operation.

  Further, the tray 50 is provided with an effect button device 18 and a selection button device 19 which function as input devices for performing operations relating to various effects described later.

  The effect button device 18 projects the operation button 18A, the operation button detection switch 18a for detecting the operation to the operation button 18A, and the operation button 18A at the normal position (normal state) and above the normal position. An effect button drive motor 18b for moving (changing) to a position (projected state) is provided (see FIGS. 2 and 3). In addition, a plurality of light emitting elements (full color LEDs, lamps, etc.) for emitting the effect button 18A in a predetermined mode are also provided.

  The selection button device 19 includes a selection button detection switch 19a for detecting an operation on the operable selection button 19A and the selection button 19A (see FIGS. 2 and 3). Moreover, the light emitting element (full color LED, lamp etc.) for making the selection button 19A emit light in a predetermined mode is also provided.

  The selection button 19A includes an upper button 191A, a left button 192A, a lower button 193A, and a right button 194A. Each of the buttons 191A to 194A is provided so as to be able to be pressed in a state of being protruded from the tray 50.

  The effect device executes various effects in accordance with the progress (state) of the game. As the effect, for example, there is a fluctuation effect (special figure lottery effect) performed by the image display device 14 based on the results of the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery. The change effect (special figure lottery effect) is performed with the change display of the effect pattern and the stop display of the effect pattern.

  The variable display of the effect symbol is performed corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol, and the effect symbol changes for a predetermined time in a predetermined mode. The stop display of the effect symbol is performed corresponding to the stop display of the special symbol (hereinafter, when the variable display of the effect symbol and the stop display are collectively referred to as "the effect symbol display"). In the stop display of the effect pattern, the effect pattern is stopped for a predetermined time in a predetermined mode that represents the result of the special symbol lottery.

  The effect symbols represent, for example, three lines of effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 (for example, numbers from "1" to "9") arranged in the left, center, and right regions of the display unit 140 of the image display device 14, for example. And a special effect pattern TZ4 (effect pattern representing numbers from "1" to "9") arranged in an end-side area of the display unit 140 of the image display device 14). In the variation display of the production symbols, the presentation symbols of each row move from the top to the bottom (variation display) as if the reels are rotating. In addition, the aspect of the fluctuation display of a production | presentation symbol is not restricted to this, The aspect which moves from right to left or spins on the spot may be sufficient. In addition, during the variable display of the effect symbols, various effect images such as background images and object images such as characters, movies, etc. are displayed according to the result of the special symbol lottery.

  On the other hand, in the stop display of the effect symbol, after the temporary stop of the three-row effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 in the left, center and right regions of the display unit 140 of the image display device 14 etc. And the special effect pattern TZ4 of the above-mentioned three lines is stop displayed (full stop) in accordance with the stop display of the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 in the end side area. Then, the result of the special symbol lottery is notified by the arrangement of the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 on a predetermined effective line (for example, the central horizontal line in the display unit 140) when the stop display of the effect symbols is performed. Further, the stop display of the special design pattern TZ4 is notified of the stop display of the special design pattern TZ1 to TZ3.

  In addition, it does not report the result of the special design lottery with the arrangement of the production design TZ1-TZ3 on the effective line, but the arrangement of the production design TZ1-TZ3 on the effective line and the arrangement of the special production design TZ4 The result may be reported. In addition, the special effect design TZ4 is not displayed (variation display and stop display) on the image display device 14, but may be displayed (variation display and stop display) on a dedicated display unit (such as an LED display). The special effect pattern TZ4 may be eliminated and only the effect pattern TZ1 to TZ3 may be removed.

  In the effect device, in addition to the change effect (special figure lottery effect), a special (big hit) game effect to be performed when a big hit game is executed, and a fluctuation display of special symbols or a special (big hit) game for a predetermined period Various effects such as customer waiting effects (demonstration display) performed in an internal standby state (so-called, customer waiting state) that is not performed are performed.

  On the back of the game board 2 and the glass door Y2, a main control board 101 for performing various controls related to the game, an effect control board 102, a payout control board 103, a lamp control board 104, an image control board 105, a power supply board 107, a game An information output terminal board 108 is provided.

(Internal configuration of gaming machine Y)
Next, an internal configuration of the gaming machine Y will be described with reference to FIG.

  The power supply substrate 107 generates a main power (operation power) necessary for the operation of the gaming machine from the power supplied from the outside of the gaming machine, and the main power is used as the gaming machine Y (main control board 101, effect control board 102, The sheet is supplied to the payout control board 103, the lamp control board 104, the image control board 105, and various electronic components. Also, the power supply voltage supplied from the outside is monitored, and when the power supply voltage falls below a predetermined value, it is detected that a power failure (power failure) has occurred, and a low level power failure detection signal is sent to the main control board 101. Output.

  Further, the power supply substrate 107 is provided with a backup power supply composed of a capacitor which is stored by power supply from the outside, so that the backup power can be supplied to the main control substrate 101 even when the power is shut down (power failure). The backup power supply may be supplied to the effect control board 102 or the payout control board 103. Further, the backup power supply is not limited to the capacitor, and may be, for example, a battery, or the capacitor and the battery may be used in combination.

  The main control board 101 controls the progress of the game (basic operation) in an integrated manner. The main control board 101 includes a main CPU 101a, a main ROM 101b, and a main RAM 101c. The main CPU 101a reads a program stored in the main ROM 101b based on input signals from various detection sensors, timers (crystal oscillators), etc., and performs arithmetic processing related to gaming, and directly controls various control devices and display devices. Then, a predetermined command or the like based on the result of the arithmetic processing is transmitted to the effect control board 102, the payout control board 103 or the like. The main RAM 101c functions as a work area of data at the time of arithmetic processing of the main CPU 101a.

  On the input side of the main control board 101, the first start opening detection sensor 6a, the second start opening detection sensor 7a, the special winning opening detection sensor 8a, and the winning gate detection sensor 10a via an input port (not shown). The first to fourth general winning opening detection sensors 11-1a, 11-2a, 11-3a, and 11-4a are connected. Each detection sensor outputs a detection signal to the main control board 101 when the game ball is detected.

  On the output side of the main control board 101, a second start opening opening / closing solenoid 70B for operating the ordinary movable piece 70A of the second start opening controller 70 via an output port (not shown), and a special winning opening control A special winning opening opening / closing solenoid 80B for operating the special movable piece 80A of the device 80 is connected. The main control board 101 outputs control signals for controlling the respective solenoids to the second start opening / closing solenoid 70B and the special winning opening / closing solenoid 80B.

  In addition, on the output side of the main control board 101, the first special symbol display device 20, the second special symbol display device 21, the normal symbol display device 22, the first special symbol hold via the output port (not shown) The display 23, the second special symbol hold display 24 and the normal symbol hold display 25 are connected. The main control board 101 outputs display control signals for controlling the respective display devices to the respective display devices 20 to 25.

  Furthermore, a game information output terminal board 108 is connected to the output side of the main control board 101 via an output port (not shown). The main control board 101 outputs information on a predetermined game (hereinafter referred to as game information) to the game information output terminal board 108 as an external signal.

  A game information display device is connected to the game information output terminal board 108. The game information output terminal board 108 outputs an external signal to the game information display device and the hall computer. The gaming information display device is provided on the gaming machine Y, and can display predetermined gaming information based on the predetermined gaming information (external signal) described above.

  The effect control board 102 centrally controls the progression of the effect (rendering operation). The effect control board 102 includes a sub CPU 102 a, a sub ROM 102 b, and a sub RAM 102 c. The effect control board 102 is communicably connected to the main control board 101 in one direction from the main control board 101 to the effect control board 102. The main control board 101 transmits a predetermined command to the effect control board 102 based on the processing relating to the game, and the effect control board 102 receives the predetermined command.

  The effect button detection switch 18 a and the selection button detection switch 19 a are connected to the input side of the effect control board 102 through the lamp control board 104.

  When the effect button 18A is operated, the effect button detection switch 18a relays the lamp control board 104 and outputs to the effect control board 102 an effect button detection signal indicating that the operation of the effect button 18A has been performed. That is, the lamp control board 104 plays the role of a relay board for relaying the effect button detection signal.

  When the selection button 19A is operated, the selection button detection switch 19a relays the lamp control board 104 and outputs a selection button detection signal indicating that the operation of the selection button 19A has been performed to the effect control board 102. That is, the lamp control board 104 plays the role of a relay board for relaying the selection button detection signal.

  The selection button detection switch 19a is connected to the upper button 191A and detects the operated operation of the upper button 191A, and the left button detection switch 192a connected to the left button 192A and detects the operated operation of the left button 192A. And a lower button detection switch 193a connected to the lower button 193A to detect an operated operation of the lower button 193A, and a right button detection switch 194a connected to the right button 194A to detect an operated operation of the right button 194A.

  When each button detection switch 191a, 192a, 193a, 194a detects an operated object, the upper button detection signal, the left button detection signal, the lower button detection signal, and the right button detection signal are transmitted via the lamp control board 104, respectively. Output to the effect control board 102. The upper button detection signal, the left button detection signal, the lower button detection signal, and the right button detection signal are collectively referred to as a "selection button detection signal".

  Further, in the present embodiment, the operation (operation) input from the player is detected by the effect button detection switch 18a and the selection button detection switch 19a, but the present invention is not limited to this. Even if an infrared sensor (motion sensor) for detecting an operation such as holding up or a detection element capable of detecting an input such as an operation or operation of the player such as a touch panel for detecting a predetermined operation of the player is provided. Good.

  The sub CPU 102a is a command output from the main control board 101, an effect button detection signal output from the effect button device 18, a selection button detection signal output from the selection button device 19, an input signal from a timer (crystal oscillator) Based on the above, the program stored in the sub ROM 102b is read out to perform arithmetic processing, and based on the processing, a command for controlling the effect is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105. The sub RAM 102c functions as a work area of data at the time of arithmetic processing of the sub CPU 102a.

  The payout control board 103 performs launch control for launching the gaming ball from the launcher 4 and payout control for delivering the gaming ball to the player. The payout control board 103 includes a payout CPU 103a, a payout ROM 103b, and a payout RAM 103c, and is bidirectionally communicably connected to the main control board 101 and the power supply board 107.

  The touch sensor 32 a and the knob 32 b of the firing volume are connected to the input side of the payout control board 103. The touch sensor 32 a is mounted in the launch handle 32 of the launch control device 3. When a player or a store clerk or the like touches the shooting handle 32, the touch sensor 32a detects that a person has touched the shooting handle 32, and transmits a shooting handle detection signal to the shooting control board 106. The firing volume knob 32 b is connected to the firing handle 32. The knob 32b of the firing volume rotates in conjunction with the firing handle 32, and detects the rotation angle.

  Further, on the output side of the payout control substrate 103, the emission solenoid 41 of the emission device 4 is connected via the power supply substrate 107. The payout control board 103, when receiving the firing handle detection signal from the touch sensor 32a, permits energization of the firing solenoid 41.

  Then, when the firing handle 32 is operated to change the rotation angle of the firing handle 32, the gear connected to the firing handle 32 is rotated, and the knob 32b of the firing volume connected to the gear is rotated. A voltage corresponding to the rotation angle of the launch handle 32 detected by the knob 32 b of the launch volume is applied to the launch solenoid 41.

  When a voltage is applied to the firing solenoid 41, the firing solenoid 41 operates in response to the applied voltage. As described above, the payout control board 103 controls the energization of the firing solenoid 41 based on the information on the firing handle detection signal from the touch sensor 32a and the input signal from the firing volume knob 32b to fire the gaming ball.

  In the present embodiment, the reciprocation speed of the emission solenoid 41 is set to about 99.9 (times / minute) from the frequency based on the output period of the crystal oscillator provided on the emission control substrate 106. Since one gaming ball is fired each time the firing solenoid 41 reciprocates, the number of gaming balls fired per minute is about 99.9 (pieces / minute).

  In addition, on the output side of the payout control board 103, a payout device 5 for delivering gaming balls supplied from a storage tank (not shown) provided on the upper surface of the back surface of the gaming board mounting frame Y1 to the tray 50 (player). The payout drive unit 51 is connected. The payout CPU 103a reads out a predetermined program from the payout ROM 103b based on the award ball request signal transmitted from the main control board 101 and performs arithmetic processing, and controls the payout device 5 to give the predetermined gaming ball to the player. Pay out. At this time, the payout RAM 103c functions as a work area of data at the time of calculation processing of the payout CPU 103a.

  The lamp control board 104 is provided with a lamp CPU 104a, a lamp ROM 104b, and a lamp RAM 104c, similarly to the above-mentioned boards. On the output side of the lamp control board 104, the effect illumination device 16, the effect service device 17, the handle illumination device 33 and the blower 34 are connected.

  The lamp CPU 104a is a lighting unit 16 for effect based on a command related to effect control transmitted from the effect control board 102 (hereinafter referred to as a "effect control command"), a movable portion 17A of the role device 17 for effect, and a effect button device 18, the light emission control of the light emitting element (full color LED, a lamp, etc.) provided in the selection button device 19, the handle illumination device 33, etc. is performed. Further, the lamp CPU 104a is a solenoid or motor for operating the movable portion 17A of the presentation service object device 17 based on the presentation control command, and a presentation button drive motor 18b for operating the presentation button 18A of the presentation button device 18, And drive control of the ventilation motor 34a etc. for sending out a wind from the air blower 34 is performed.

  Further, the lamp control board 104 is connected to the effect button detection switch 18 a of the effect button device 18 and the selection button detection switch 19 a of the selection button device 19, and the effect control board 102, the effect button device 18 and the selection button device 19. Relay between the effect button detection signal and the selection button detection signal.

  The image control board 105 generates an image signal related to an image such as a moving image or a still image to be displayed on at least the display unit 140 of the image display device 14, and outputs the image signal to the image display device 14. The voice generation unit 105C generates a voice signal related to the voice to be output to the voice output unit 15, and outputs a voice output unit 15;

  The general control unit 105A of the image control board 105 is provided with a general CPU 105Aa, a general ROM 105Ab, and a general RAM 105Ac in order to perform image display control by the image display device 14.

  The central CPU 105Aa is connected to the central ROM 105Ab in which a control program and the like are stored, and a control program necessary for the operation of the central CPU 105Aa is read out. When the overall CPU 105Aa receives a command related to effect control transmitted from the effect control board 102, it instructs the image generation unit 105B to display an image to be displayed on the image display device 14 based on the command, and causes the sound generation unit 105C to A voice instruction to be output from the voice output device 15 is issued.

  The general control RAM 105 Ac functions as a work area of data at the time of arithmetic processing of the general control CPU 105 Aa, and temporarily stores data read from the general control ROM 105 Ab.

  Further, the general control ROM 105Ab is configured by a mask ROM, and displays a control program for displaying an image, a display list generation program for generating a display list composed of drawing control commands, and animation of effect patterns An animation pattern, animation scene information, etc. for the purpose are stored.

  This animation pattern is referred to when displaying the animation that constitutes the specific content of the effect by the image, and the animation pattern is associated with the animation scene information, the display order of each animation scene, and the like. The animation scene information includes weight frame (display time), target data (sprite identification number, transfer source address, etc.), parameters for drawing (sprite display position, display magnification, transmittance, etc.), drawing method And various information such as a duty ratio as a parameter of the brightness of the image display device 14.

  The image generation unit 105B includes a VDP 105 Ba (Video Display Processor) which is an image processor, a CGROM 105 Bb storing image data, and a VRAM 105 Bc having a frame buffer for temporarily storing drawing data generated from the image data. ing.

  The VDP 105Ba is connected to the CGROM 105Bb in which image data is stored, and generates drawing data as an origin of a video signal (RGB signal or the like) based on the image data based on an instruction from the general CPU 105Aa. The image data is a material-like image (frame) to be displayed on the image display device 14, for example, an individual image representing a background image such as a scene, a character, and a speech constituting a background of a stage graphic image or stage pattern. It is data. On the other hand, drawing data is synthetic data representing an image of an entire frame configured by combining (superposing) individual images.

  The CGROM 105Bb comprises a flash memory, an EEPROM, an EPROM, a mask ROM, etc. and compresses and stores image data (sprite, movie) etc. consisting of a set of pixel information in a predetermined range of pixels (eg 32 × 32 pixels) ing. The pixel information is composed of color number information for specifying a color number for each pixel and an alpha value indicating transparency of the image.

  Further, the CGROM 105Bb stores, without compressing, palette data in which color number information specifying a color number is associated with display color information for actually displaying a color. Note that the CGROM 105Bb may have a configuration in which only a part of the image data is compressed without being compressed. Also, various known compression methods such as MPEG 4 can be used as the compression method of the movie.

  Further, the image generation unit 105B has a crystal oscillator. The crystal oscillator outputs a pulse signal to VDP 105 Ba. The VDP 105 Ba divides this pulse signal to generate a synchronization signal (horizontal synchronization signal / vertical synchronization signal) for synchronizing with the image display device 14, and outputs the synchronization signal to the image display device 14.

  Next, details of various tables stored in the main ROM 101b will be described with reference to FIGS.

(Jumping judgment table)
FIG. 4 (a-1) and FIG. 4 (a-2) are figures which show an example of the big hit determination table for performing a big hit determination. The jackpot determination is a part of the special symbol lottery described above, and is for determining whether or not a "big hit" for executing a jackpot game (special game) advantageous to the player is won.

  FIG. 4A-1 is a table (hereinafter referred to as a “first jackpot determination table”) referred to in the first jackpot determination performed based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 6. On the other hand, FIG. 4A-2 is a table (hereinafter referred to as a "second jackpot determination table") referred to in the second jackpot determination performed based on the ball entering the second starting opening 7 of the gaming ball. is there.

  In any of the jackpot determination tables, a jackpot determination table (hereinafter referred to as a "low probability jackpot determination table") to be referred to when the jackpot probability described later is relatively low (set to a standard value) And a jackpot determination table (hereinafter referred to as a “high probability jackpot determination table”) to be referred to when the state is relatively high (set higher than the standard value).

  In each jackpot determination table, the jackpot determination value and the determination result are uniquely associated with each other and stored. As will be described later, by matching the jackpot determination random number obtained based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 6 or the second starting opening 7 on the jackpot determination table, "big hit" or "loss" It is judged (decided).

  After the stop display of the special symbol (special result) showing the result that the jackpot judgment result is "big hit", the jackpot game (special game) with the opening of the big winning opening 8 is executed, and the prize ball is more than usual It is easy to get That is, the game value is given to the player.

  When the result of the jackpot determination is "loss", the reach determination is further performed based on the reach determination table of FIG. 4 (b). In the reach determination table, the reach determination value and the presence / absence of execution of reach effect are uniquely associated and stored. As described later, the reach effect is executed in the fluctuation effect by comparing the reach determination random number acquired based on the entry of the game ball to the first start opening 6 or the second start opening 7 on the reach determination table. It is judged (decided) whether or not to.

  If the result of the reach determination is “reach presence” to execute reach effect, reach effect for enhancing the player's expectation for the jackpot win is performed in the fluctuation effect (special figure lottery effect). In the present embodiment, the probability that "reach" is determined in the reach determination table used in the reach determination to be executed based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 6 will be described later with respect to the first Although it is not divided by the number of special drawing reservations, the probability of being determined to be "reach" may be divided by the number of first special drawing reservations, and may be different depending on the number of first special drawing reservations. For example, the probability that "reach" is determined in the reach determination table used when the first special drawing reservation number is a first value (for example, the first special drawing reservation number = 0 to 1) is the first special Make it higher than the probability that "reach is determined" in the reach determination table used when the figure reserve number is a second value (for example, the first special figure reserve number 2 2) which is larger than the first value Can.

  In addition, similarly, the probability that it is determined that "reach is" in the reach determination table used in the reach determination to be executed based on the entry of the game ball to the second starting opening 7 is the second special view reserve described later Although not divided by a number, the probability of being determined to be “reached” may be divided by the number of second special map reservations, and may be different according to the number of second special map reservations. For example, the probability that "reach" is determined in the reach determination table used when the second special drawing reservation number is a third value (for example, second special drawing reservation number = 0 to 1) is the second special Make it higher than the probability that "reach is determined" in the reach determination table used when the number of figure reservations is a fourth value (for example, the second special figure reservation number 2 2) that is larger than the third value Can.

  As reach effect, for example, during the fluctuation display of the production design, production design (for example, production design TZ1 and production in 2 areas of the left area, the central area, and the right area of the display unit 140 of the image display device 14) The symbol TZ3) is temporarily stopped, and if the predetermined effect pattern is stopped on the predetermined effective line in the remaining one area, it becomes a state (a so-called "reach state") that becomes an array of effect symbols representing a jackpot win Reach production is mentioned. In addition to this, there is a full rotation reach effect or the like which is variably displayed in the state where the same kind of effect design is arranged in the left side area, the center area and the right side area of the display unit 140 of the image display device 14.

  After reach condition occurs in the reach production, increase the expectation of jackpot win (expect that the variation display of the special symbol will be a special result) specific production ("SP reach production" and "SPSP reach production" described later) May or may not occur. In addition, in reach production, reach condition does not necessarily occur. That is, there is also a reach effect in which a specific effect is performed to increase the player's expectation for winning a jackpot without the occurrence of a reach state. In the present embodiment, if the result of the jackpot determination is "big hit", reach effect is performed. However, even in the case of the jackpot, reach determination may be performed, and reach effect may be performed only when it is determined that “reach is” in the reach determination.

(Special symbol judgment table)
Fig.5 (a)-FIG.5 (b) are figures which show an example of the special symbol determination table for performing special symbol determination. Special symbol determination is what constitutes the special symbol lottery mentioned above, and the type of special symbol to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol display devices 20 and 21 (stop display form of special symbol) is determined based on the result of the big hit determination It is to be.

  The special symbol determination table is roughly divided by the result of the big hit determination (big hit or loss). That is, FIG. 5 (a) is a special symbol judgment table for jackpot winning referred to in the special symbol judgment when the result of the jackpot judgment is "big hit", and FIG. 5 (b) is the result of the jackpot judgment " It is a special symbol determination table for a loss which is referred to in the special symbol determination in the case of "lost".

  Each of these tables is further divided by the type of the starting opening (the first starting opening 6 or the second starting opening 7) in which the game ball serving as a trigger for the special symbol determination is entered. When the result of the jackpot determination is "loss", the special symbol determination table is further divided by the presence or absence of the reach effect (reach determination result).

  In each special symbol determination table, the special symbol determination value and the type (determination result) of the special symbol to be stopped and displayed are uniquely associated and stored. As will be described later, the special symbol determination random number obtained based on the entry of the game ball to the first starting opening 6 or the second starting opening 7 is checked against the special symbol determination table to display the special symbol that is stopped. The type of symbol is determined (decided). As information indicating the type of the special symbol to be stopped and displayed, special figure stop symbol data and an effect symbol specification command are set.

  The special figure stop symbol data is used in processing in the main control board 101, and the effect symbol designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 102 and used in processing in the effect control board 102. The effect symbol designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 102 at the start of the variation display of the special symbol, and is used in the processing in the effect control board 102.

  The effect symbol designation command is a 1-byte MODE data for identifying a special symbol display device (the first special symbol display device 20 or the second special symbol display device 21) in which the special symbol according to the special symbol determination is stopped and displayed. And 1-byte DATA data for identifying the type of special symbol to be stopped and displayed.

  As for the effect symbol specification command, if the MODE data is "E3H", it indicates that the stop display of the special symbol is performed on the first special symbol display device 20, and if the MODE data is "E4H", the second special It represents that stop display of the special symbol is performed by the symbol display device 21. In addition, that the MODE data is "E1H", the production symbol designation command is called "1st production symbol specification command", and the MODE data is "E4H", production character designation command is called "2nd production symbol specification command".

(Big hit gaming control table)
FIG. 6A is a diagram showing an example of the jackpot game control table used when controlling the jackpot game.

  The jackpot game control table stores conditions for controlling the jackpot game. As a condition for controlling the jackpot game, an opening time which is a period from the start of the jackpot game to the first opening of the big winning opening 8, and the opening transmitted to the effect control board 102 at the opening start Designated command, type of table used to control the opening and closing of the big winning opening 8, ending time which is a period from the end of the last opening of the big winning opening 8 to the end of the big hit game, and ending An ending specification command to be transmitted to the effect control board 102 at the start time is set. The conditions for controlling these jackpot games are associated with the type of jackpot, that is, the type of special symbol (special symbol stop symbol data). That is, at the time of the jackpot game, which control condition to use is selected based on the type of the special symbol.

(Big winning opening opening and closing control table)
6 (b) to 6 (c) are diagrams showing an example of the big winning opening / closing control table used when controlling the opening and closing of the big winning opening 8 in the big hit game. FIG. 6 (b) is a large winning opening / closing control table for long per game referred to in long per game constituting a big hit game, and FIG. 6 (c) is a short per game referred to in short per game constituting a big hit game. It is a large winning a prize opening opening and closing control table.

  The condition for controlling the opening and closing of the big winning opening 8 in the big hit game is stored in the big winning opening and closing control table for the big hit game. As a condition for controlling the opening and closing of the big winning opening 8, the round number (R) which is the number of the round game, the special electric power which is the opening of the big winning opening 8 in each round game (operation of the big winning opening control device 80) The operation number (K), and the opening time and closing time (operation time and non-operation time) of the special winning opening 8 are set.

(Game condition data judgment table)
FIG. 7A is a view showing an example of a game condition data determination table for determining (determining) game condition data to be newly set after the end of the jackpot game. The game condition data determination table is divided according to the state (low probability gaming state / high probability gaming state) of the winning probability of the big hit, and in each of the divided tables, the type of special symbol (special figure stop symbol data) and the game Condition data is uniquely associated with and stored. The game condition data includes the state of the jackpot probability newly set by the jackpot and the state of the start probability winning state and the number of times of special symbol display that can be executed depending on the state of the game conditions (Xa, Ja: hereinafter, It represents “the number of executable times”, and three types “00H” to “02H” are set.

  FIG. 7B is a view showing an example of the game condition determination table for determining the game conditions from the game condition data. The game condition determination table includes game condition data, ON / OFF of flags (high probability flag and time reduction flag) indicating the state of each game condition, and the number of times of variation display of the special symbol that can be executed depending on the state of the game condition (Xa , Ja: Hereinafter, the “number of executable times” is uniquely associated and stored. The number of times the special symbol variation display can be performed can be said to be the number of special symbol lotterys.

(Special chart fluctuation pattern judgment table)
FIGS. 8-9 is a figure which shows an example of the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table referred when determining the aspect (henceforth "a special figure fluctuation pattern") of the fluctuation display of a special symbol. The special figure fluctuation pattern is associated with the time required for the fluctuation display of the special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "special drawing fluctuation time") and the effect type of the fluctuation effect (special drawing lottery effect) according to the fluctuation display of the special symbol. ing. The details of the fluctuation effect will be described later, but it is the effect that the fluctuation display of the special symbol is performed until the end of the fluctuation display of the special symbol, and the fluctuation display of the above-mentioned effect pattern is included. Other than the fluctuation display of the symbol, the image effect by the object image such as the character by the image display device 14 or the predetermined movie image, the sound effect by the sound output device 15, the illumination effect by the effect illumination device 16, the operation effect by the movable portion 17A, etc. It consists of

  In addition, the special figure fluctuation pattern is displayed in the first special figure fluctuation pattern which is an aspect of the fluctuation display of the first special symbol displayed in the first special symbol display device 20 and the second special symbol display device 21 It is distinguished by the 2nd special figure change pattern which is an aspect of the change display of 2 special symbols.

  FIG. 8 is a diagram showing an example of the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table referred to when determining the special figure fluctuation pattern in the non time saving game state described later, and FIG. 9 is a time short gaming state (low probability time short And FIG. 18 is a diagram showing an example of a special figure fluctuation pattern determination table to be referred to when determining the special figure fluctuation pattern in (including high probability time and short time). That is, the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table is roughly divided depending on the gaming state.

  In addition, the special figure fluctuation pattern decision table, the special figure stop symbol data and the special figure reservation number which can specify the kind of special symbol which is indicated being fluctuated (kind of starting opening which relates to the particular fluctuation indication) and the result of special symbol decision Divided by U1 or U2).

  In each table, the special figure fluctuation pattern determination value and one or more special figure fluctuation patterns are uniquely associated and stored. As will be described later, the special figure fluctuation pattern determination random number acquired based on the ball entry of the gaming ball into the first starting opening 6 or the second starting opening 7 is compared with the special drawing fluctuation pattern determination table. A figure variation pattern is determined.

  Since the special figure fluctuation pattern is assigned with a predetermined probability set in advance in each table, the special figure fluctuation pattern is expected to have a high probability of winning a big hit or a specific big hit (for example, a positive variation big hit, a long hit, etc.) The degree of expectation is associated.

  In addition, the special figure fluctuation pattern is formally decided by the special figure fluctuation pattern judgment (step S313-3) at the time of the fluctuation indication start of the special symbol (at the time of the special symbol memory decision processing of step S310) At the time of entering the ball 6 and 7 (during the input control process of step S200), it is tentatively determined by the first preliminary determination process (step S237) or the second preliminary determination process (step S247).

  In addition, the starting opening winning combination designation command and the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command are set corresponding to each special figure fluctuation pattern. The starting opening winning combination designation command corresponds to the special view fluctuation pattern determined by the first prior determination or the second prior determination described later, and is transmitted to the effect control board 102 after the execution of the first prior determination or the second prior determination. The special figure variation pattern specification command corresponds to the special figure variation pattern determined by the special figure variation pattern determination, and is transmitted to the effect control board 102 after the special figure variation pattern determination is performed.

  Special figure fluctuation pattern specification command, 1 byte for identifying the special symbol display device (the 1st special symbol display device 20 or the 2nd special symbol display device 21) where the fluctuation display of the special symbol which relates to the particular symbol decision concerned is done And the 1-byte DATA data for identifying the special figure fluctuation pattern. As for the special figure variation pattern specification command, if the MODE data is "E6H", it indicates that the special symbol variation display is performed on the first special symbol display device 20, and if the MODE data is "E7H", the 1st special symbol display device 20 2 represents that the special symbol display is performed by the special symbol display device 21.

  Note that the special figure fluctuation pattern specification command whose MODE data is "E6H" is the "first special figure fluctuation pattern specification command", and the special data fluctuation pattern specification command whose MODE data is "E7H" is the "second special drawing It is called a fluctuation pattern specification command.

  The starting opening winning combination designation command is configured of 1 byte MODE data for identifying the type of starting opening, and 1 byte DATA data for identifying a special figure fluctuation pattern.

  As for the start opening winning combination designation command, if the MODE data is "E1H", it indicates that the gaming ball has entered the first start opening 6, and if the MODE data is "E2H", the second start opening 7 is displayed. Indicates that the game ball has entered. In addition, the thing of the start opening winning combination designation command whose MODE data is "E1H" is the "1st start opening winning combination designation command", the thing of the start opening winning combination designation command whose MODE data is "E2H" is "2nd start opening winning combination designation command" "

  Further, in the rightmost column of the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table, as a reference, the effect type (rough classification) of the fluctuation effect corresponding to the special figure fluctuation pattern is described.

  Here, the effect type of the fluctuation effect according to the special figure fluctuation pattern described in the column of the effect type of FIGS. 8 and 9 will be described.

  The “normal fluctuation” described in FIGS. 8 and 9 is a normal fluctuation effect without the reach, and is a fluctuation effect which makes it difficult for the player to have a jackpot winning expectation. The “shortened fluctuation” is a fluctuation effect with a fluctuation time shorter than a normal fluctuation and not accompanied by a reach, and is a fluctuation effect which makes it difficult for a player to have a jackpot winning expectation. The "very short fluctuation" is a fluctuation effect which has a fluctuation time shorter than that of a shortening fluctuation and does not involve a reach, and is a fluctuation effect which makes it difficult for a player to have a jackpot winning expectation.

  In "reach", a part of the combination of the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 notifying the big hit is temporarily stopped, and the other effect symbols and the special effect symbol TZ4 change, the player feels the expectation of the big hit It means the variation mode to have. For example, when a combination of three-digit effect symbols of "777" is set as a combination of effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 notifying a big hit, the two effect symbols TZ1 and TZ3 temporarily stop at "7" (false stop) ) And the remaining effect pattern TZ2 and the special effect pattern TZ4 are in a variation.

  In addition, with "temporary stop", the effect patterns TZ1 to TZ3 swing small, or the effect patterns TZ1 to TZ3 are deformed small to make it appear to the player as if the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are stopped. Mode, and may be called a pseudo stop. In addition, about special production design TZ4, because fluctuation display is started in synchronization with the start of fluctuation display of special design, fluctuation display is started, because it is stopped and displayed in synchronization with stop display of special symbol, it is effect design TZ1 The temporary stop is not performed as in TZ3 to TZ3, but the display may be synchronized (synchronized) with the variable display of the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 and the variable stop (including the temporary stop).

  8 and 9, two rendering symbols TZ1 and TZ3 temporarily stop in the left and right regions of the display unit 140 of the image display device 14, and one remaining rendering symbol TZ2 in the central region. It is a reach effect with a low degree of expectation (a special game is executed) in which the special effect design TZ4 changes in the end side area and the special effect is executed.

  In the present embodiment, although “normal reach” is not selected as the special figure change pattern relating to the big hit, “normal reach” is selected as the special figure change pattern relating to the big hit. It can also be done.

  The “SP reach” described in FIGS. 8 and 9 is a super reach effect having a high degree of expectation (in which a special game is executed) having a jackpot win than the normal reach. For example, the effect pattern TZ2 of the central area not temporarily stopped may make a special change, or a special effect image or a movie may be displayed.

  The “SPSP reach” described in FIG. 8 and FIG. 9 is a special reach effect having a high degree of expectation (a special game is executed) having a jackpot win than the super reach. For example, a special effect image, a movie or the like different from the super reach may be displayed after the super reach.

  In addition, although it is not described in the column of the effect classification of FIG.8 and FIG.9, in this Embodiment, a pseudo | simulation continuous effect may be performed also in any change production | presentation. The "simulated series effect" is a special effect of temporarily stopping the production symbols TZ1 to TZ3 and temporarily changing it once or a plurality of times during the fluctuation display of the special symbols corresponding to one special symbol lottery. It means the advance notice effect by the fluctuation mode (simulating the variable display of a plurality of times). In addition, about special production pattern TZ4, even during the execution of the pseudo connected effect, the special effect is not performed, and the fluctuation display is continued until the fluctuation stop of the special symbol.

  As a first feature of the fluctuation effect pattern determination table in the non-time-saving game state shown in FIG.

As a first feature of the fluctuation effect pattern determination table in the time reduction gaming state shown in FIG. 9, the point is that the rate at which the ultra-shortened fluctuation is selected and determined increases as the number of special drawing reservations increases.
A second feature is that an ultra-shortened fluctuation (2 seconds) having a variation time shorter than the shortened fluctuation (4 seconds) of FIG. 8 is set.
The third feature is that a normal variation (6 seconds) having a variation time shorter than the normal variation (8 seconds) in FIG. 8 is set.
A fourth feature is that a long variation (10 seconds) having a variation time shorter than that of the long variation (13.5 seconds) in FIG. 8 is set.

  FIGS. 10A to 10F show an example of a table used when controlling an ordinary symbol-based game based on winning on the winning gate 10. FIG.

(Collision judgment table)
FIG. 10A is a diagram showing an example of a collision determination table for performing collision determination. The hit determination is to determine (determine) whether or not to execute an auxiliary game advantageous to the player with the opening of the second starting opening 7.

  The hit determination table is divided by the starting opening prize winning ease. Specifically, the hit determination table is divided into a hit determination table which is referred to in the non-time-short game state and a hit determination table which is referred to in the time-short game state.

  In each collision determination table, the collision determination value and the determination result are uniquely associated and stored. As described later, by collating the hit determination random number obtained based on the passage of the game ball to the winning gate 10 to the hit determination table, either “hit” or “loss” is determined. When the player wins the "hit", after the stop display of the normal symbol (specific result) indicating the result, the auxiliary game with the opening of the second starting opening 7 is executed, and the gaming ball enters the second starting opening 7 than usual. It is easy to hit the ball and it is easy to get the winning ball. That is, the game value is given to the player.

(Normal symbol judgment table)
FIG.10 (b) is a figure which shows an example of the normal symbol determination table for performing a normal symbol determination. The normal symbol determination is to determine (determine) the type of the normal symbol to be stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display device 22. The normal symbol determination table is divided by the result of the hit determination (hit and loss).

  In each normal symbol determination table, the normal symbol determination value and the normal symbol to be displayed in a stopped state are uniquely associated with each other and stored. As will be described later, by comparing the random number for normal symbol determination acquired based on the passage of the game ball to the winning gate 10 with the normal symbol determination table, the type of the normal symbol to be stopped and displayed is determined. As information indicating the type of normal symbols to be stopped and displayed, a common figure stop symbol data and a normal effect symbol specification command are set.

  The normal stop symbol data is used in the processing in the main control substrate 101, and the normal effect symbol designation command is transmitted to the effect control substrate 102 at the start of the variation display of the normal symbol, and is used in the processing in the effect control substrate 102.

(Common map fluctuation pattern judgment table)
FIG. 10 (c) determines the variation pattern of the normal symbol (hereinafter referred to as "common variation pattern") associated with the time required for the variable display of the normal symbol (hereinafter referred to as "general variation period"). It is a figure which shows the common drawing fluctuation pattern determination table for. The common drawing fluctuation pattern determination table is composed of a common drawing fluctuation pattern judgment table to be referred to in the non-time-saving game state and a common drawing fluctuation pattern judgment table referred to in the time-short playing state.

  In each table, the common drawing fluctuation pattern determination value and one or more common drawing fluctuation patterns are uniquely associated and stored. As described later, the kind of common drawing fluctuation pattern is determined by checking the common drawing fluctuation pattern judging random number obtained based on the passage of the game ball to the winning gate 10 in the common drawing fluctuation pattern judging table. .

(Auxiliary game reference data judgment table)
FIG. 10D is a view showing an example of the auxiliary game reference data determination table used when controlling the auxiliary game. In this table, data (auxiliary game reference data) to be referred to when performing the auxiliary game is stored. As shown in FIG. 10 (d), in the auxiliary game reference data determination table, the combination of the current starting opening prize winning ease and the common drawing stop symbol data and the auxiliary game reference data are associated. That is, the auxiliary game reference data has information on the starting opening winning possibility state when the normal symbol determination is performed and the result of the normal symbol determination.

(Auxiliary game control table)
FIG. 10E is a view showing an example of the auxiliary game control table used when controlling the auxiliary game. The conditions for controlling the auxiliary game are stored in this table. As a condition for controlling the auxiliary game, it is transmitted to the effect control board 102 at the opening start time which is a period from the start of the auxiliary game to the first opening of the second starting port 7 and the opening start Opening designation command, type of table used to control the opening and closing of the second start opening 7, ending time which is a period from the end of the last opening of the second opening 7 to the end of the auxiliary game, Also, an ending designation command to be transmitted to the effect control board 102 at the start of ending is set. The conditions for controlling these auxiliary games are associated with the auxiliary game reference data.

(Second start port opening and closing control table)
FIG. 10 (f) is a view showing an example of a second starting opening opening / closing control table for auxiliary game used when controlling the opening / closing of the second starting opening 7. As shown in FIG. Conditions for controlling the opening and closing of the second starting opening 7 in the auxiliary game are stored in the second starting opening and closing control table for the auxiliary game. As conditions for controlling the opening and closing of the second start opening 7, the general power operating number (D) which is the opening (the operation of the second start opening control device 70) number of the second start opening 7 in the auxiliary game, and (2) The opening time and closing time (operating time and non-operating time) of the starting port 7 are set.

(Description of the type of special game)
In the present embodiment, a "big hit game" to be executed when winning a "big hit" as a special game advantageous to the player, with the opening of the big winning opening 8 (activation of the big winning opening control device 80). Is provided. The big hit game is divided into "long play game" and "short hit game" mainly by the difference in opening / closing mode of the big winning opening 8. For this reason, in the middle of the "big hit game", it is advantageous for the player to flow the game ball toward the big winning opening 8 in the right side area 2AR.

  In the jackpot game, a round game with one or more opening of the big winning opening 8 is executed a predetermined number of times. In each round game, the number of times the big winning opening 8 can be opened (hereinafter referred to as the maximum opening number) and the total of the openable time (hereinafter referred to as the maximum opening time) are set in advance. "Can be opened" is because the number of game balls that can enter the big winning opening 8 during one round game is limited (for example, nine). Therefore, even if the special winning opening 8 is not opened the maximum number of times open, the special winning opening 8 may be closed, and the round game may be ended. In addition, even if the maximum opening time has not passed, the special winning opening 8 is closed, and the round game may end. In addition, the maximum opening frequency and the maximum opening time of the big winning opening 8 in each round game may or may not be unified in each jackpot game.

(Description of gaming conditions)
Next, the game conditions which become the conditions when the game proceeds will be described. In the present embodiment, the jackpot winning probability and the starting hole winning possibility are set as the game conditions. The game proceeds under the low probability gaming state or the high probability gaming state for the winning probability of the jackpot, and the game progresses under the short time gaming state or the non-short time gaming state for the starting opening ability of the game ball Do. The initial (when the power is turned on) gaming conditions are set to the low probability gaming state and the non time saving gaming state, and are referred to as the normal gaming state based on the low probability gaming state and the non time saving gaming state. Further, the low probability gaming state and the short time gaming state are referred to as a low probability short gaming state, and the high probability gaming state and the short time gaming state are referred to as a high probability short gaming state (probable variation gaming state).
Here, in the "normal game state", in order to execute the first special symbol lottery based on the ball entering the first starting opening 6 of the gaming ball, it is directed to the left area 2AL where it is easy to enter the first starting opening 6 It is an advantageous condition for the player to let the game ball flow down.

  In the present embodiment, the low probability gaming state with respect to the jackpot winning probability means that the jackpot winning probability in the jackpot determination is set relatively disadvantageously to the player at 1 / 299.3. On the other hand, the high probability gaming state means that the jackpot winning probability is set to be higher than the low probability gaming state, that is, 1/40 which is relatively advantageous to the player. Therefore, when the jackpot winning probability is a high probability gaming state, winning of the jackpot is easier than in the low probability gaming state, and the number of jackpot wins per unit time is relatively large, which is advantageous for the player It can be said that

  The non-time-short game state is a state in which the start-up winning ability is normal. Specifically, in the non-time-short game state, the spread map fluctuation time is set to 15 seconds, and the operation time of the second starting opening control device 70 that operates when winning in "hit" in the hit determination (second start The total opening time of the mouth 7 is set to 0.2 seconds or 5.1 seconds, and the probability of winning a hit in the determination of a normal symbol is set to 1/50. In addition, it is because "the sum total of open time" may open the 2nd starting opening 7 in multiple times with respect to one hit. In addition, since the number of times that the game ball can win a prize is limited for one winning, when the game ball wins the number, the game ball is closed without waiting for the opening time and the number of times of opening to elapse.

On the other hand, the time saving game state (low probability / high probability) means that the opening time of the second starting opening 7 (operating time of the second starting opening control device 70) per unit time is smaller than the non time saving gaming state. It refers to the gaming state where the second starting opening 7 tends to be in the open mode for a long time. Due to the relatively high start-up winning ability and the relatively short variation time of the special pattern variation pattern set in the variation pattern determination table, the ratio for which the variation time shorter than the non-time saving game state is selected is Many (the average value of fluctuation time becomes short), and the number of executable times of the second special symbol determination per unit time also increases. Therefore, under the same jackpot winning probability, the larger the number of executions of the second special symbol determination per unit time, the greater the number of jackpot wins per unit time inevitably, so the time saving gaming state ( The low probability / high probability) can be said to be advantageous to the player over the non-time-saving gaming state.
In other words, in the time-saving game state (low probability / high probability), the game ball can be made to flow toward the second starting opening 7 located in the right after the winning gate 10 in the right area 2AR and the right area 2AR. It is an advantageous condition for the

  As described above, in the present embodiment, in the time-saving game state, the spread map fluctuation time is set to 3.0 seconds, and the total maximum opening time of the second starting opening 7 is set to 5.2 seconds. The probability of winning is set to 49/50. That is, all the components of the starting opening winning a prize ease are set to the player more advantageously than the non-time saving game state. In the time saving game state, the second starting opening 7 is opened twice through the 1.5 second closing (interval), but there is no such closing, and may be opened only once. Also, closure may be set multiple times.

  In the present embodiment, when the game ball enters the starting openings 6 and 7, three balls can be obtained, but the player discharges the game ball by operating the appropriate release handle 32. However, the number of game balls possessed by the player is likely to decrease. However, when in the time saving game state, entering the second start opening 7 is easier than in the non-time saving game state, so it is possible to suppress a decrease in the number of game balls possessed by the player. That is, also from the viewpoint of the number of gaming balls possessed by the player, the time saving game state is advantageously set for the player as compared with the non-time saving game state.

  As described above, the type of jackpot game (long game / short game) and the game condition (low probability game state / high probability game state and non-time-short game state / non-short game state / newly set after the jackpot game by jackpot win) The combination with the time saving game state is determined. In view of this, the type of the substantial jackpot (the type of jackpot based on the degree of profit enjoyed by the player) is the type of jackpot game to be executed and the game condition (newly set after the jackpot game is over) It can be said that the combination with the gaming state). Therefore, based on the combination of the type of jackpot game led by the jackpot and the gaming conditions after the jackpot game separately from the type of jackpot based on the special figure stop symbol data, that is, based on the type of profit enjoyed by the player Type of jackpot can be classified.

  The jackpot to run the long-hit game by winning the jackpot, then set the jackpot to 50 times the high probability gaming state and 100 times the short-time gaming state "high probability long time shorts per minute (probability variation jackpot 1)," by jackpot winning Run a long-running game, and then set a jackpot of 50 times in a high probability gaming state and 80 times in a short-time gaming state "High probability middle time short / long length (probable variation big hit 2)" After that, a jackpot that is set to 50 times of high probability gaming state and 60 times of short time gaming state is referred to as "high probability short time short / short hit (3 for probability variation big hit)".

  When the jackpot is won, the normal gaming state is set when the jackpot game starts regardless of the state before the jackpot game. That is, during the jackpot game, the low probability gaming state and the non time saving gaming state will be.

(Control processing of main control board)
Next, control processing executed by the main CPU 101a in the main control board 101 will be described.

(Main processing of main control board)
The main processing of the main control board 101 will be described with reference to FIG.

  When power is supplied from the power supply substrate 107 to the main CPU 101a, a system reset occurs in the main CPU 101a, and the main CPU 101a performs the following main processing.

  First, in step S10, the main CPU 101a performs an initialization process. In this process, the main CPU 101a reads the boot program from the main ROM 101b in response to power on, and determines whether the RAM clear switch (not shown) provided on the main control board 101 is ON or not. When the switch is ON, processing of initializing each storage area of the main RAM 101c is performed, and when the RAM clear switch is not ON, the control state before power interruption (power failure) is restored (restoration) Do the process of

  In step S20, the main CPU 101a updates the special figure fluctuation random number for determining the special figure fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation display of the special symbol composed of the random number for reach determination and the special pattern fluctuation random number. .

  In step S30, the main CPU 101a updates an initial value random number including a jackpot determination initial value random number, a special symbol determination initial value random number, and a collision determination initial value random number. Thereafter, the processes of step S20 and step S30 are repeated until predetermined interrupt processing is performed.

(Timer interrupt processing of main control board)
The timer interrupt process of the main control board 101 will be described with reference to FIG. The clock pulse generation circuit provided on the main control board 101 generates clock pulses at predetermined intervals (4 milliseconds), whereby the following timer interrupt processing is executed.

  First, in step S100, the main CPU 101a saves information stored in the register of the main CPU 101a in the stack area.

  In step S110, the main CPU 101a performs a special symbol change time update process, a special symbol stop time update process, an opening time update process, an opening / closing time update process for the special winning opening 8, etc. And, time control processing is performed to update the auxiliary gaming timer counter that performs update processing of fluctuation time of normal symbol, update processing of stop time of normal symbol, and update processing of open / close time of second starting port 7 and the like.

  In step S120, the main CPU 101a updates a specific random number composed of the jackpot determination random number, the special symbol determination random number, the hit determination random number, and the normal symbol determination random number.

  In step S130, the main CPU 101a performs an initial value random number update process of updating the jackpot determination initial value random number, the special symbol initial value random number, and the collision determination initial value random number.

  In addition, about update of various random numbers, a random number is updated by adding "1" to the random number counter provided for every classification of random numbers. Various random numbers have random number ranges. The random number range is from “0” to the maximum value defined for the random number. Then, when updating the random number, if the random number indicated by the random number counter is the maximum value of the random number range, the random number counter is returned to "0" without adding "1" and the random number indicated by the random number counter has already been set once When the circulation initial value is reached, the initial value random number at that time is set as a new circulation initial value, and each random number value is newly updated.

  At step S200, the main CPU 101a performs an input control process. In this process, the main CPU 101a performs an input control process to determine whether or not a new valid signal has been transmitted from a predetermined detection sensor. Details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 14 to 17.

  In step S300, the main CPU 101a controls the first special symbol display device 20, the second special symbol display device 21, the first special symbol hold display device 23, the second special symbol hold display device 24, and the special winning opening control device 80. Perform special pattern special power control processing (special symbol processing) for performing control of the special symbol system (control of special symbol system device). The details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 18 to 26.

  In step S400, the main CPU 101a controls the normal symbol display device 22, the normal symbol hold display device 25, and the second starting opening control device 70 (controls the normal symbol system device). Perform symbol system processing). The details will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In step S500, the main CPU 101a performs payout control processing. In this process, the main CPU 101a has a starting opening (first starting opening 6, second starting opening 7), a special winning opening 8, and first to fourth general winning openings 11-1, 11-2, 11-3, It is checked whether the prize ball counter corresponding to 11-4 exceeds "0", and if it exceeds "0", the prize ball request signal indicating the number of prize balls corresponding to each winning opening is Transmit to the payout control board 103. Then, when transmitting a winning ball signal, an updating process is performed in which the winning ball counter relating to the signal is decremented by "1".

  In step S600, the main CPU 101a controls external signal output control data for outputting information about a game as an external signal to an external device such as the gaming information display device 700, a second start opening opening / closing solenoid 70B, and a special winning opening opening / closing solenoid Drive control data (starting opening opening and closing solenoid driving data and big winning opening opening and closing solenoid driving data) for driving 80 B, and predetermined display symbols 20, 21, 22 and hold display devices 23, 24, 25 A data creation process of display control data (special symbol display data, ordinary symbol display data, special symbol suspension display data, ordinary symbol suspension display data) to be displayed is performed.

  In step S700, the main CPU 101a performs output control processing. In this processing, first, port output processing for outputting a signal based on the external signal output control data and drive control data created in S600 is performed. Next, in order to turn on the respective LEDs of the symbol display devices 20, 21, 22 and the hold display devices 23, 24, 25, a display device output process is performed to output a signal based on the display control data created in step S600. . Finally, command transmission processing for transmitting the command set in the transmission buffer of the main RAM 101c to another board is also performed.

  In step S800, the main CPU 101a restores the information saved in step S100 to the register of the main CPU 101a.

  The input control process will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S210, the main CPU 101a receives a detection signal from any of the first to fourth general winning opening detection sensors 11-1a, 11-2a, 11-3a, 11-4a, that is, the game ball It is determined whether or not the player has entered any of the first to fourth general prize-winning openings 11-1, 11-2, 11-3, 11-4. When the main CPU 101a does not receive a detection signal from the first to fourth general winning opening detection sensors 11-1a, 11-2a, 11-3a, and 11-4a, the process proceeds to step S220. When the main CPU 101a receives a detection signal from any of the first to fourth general winning opening detection sensors 11-1a, 11-2a, 11-3a, 11-4a, the general winning combination used for the winning balls Predetermined data is added to the mouthpiece ball counter for update.

  In step S210, when the detection signal is input from the first general winning opening detection sensor 11-1a, the main CPU 101a detects the first general winning opening entrance specification command from the second general winning opening detection sensor 11-2a. When the signal is input, the second general winning opening entrance ball specification command, and when the detection signal is input from the third general winning opening detection sensor 11-3a, the third general winning opening entrance ball specification command, the fourth When a detection signal is input from the general winning a prize opening detection sensor 11-4 a, processing is performed to set a fourth general winning a prize opening entry designation command in the transmission buffer of the main RAM 101 c.

  In step S220, the main CPU 101a determines whether a detection signal from the special winning opening detection sensor 8a has been input, that is, whether the gaming ball has entered the special winning opening 8 or not. When the main CPU 101a does not input a detection signal from the special winning opening detection sensor 8a, the process proceeds to step S230. When the main CPU 101a receives a detection signal from the special winning opening detection sensor 8a, the main CPU 101a adds predetermined data to the special winning opening prize ball counter used for the winning ball and updates the winning combination. The counter value of the special winning opening defined winning counter (C) for counting the number of played balls is added and updated.

  In step S230, the main CPU 101a determines whether the detection signal from the first starting opening detection sensor 6a is input, that is, whether the gaming ball has entered the first starting opening 6 (starting area). Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S240, the main CPU 101a determines whether the detection signal from the second starting opening detection sensor 7a is input, that is, whether the gaming ball has entered the second starting opening 7 (starting area). Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S250, the main CPU 101a determines whether a detection signal from the winning gate detection sensor 10a has been input, that is, whether the gaming ball has passed through the winning gate 10 (starting area). Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

(First start port detection signal input processing of main control board)
Next, the first starting opening detection signal input process will be described with reference to FIG. In step S231, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not there is a valid detection signal from the first starting opening detection sensor 6a. If there is no valid detection signal, the present first starting opening detection signal input processing is ended, and if there is a valid detection signal, “1” is added to the starting opening prize ball counter for paying out the winning balls in step S232. The first starting hole winning process is performed to turn on the first starting hole winning flag in the first starting hole winning flag storage area of the main RAM 101c.

  In step S233, main CPU 101a determines whether the counter value of the first special figure hold number counter that counts the first special figure hold number (U1) is smaller than 4 (upper limit value). If the main CPU 101a determines that the counter value (U1) is not smaller than 4, the present first starting opening detection signal input processing ends, and if it is determined that the first special view reservation number (U1) is smaller than 4, the step At S234, the counter value of the first special view hold number counter is updated by adding "1".

  In order to update the first special figure reservation number (U1) displayed on the first special symbol storage display device 23 in step S234, the main CPU 101a determines the special symbol storage display data indicating the number of storages in the main RAM 101c. Set in the area. Further, in step S235, the main CPU 101a sets a first special symbol storage designation command corresponding to the first special drawing reservation number (U1) in the effect transmission data storage area (transmission buffer) of the main RAM 101c. As a result, the first special view reservation number (U1) is notified to the effect control board 102.

  In step S236, the main CPU 101a displays the jackpot judging random number indicated by the jackpot judging random number counter, the special symbol judgment random number indicated by the special symbol judgment random number counter, the reach judgment random number indicated by the reach judgment random number counter and the special figure fluctuation pattern A random number for special figure fluctuation pattern judgment indicated by the judgment random number counter is acquired and stored in the first special symbol hold storage area. In the following, the jackpot determination random number, the special symbol determination random number, the reach determination random number, and the special figure variation pattern determination random number are collectively referred to as "special figure determination information".

  The first special symbol hold storage area is divided into a first storage unit to a fourth storage unit (see FIG. 11A), and the special view determination information is a number in the storage unit in which no random number is stored. Are stored in order from the smallest storage unit. In each storage unit, an area is divided for each stored random number (see FIG. 11B).

  In step S237, the main CPU 101a performs a first advance determination process based on the ball entering the first starting opening 6 of the gaming ball. Here, the first prior determination process will be described.

  Specifically, in the first prior determination process, the stop symbol data of the first special symbol and the first special view variation pattern are determined based on the special view determination information acquired in step S236. That is, the main CPU 101a performs the first predetermination process before performing the jackpot determination process (step S311), the special symbol determination process (step S312), and the special figure fluctuation pattern determination process (step S313) described later. Determine the stop symbol data and the first special figure variation pattern.

  Then, in step S238, main CPU 101a transmits the stop symbol data of the first special symbol determined in the first prior determination processing and the first starting opening winning combination designation command corresponding to the first special figure fluctuation pattern to the main RAM 101c for transmission of effects It sets to a data storage area (transmission buffer), and ends this 1st starting opening detection signal input processing.

(Second start port detection signal input processing of main control board)
Next, the second starting opening detection signal input process will be described with reference to FIG. In step S241, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not there is a valid detection signal from the second starting opening detection sensor 7a. If the main CPU 101a determines that there is no valid detection signal, the second starting opening detection signal input processing ends, and if it determines that there is a valid detection signal, the process proceeds to step S242.

  In step S 242, the main CPU 101 a adds “1” to update the starting opening prize ball counter for paying out the winning balls, updates the second starting opening winning provision counter by “1”, and updates the main A second starting opening winning process is performed to turn on the second starting opening winning flag in the second starting opening winning flag storage area of the RAM 101c. The second starting opening winning provision counter counts the number of winnings to the second starting opening 7 in one auxiliary game. This is because, in the present embodiment, the number of balls entered into the second starting opening 7 of the gaming ball for one auxiliary game is limited.

  At step S243, main CPU 101a determines whether or not the counter value of the second special symbol hold number counter that counts the second special view hold number (U2) is smaller than 4 (upper limit value). If the main CPU 101a determines that the counter value (U2) is not smaller than 4, the main CPU 101a ends the present second start port detection signal input processing, and if determined that the second special view reserve number (U2) is smaller than 4, the step The process moves to S244.

  In step S244, the main CPU 101a adds “1” to the counter value (U2) of the second special view hold number counter to update it. In addition, main CPU 101a, in step S244, in order to update the second special drawing reserve number (U2) displayed on second special symbol reserve display device 24, the main RAM 101c the special symbol reserve display data indicating the reserve number Set in the predetermined area of In step S245, the main CPU 101a sets a second special symbol storage designation command corresponding to the second special view reservation number (U2) in the effect transmission data storage area (transmission buffer) of the main RAM 101c. Thereby, the second special view reservation number (U2) is notified to the effect control board 102.

  In step S246, the main CPU 101a displays the jackpot judging random number indicated by the jackpot judging random number counter, the special symbol judgment random number indicated by the special symbol judgment random number counter, the reach judgment random number indicated by the reach judgment random number counter and the special figure fluctuation pattern A random number for special figure fluctuation pattern determination (special figure determination information) indicated by the random number counter for determination is acquired and stored in the second special symbol hold storage area.

  In addition, the second special symbol suspension storage area is divided into the first storage to the fourth storage (see Fig. 11 (a)), and the special drawing determination information is a number in the storage where no random number is stored. Are stored in order from the smallest storage unit. In each storage unit, an area is divided for each stored random number (see FIG. 11B).

  Then, the main CPU 101a performs a second prior determination process based on entering the ball into the second starting opening 7 in step S247. Here, the second prior determination process will be described.

  Specifically, in the second prior determination process, the stop symbol data of the second special symbol and the second special view fluctuation pattern are determined based on the special view determination information acquired in step S246. That is, the main CPU 101a stops the second special symbol stop pattern as the second prior determination process before performing the big hit determination process (step S311), the special symbol determination process (step S312) and the special view fluctuation pattern determination process (step S313). Determine the data and the second special figure fluctuation pattern.

  Then, in step S248, the main CPU 101a transmits the stop symbol data of the second special symbol determined in the second prior determination process and the second start opening prize designation command corresponding to the second special view fluctuation pattern to the main RAM 101c for transmission of effects The data is set in the data storage area (transmission buffer), and the second starting opening detection signal input processing is completed.

(Primary gate detection signal input processing of main control board)
Next, winning gate detection signal input processing will be described using FIG. In step S251, it is determined whether or not there is a valid detection signal from the winning gate detection sensor 10a. If the main CPU 101a determines that there is no valid detection signal, the present winning gate detection signal input process ends, and if it determines that there is a valid detection signal, the process proceeds to step S252.

  In step S252, main CPU 101a determines whether the counter value of the normal symbol holding number counter that counts the common drawing holding number (G) is smaller than 4 (upper limit value). If the main CPU 101a determines that the counter value (G) is not smaller than 4, the present winning gate detection signal input processing ends, and if it is determined that the counter value (G) is smaller than 4, the process moves to step S253.

  In step S253, the main CPU 101a adds “1” to update the counter value (G) of the common drawing reserve number counter. In addition, main CPU101a, in order to update the common drawing reservation number (G) which is indicated in normal design reservation indicatory device 25 in step S253, to the specified territory of main RAM101c set. In step S254, the main CPU 101a sets an ordinary symbol storage designation command corresponding to the common drawing reservation number (G) in the effect transmission data storage area (transmission buffer) of the main RAM 101c. As a result, the general drawing reserve number (G) is notified to the effect control board 102.

  The main CPU 101a determines the random number for collision judgment indicated by the random number counter for collision judgment at step S255, the random number for ordinary symbol judgment indicated by the random number counter for ordinary symbol judgment, and the random number for common pattern fluctuation pattern judgment indicated by the random number counter for common pattern fluctuation pattern judgment. Is stored in the normal symbol storage area, and the process proceeds to step S256. In step S256, the main CPU 101a sets a winning gate passage designation command corresponding to the passage (winning) of the gaming ball to the winning gate 10 in the effect transmission data storage area (transmission buffer) of the main RAM 101c, and detects the winning gate. End the signal input process. Hereinafter, the hit determination random number, the normal symbol determination random number, and the common pattern change pattern determination random number will be collectively referred to as “common drawing determination information”.

  The normal symbol holding storage area is divided into the first storage to the fourth storage (see FIG. 11C), and the common drawing determination information is a storage having a smaller number among the storages in which no random number is stored. It will be stored in order from the department. In each storage unit, an area is divided for each stored random number (see FIG. 11D).

(Special drawing special power control processing of main control board)
Next, special drawing special power control processing will be described with reference to FIG. In step S301, the value of the special figure special power processing data is loaded, the branch destination address is referenced from the special figure special power processing data loaded in step S302, and the special figure special processing data determination process is performed if special figure special power processing data = 0 (step S310) Move the process to), and if the special figure special power process data = 1, move the process to the special symbol variation process (step S320), and if the special figure special power process data = 2, execute the special symbol stop process (step S330) If the special figure special power process data = 3, the process is transferred to the jackpot game process (step S340), and if the special figure special power process data = 4, the process is transferred to the jackpot game end process (step S350). The details will be described later with reference to FIGS.

(Special symbol memory judgment processing of main control board)
The special symbol storage determination process will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S310-1, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the variation display of the special symbol is in progress. If the main CPU 101a determines that the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, the main symbol storage determination process ends, and if it is determined that the special symbol is not being displayed, the process proceeds to step 310-2.

  At step S310-2, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the second special view reservation number (U2) is one or more. If it is determined that the second special drawing reservation number (U2) is not one or more, the process proceeds to step S310-4, and if it is determined that the second special drawing reservation number (U2) is one or more, the processing proceeds to step S310-3. Transfer the process.

  In step S310-3, main CPU 101a subtracts “1” from the counter value of the second special symbol hold number counter and updates it, and corresponds to the second special view hold number (U2) after subtraction in step S310-6. The special symbol storage designation command to be set is set in the effect transmission data storage area (transmission buffer) of the main RAM 101c.

  In step S310-7, main CPU 101a sets a gaming state designating command corresponding to the current gaming state to the transmission data storage area for effect, and in step S310-8, the data stored in the second special symbol hold storage area The shift processing is performed to shift the special figure determination information stored in the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit to the previous storage unit.

  For example, the special view determination information stored in the fourth storage unit of the second special symbol storage area is shifted to the third storage unit of the second special symbol storage area. Moreover, the special figure determination information stored in the first storage unit of the second special symbol hold storage area is shifted to the storage area (0th storage unit) that is the special symbol common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The special figure determination information stored in the zeroth storage unit is erased. As a result, the special view determination information used in the previous game is deleted. Furthermore, the special view stop symbol data and the game condition data used in the previous game are also deleted from the corresponding storage areas.

  On the other hand, in step S310-4, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the first special map reservation number (U1) is 1 or more. When the main CPU 101a determines in step S310-4 that the first special view reservation number (U1) is 1 or more, the main CPU 101a shifts the process to step S310-5.

  Main CPU 101a subtracts “1” and updates the counter value of the first special symbol holding number counter in step S310-5, and corresponds to the first special image holding number (U1) after subtraction in step S310-6. A special symbol storage specification command is set in the effect transmission data storage area (transmission buffer) of the main RAM 101c.

  In step S310-7, main CPU 101a sets a gaming state designating command corresponding to the current gaming state to the transmission data storage area for effect, and in step S310-8, the data stored in the first special symbol hold storage area The shift processing is performed to shift the special figure determination information stored in the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit to the previous storage unit.

  For example, the special view determination information stored in the fourth storage unit of the first special symbol storage area is shifted to the third storage unit of the first special symbol storage area. Further, the special figure determination information stored in the first storage unit of the first special symbol storage area is shifted to the special symbol relevant storage area (the 0th storage unit) and stored in the 0th storage unit. The figure determination information is deleted. Thereby, the special view determination information used in the previous game is erased. Furthermore, the special view stop symbol data and the game condition data used in the previous game are also deleted from the corresponding storage areas.

  In addition, in order to update the first special drawing reservation number (U1) or the second special drawing reservation number (U2) along with the shift process of the special drawing determination information in step S310-8, specifically, the data In order to change the display contents of the special symbol hold display devices 23 and 24 corresponding to the type of starting opening according to the first and second special symbol hold display data is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 101c. The hold display data includes information on the type of special symbol hold display device and information on the number of special symbol hold (U1 or U2).

  Moreover, in this embodiment, the second special symbol hold storage area is prioritized over the first special symbol hold storage area in steps S310-2 to S310-8 (the second special figure hold number is the first special view hold). Although it was decided to digest it in preference to the number, the first special symbol hold storage area or the second special symbol hold storage area was shifted in the order in which the game balls entered the starting opening (the first special view hold number And the second special drawing reserve number may be digested in the order of winning), or the first special symbol hold storage area is prioritized over the second special symbol hold storage area and shifted (the first special figure hold number is the second It may be made to digest prior to the number of special views.

  In step S310-4, when it is determined that the first special drawing reservation number (U1) is not 1 or more, the process proceeds to step S319-1 to step S319-3, and a customer for setting a customer waiting state Perform wait state setting processing. In addition, the customer waiting state refers to the state in which the special symbol variation display and the special game (big hit game) are not executed, but the requirement that the normal symbol variation display and the auxiliary game are not executed is included in the requirement May be

  As the customer waiting state setting process, the main CPU 101a first determines in step S319-1 whether or not the customer waiting state determination flag "01H" is set in the customer waiting state determination flag storage area. When the customer waiting state determination flag "01H" is set in the customer waiting state determination flag storage area, the main CPU 101a ends the special symbol storage determination process, and the customer waiting state determination in the customer waiting state determination flag storage area If the flag "01H" is not set, the process proceeds to step S319-2.

  In step S319-2, the main CPU 101a sets the customer waiting state determination flag "01H" in the customer waiting state determination flag storage area so that the customer waiting state is not repeatedly and set.

In step S319-3, the main CPU 101a sets a customer waiting state designation command in the effect transmission data storage area, and ends the special symbol storage determination process. As a result, the effect control board 102 is notified that it is in the customer waiting state.
Here, as for the setting of the customer waiting state designation command to the transmission data storage area for effect, the variation display of the special symbol is performed as described in step S310-1, step S310-2, and step S310-4. In addition, when there is no number of reservations of the first special drawing reservation number (U1) and the second special drawing reservation number (U2), it is executed by the main CPU 101a.

  In step S311, the main CPU 101a executes the jackpot determination process based on the data shifted in step S310-8 and newly stored in the zeroth storage unit.

(Jumping judgment processing of main control board)
Here, the jackpot determination process will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S311-1, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the variation display of the special symbol at this time is the variation display of the first special symbol based on the subtraction of the first special drawing reservation number (U1).

  When the main CPU 101a determines in step S311-1 that it is a variable display of the first special symbol, it selects the first special symbol jackpot determination table in step S311-2. On the other hand, when determining that it is not the first starting opening 6 (the second starting opening 7) in step S311-1, the main CPU 101a selects the second special symbol jackpot determination table in step S311-3.

  Next, in step S311-4, the main CPU 101a determines whether a flag is turned on in the high probability flag storage area. Here, that the flag is turned on in the high probability flag storage area means that it is a high probability gaming state with respect to the current jackpot winning probability.

  If the main CPU 101a determines in step S311-4 that the flag is turned on in the high probability flag storage area, then in step S311-5, the main CPU 101a further selects one of the tables selected in step S311-2 or step S311-3. The first high probability jackpot determination table or the second high probability jackpot determination table is selected.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 101a determines that the flag is not turned on in the high probability flag storage area, in step S311-6, the first low probability is selected from the tables selected in step S311-2 or step S311-3. The jackpot determination table for the jackpot or the jackpot determination table for the second low probability is selected.

  In step S311-7, the main CPU 101a selects the jackpot determination random number shifted in step S310-6 and stored in the 0th storage unit, as the “high probability big hit selected in step S311-5 or step S311-6. The "judgment table" or the "low probability jackpot judgment table" is collated to determine whether it is "big hit" or "loss", and the present jackpot determination process is ended.

  When the big hit determination process ends, the main CPU 101a returns to the special symbol storage determination process shown in FIG. 19 and performs the special symbol determination process in step S312. In the special symbol determination process, the special symbol to be stopped and displayed on the special symbol display devices 20 and 21 is determined based on the result of the jackpot determination process. Here, the special symbol determination process will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S312-1, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the result of the jackpot determination is "big hit". Here, if it is determined that "big hit", the main CPU 101a selects the special symbol determination table for the big hit in step S312-4, and if it is not determined as "big hit", the step is performed. The process moves to S312-2.

  The main CPU 101a performs reach determination in step S312-2. Specifically, the reach determination random number value shifted in step S310-8 and stored in the zeroth storage unit is collated with the reach determination table.

  In step S312-3, the main CPU 101a determines whether the result of the reach determination in step S312-2 is "reach". If it is determined that "reach" is performed, the process proceeds to step S312-5, and a special symbol determination table for reach with loss is selected. On the other hand, if it is determined that "not reachable", that is, it is determined that "no reach", the process proceeds to step S312-6 to select a special symbol determination table for no reach losing.

  In step S312-7, main CPU 101a confirms the starting opening related to the special symbol storage determination processing based on the flag turned on in the starting opening winning flag storage area (first starting opening 6 or second starting opening 7) In step S312-8, based on the type of starting opening, either the special symbol determination table for the first starting opening or the special symbol determination table for the second starting opening is selected.

  In step S312-9, the main CPU 101a performs special symbol determination in which the random symbol value for special symbol determination shifted in step S310-8 and stored in the 0th storage unit is collated with the selected special symbol determination table.

  Then, in step S312-10, a rendering symbol designating command is determined based on the result of the special symbol determination in step S312-9, and the determined rendering symbol designating command is set in the effect transmission data storage area.

  Next, main CPU 101a, in step S312-11, based on the result of the special symbol determination in step S312-11, stop symbol data related to the special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "special symbol stop symbol data"), that is, the special symbol Is determined, and the determined special figure stop symbol data is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 101c.

  The special figure stop symbol data determined determines the "big hit special symbol" or the like in the special symbol stop process of Fig. 24 when determining the special pattern change pattern in the special figure change pattern determination process of Fig. 22 as described later. In this case, it is also used when determining the opening / closing mode of the big winning opening 8 in the big hit game processing of FIG.

  In step S312-12, the main CPU 101a collates the special figure stop symbol data in the gaming condition data determination table to set the gaming condition data, and ends the special symbol determination process. Specifically, the main CPU 101a checks the high probability flag storage area, and selects a gaming condition data determination table according to the current state of the jackpot winning probability. Next, the special pattern stop symbol data is collated with the selected gaming condition data determination table to determine gaming condition data, which is set in the gaming condition data storage area of the main RAM 101c.

  As described above, when the special symbol determination process is completed, the main CPU 101a returns to the special symbol storage determination process shown in FIG. 19, and performs the special figure fluctuation pattern determination process in step S313. In the special figure fluctuation pattern judgment process, based on the result of the big hit judgment, the result of the special symbol judgment and the result of the reach judgment, the special drawing fluctuation pattern including the information about special drawing fluctuation time and the effect type of fluctuation effect mentioned later decide.

(Special pattern change pattern judgment processing of main control board)
The special figure fluctuation pattern determination process will be described using FIG. First, in step S313-1, the main CPU 101a refers to the ON / OFF of the high probability flag and the ON / OFF of the time saving flag, which will be described later, to determine the current gaming state (high probability gaming state / low probability gaming state, and Check the time saving game state / non-time saving game state), and select the special view fluctuation pattern determination table associated with the game state.

  In step S313-2, the main CPU 101a confirms the special view stop symbol data stored in the main RAM 101c, and determines the special view fluctuation pattern determination table based on the special view stop symbol data. This is because in the present embodiment, the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table divided according to the gaming state is further divided by the special figure stop symbol data.

  In addition, when the special figure stop symbol data is "19" or "29", that is, when the result of the special symbol lottery is a loss without reach, the number of special figure reservations according to this special figure fluctuation pattern determination is further (U1 or The special figure fluctuation pattern determination table is determined based on U2). This is because, in the present embodiment, the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table related to the no reach loss is also divided by the number of special figure reservations.

  When the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table is determined, the main CPU 101a performs special figure fluctuation pattern determination in step S313-3. Specifically, the special drawing fluctuation pattern determination random number is collated with the determined special drawing fluctuation pattern determination table to determine the special drawing fluctuation pattern.

  When the main CPU 101a determines the special figure fluctuation pattern, it returns to the special symbol storage determination process shown in FIG. 19 and transmits the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command corresponding to the special figure fluctuation pattern in step S310-9 for transmission of the main RAM 101c. Set in the data storage area.

  Thereby, the special figure fluctuation pattern specification command is transmitted to the effect control board 102, and the effect control board 102 receives the gaming state specification command, the effect symbol specification command, and the special figure fluctuation pattern specification command, thereby displaying the special symbol fluctuation display. Recognizes that the game is to be started, and determines a change effect pattern associated with the contents of the change effect based on the game state specification command, the effect symbol specification command, and the special figure change pattern specification command. It is to be noted that the effect control board 102 may recognize that the variation display of the special symbol is started by receiving the rendering symbol designation command and / or the special view variation pattern designation command. In addition, the game state specification command may be transmitted after transmission of the rendering symbol specification command or the special figure variation pattern specification command.

  Then, at step S310-10, main CPU 101a sets the special game fluctuation time (see FIGS. 8 and 9) associated with the special drawing fluctuation pattern to the special game timer counter. The special game timer counter is subjected to subtraction processing every 4 ms in step S110.

  In step S310-11, the main CPU 101a sets special symbol variation display data in order to perform variation display of the special symbol by the first special symbol display device 20 or the second special symbol display device 21. The special symbol variation display data includes information such as the type of special symbol display device to be operated, the mode of variation display, and the variation time.

  In step S310-12, main CPU 101a sets flag "00H" in the customer waiting state determination flag storage area, that is, clears the customer waiting state determination flag storage area to end the customer waiting state, and step S310- At 13, special figure special power processing data = 1 is set, and this special symbol storage determination processing is ended.

(Special symbol variation processing of main control board)
Next, special symbol variation processing will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S320-1, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the variation display of the special symbol is ended, in other words, whether or not the special figure fluctuation time set in step S310-10 has passed (special game timer Determine whether counter = 0?). As a result, when it is determined that the variation display of the special symbol is not finished, the special symbol variation process is finished, and the next subroutine is executed.

  When the main CPU 101a determines that the variation display of the special symbol is finished, in step S320-2, in order to convey to the effect control board 102 that the variation display of the special symbol is terminated, the special figure variation stop designation command is produced Set in the transmission data storage area for

  The main CPU 101a, based on the special figure stop symbol data set in the above step S312-11, in step S320-3, to display the special symbol on the special symbol display devices 20 and 21 in a stop manner, the special view stop display data Set As a result, the player is notified of the result of the special symbol lottery. In step S320-4, the main CPU 101a sets the time required for the stop display of the special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "special figure stop time", for example, 0.8 seconds) in the special game timer counter. The special game timer counter is subjected to subtraction processing every 4 ms in step S110.

  Then, the main CPU 101a sets 2 in the special figure special power processing data in step S320-5, turns off the first starting opening winning flag or the second starting opening winning flag in step S320-6, and changes the special symbol variation processing. Finish.

(Special symbol stop processing of main control board)
The special symbol stop process will be described with reference to FIG. First, at step S330-1, the main CPU 101a first determines whether or not the stop display of the special symbol ends, in other words, the special view stop time set in the special game timer counter at step S320-4 has elapsed It is determined whether it has been done. As a result, when it is determined that the stop display of the special symbol is not ended, the present special symbol stop processing is ended, and when it is judged that the stop display of the special symbol is ended, the processing is shifted to step S330-2.

  In step S330-2, the main CPU 101a determines whether the time saving flag is ON (set) in the time saving flag storage area of the main RAM 101c. If the time saving flag is turned on in the time saving flag storage area, it means that the time saving game is currently in progress. If the time saving flag is ON in the time saving flag storage area, the process proceeds to step S330-3. If the time saving flag is OFF in the time saving flag storage area, the process proceeds to step S330-7.

  In step S330-3, main CPU 101a indicates the remaining count of the time saving gaming state remaining count counter indicating the remaining count of variation display of special symbols due to the time saving gaming state (J: hereinafter referred to as "time saving gaming state remaining count") The calculated value (J-1) obtained by subtracting "" is stored as the number of remaining time-saving gaming states (J).

  In step S330-4, the main CPU 101a sets a time saving number specifying command corresponding to the time saving gaming state remaining number (J) in the effect transmission data storage area. As a result, the time saving gaming state remaining number (J) is notified to the effect control board 102, and processing for causing the image display device 14 to display time shortening remaining number information (also referred to as remaining time shortening number information) is performed.

  At step S330-5, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the number of remaining time-saving gaming state (J) = 0. If the time saving gaming state remaining number of times (J) = 0, the processing is transferred to step S330-6, and if the time saving gaming state remaining number of times (J) is not 0, the processing is transferred to step S330-7.

  In step S330-6, the main CPU 101a turns off (clears) the time saving flag stored in the time saving flag storage area of the main RAM 101c. In addition, that the time saving game state remaining number of times (J) becomes “0” means that the variation display of the special symbol is possible number of times (Ja) in the time reduction gaming state, and the variation display of the special symbol by the “time saving” state Means to end.

  In step S330-7, the main CPU 101a determines whether the high probability flag is ON (set) in the high probability flag storage area of the main RAM 101c. The fact that the high probability flag is turned on in the high probability flag storage area means that it is currently in the high probability gaming state. If the high probability flag is turned on in the high probability flag storage area, the process proceeds to step S330-8. If the flag is turned off in the high probability flag storage area, the process proceeds to step S330-12. Move.

  In step S330-8, the main CPU 101a is a counter value of the high probability gaming state remaining number counter indicating the remaining number (X: hereinafter referred to as “high probability gaming state remaining number of times”) of variation display of special symbols due to high probability gaming state The calculated value (X−1) obtained by subtracting “1” from is stored as a new high probability game state remaining number (X).

  In step S330-9, the main CPU 101a sets a high probability number designation command corresponding to the high probability gaming state remaining number (X) set in the high probability gaming state remaining number counter in the effect transmission data storage area. As a result, the high probability gaming state remaining number (J) is notified to the effect control board 102, and processing for causing the image display device 14 to display high probability remaining number information (also referred to as remaining probability variation number information) is performed.

  In step S330-10, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the high probability gaming state remaining number (X) = 0. If the high probability gaming state remaining number (X) = 0, the processing moves to step S330-11, and if the high probability gaming state remaining number (X) = 0, the processing moves to step S330-12.

  In step S330-11, the main CPU 101a turns off the high probability flag stored in the high probability flag storage area. It should be noted that that the high probability gaming state remaining number (X) becomes "0" means that the variable display of the special symbol in the high probability gaming state can be executed number of times (Xa), the special symbol by the "high probability" state Means the end of the variable display of.

  In step S330-12, the main CPU 101a confirms the state of the current game condition, and sets a game state designation command indicating the game state in the effect transmission data storage area. As a result, the current game state is notified to the effect control board 102.

  In step S330-13, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the determination result of the jackpot determination according to the special symbol stop process is "jackpot". Specifically, it is determined whether the special symbol stop symbol data stored in the special symbol stop symbol data storage area relates to the big hit special symbol (special symbol stop symbol data = 10 to 12, 20 to 21). Do. Here, when it is not determined that the jackpot special symbol, the process proceeds to step S330-14, and when it is determined that the jackpot special symbol, the process proceeds to step S330-15.

  In step S330-14, the main CPU 101a sets 0 to the special figure special power process data, and performs a process to shift the process to the special symbol storage determination process shown in FIG.

  In step S330-15, the main CPU 101a sets 3 to the special figure special power process data, and in step S330-16, the game condition flag storage area (time saving flag storage area and high probability flag storage area), high probability gaming state The remaining fluctuation number counter and the remaining fluctuation number counter of the time saving gaming state are reset (cleared). That is, it is controlled to the low probability gaming state and the non time saving gaming state.

  In step S330-17, the main CPU 101a sets an opening designation command corresponding to the special view stop symbol data in the effect transmission data storage area as a big hit game opening process. Next, the main CPU 101a sets the opening time according to the special view stop symbol data to the special game timer counter. The special game timer counter is subtracted every 4 ms in step S110.

(The jackpot game processing of the main control board)
The jackpot game processing will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S340-1, the main CPU 101a determines whether an opening is currently in progress. The opening referred to here is a period from the start of the jackpot game to the start of the first round game (first opening of the big winning opening 8). If it is determined that the opening is currently in progress, the process proceeds to step S340-2, and if it is determined that the opening is not currently in progress, the process proceeds to step S340-6.

  In step S340-2, the main CPU 101a determines whether a preset opening time has elapsed. That is, it is determined whether the special game timer counter = 0 or not, and when the special game timer counter = 0, it is determined that the opening time has elapsed. As a result, when the set opening time has not elapsed, the present jackpot game processing is ended, the next subroutine is executed, and when the opening time has elapsed, the processing is shifted to step S340-3. .

  At step S340-3, the main CPU 101a performs jackpot game start processing. Specifically, according to the special view stop symbol data, it is confirmed which jackpot it is, and while selecting the big winning a prize opening opening and closing control table according to the kind of jackpot, it sets to the specified territory of main RAM101c. Specifically, in accordance with the special view stop symbol data, the long winning game winning opening opening / closing control table or the short hitting gaming high winning opening opening / closing control table is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 101c. Next, the main CPU 101a adds “1” to the value (round number (R) stored in the number-of-round-games storage area and stores it. In addition, one round game is performed at the time of step S340-3. Since it is not executed, the main CPU 101a stores "1" in the number-of-round-games storage area.

  In step S340-4, the main CPU 101a performs a special winning opening open process. Specifically, the value stored in the special power operation number storage area (the special power operation number (K) is added with “1” and stored. Then, the main CPU 101a energizes the special winning opening / closing solenoid 80B to In order to open the special winning opening 8, the special winning opening opening / closing solenoid energization start data is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 101c, where the main CPU 101a determines the special winning opening opening / closing control table determined in step 340-3. Referring to the special game timer counter, the opening time of the special winning opening 8 (operating time of the special winning opening controller 80) is set based on the round number (R) and the special power operating number (K). The gaming timer counter is subjected to subtraction processing every 4 ms in step S110.

  In step S340-5, the main CPU 101a performs round designation command transmission determination processing. Specifically, it is determined whether or not K = 1. If K = 1, a round designation command indicating the current number of round games specified by the stored value of the number-of-round-games storage area is used. Set in the transmission data storage area for effects. This is for transmitting information to the effect that the round game starts to the effect control board 102. For example, at the first opening of the first round game of the long per game, “1” is set in the number-of-round game count storage area and “1” is set in the special power operation number storage area. A round designation command indicating one round game is set in the effect transmission data storage area. On the other hand, when "1" is not set in the special power operation number storage area, the present jackpot game processing is ended without setting the round designation command in the effect transmission data storage area. That is, since the case of K = 1 means the start of the round game, the main CPU 101a transmits a round designation command only at the start of the round. When the effect control board 102 receives the round designation command, for example, “ROUND 1” is displayed on the image display device 14 for effect.

  At step S340-6, the main CPU 101a determines whether it is currently in the process of ending. The term "ending" as used herein refers to a period from the end of all preset round games (when the last opening of the big winning opening 8 is ended) to the end of the main hit game. Therefore, if it is determined that the current ending is in progress, the process proceeds to step S340-17, and it is determined whether the ending time has elapsed, and if it is determined that the current ending is not in progress, step S340-7. Transfer the process to

  In step S340-7, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the special winning opening 8 is open, that is, whether or not the special winning opening control device 80 is in operation. When the main CPU 101a determines that the special winning opening 8 is open, in step S340-8, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the "opening completion condition" for ending the opening of the special winning opening 8 is satisfied. Do. As this "opening end condition", that the counter value of the special winning opening specified winning counter has reached the specified number (for example 9) in round game, or that the maximum opening time has elapsed (special game timer counter = 0 ) Has been adopted. Then, when it is determined that the "opening end condition" is established, the process proceeds to step S340-9, and when it is determined that the "opening end condition" is not established, the present jackpot game processing is ended.

  In step S340-9, the main CPU 101a performs a special winning opening closing process. The special winning opening closing process sets the energization stop data of the special winning opening opening / closing solenoid 80B in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 102c in order to close the special winning opening 8, and the special winning opening determined in step 340-3 above. Referring to the control table, based on the current round number (R) and the special electric power operating number (K), the closing time of the special winning opening 8 is set to the special game timer counter. As a result, the special winning opening 8 is closed.

  At step S340-10, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not one round game has ended. Specifically, in one round game, the special power operating number (K) is the number of times of opening set in the round game, or the counter value (C) of the special winning opening prescribed winning counter is the prescribed number ( For example, the process ends on the condition that the number 9) is reached, so it is determined whether such a condition is satisfied. Then, when it is determined that one round game is ended, the processing is shifted to step S340-12, and when it is determined that one round is not ended, the present jackpot game processing is ended.

  If the main CPU 101a determines in step S340-7 that the special winning opening 8 is not open, in step S340-11, the main CPU 101a determines whether a preset closing time has elapsed. As a result, when the closing time has not elapsed, the present jackpot game processing is ended, and when the closing time has elapsed, the processing is shifted to step S340-4.

  At step S340-12, the main CPU 101a performs a reset process. Specifically, the special power operating number storage area is cleared, and the counter value of the special winning opening defined winning counter is cleared.

  In step S340-13, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the jackpot game is over, that is, the value stored in the number-of-round games storage area (the round number (R) is the number of round games played in the jackpot game If the main CPU 101a determines “Yes”, it shifts the process to step S340-15, and if it determines “No”, it shifts the process to step S340-14.

  In step S340-14, the main CPU 101a updates and stores the current round number (R) stored in the number-of-round-games storage area by adding “1”.

  In step S340-15, the main CPU 101a performs jackpot game end processing. Specifically, the round number (R) stored in the round game number storage area is reset.

  At step S340-16, the main CPU 101a performs an ending process. Specifically, according to the special view stop symbol data, the type of jackpot is confirmed, and the ending specification command associated with the type of jackpot transmitted to the effect control board 102 is set in the transmission data storage area for effect. Next, the main CPU 101a sets an ending time according to the type of jackpot to the special game timer counter.

  In step S340-17, the main CPU 101a determines whether the set ending time has elapsed. If it is determined that the ending time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S340-18, and the ending time has elapsed. If it is determined that the jackpot is not determined, the jackpot game processing is ended.

  In step S340-18, the main CPU 101a sets 4 in the special view special power process data, and shifts the process to the jackpot game end process shown in FIG.

(The jackpot game end processing of the main control board)
The jackpot game end processing will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S350-1, the main CPU 101a loads game condition data.

  In step S350-2, the main CPU 101a checks the loaded gaming condition data against the gaming condition determination table, and determines whether or not the high probability flag is turned on in the high probability flag storage area. If the main CPU 101a determines that the high probability flag is not turned on, the process proceeds to step S350-5, and if it is determined that the high probability flag is turned on, the high probability flag is stored in the high probability flag storage area of the main RAM 101c in step S350-3. While turning on "01H", high probability gaming state setting processing is performed to set the number of executable times (Xa) in the high probability gaming state remaining number counter.

  In step S350-4, the main CPU 101a sets a high probability number designation command corresponding to the high probability gaming state remaining number (X) set in the high probability gaming state remaining number counter in the effect transmission data storage area. As a result, the high probability gaming state remaining number (J) is notified to the effect control board 102, and processing for causing the image display device 14 to display high probability remaining number information (also referred to as remaining probability variation number information) is performed.

  In step S350-5, the main CPU 101a collates the loaded gaming condition data with the gaming condition determination table, and determines whether or not the short timer flag is turned on in the short timer flag storage area. When the main CPU 101a determines that the time saving flag is not turned on, the process proceeds to step S350-8, and when it is determined that the time saving flag is turned on, the time saving flag is turned on in the time saving flag storage area of the main RAM 101c in step S350-6. The time saving game state setting process is performed to set the number of executable times (Ja) to the time saving game state remaining number counter.

  In step S350-7, the main CPU 101a sets a time reduction designating command corresponding to the time saving game remaining count (J) set in the time saving gaming state remaining count counter in the effect transmission data storage area. As a result, the time saving gaming state remaining number (J) is notified to the effect control board 102, and processing for causing the image display device 14 to display time shortening remaining number information (also referred to as remaining time shortening number information) is performed.

  In step S350-8, the main CPU 101a confirms the state of the current gaming conditions, sets a gaming state designating command indicating the current state of gaming conditions in the effect transmission data storage area, and in step S350-9, the special 0 is set to the figure special power process data, and the process moves to the special symbol storage determination process shown in FIG.

  In the present embodiment, a command indicating the time saving game state remaining number (J) is transmitted as the time reduction number specification command, but it may be a command indicating the number of variable displays executed in the time saving game state. In addition, although a command indicating the high probability gaming state remaining number (X) is transmitted as the high probability number designation command, it may be a command indicating the number of fluctuation displays executed in the high probability gaming state.

  Also, although the time reduction command and high probability number specification command are transmitted to the effect control board 102 separately from the game state specification command, the time reduction game state remaining number (J) and the high probability game state remaining number ( It is also possible to transmit X to the effect control board 102 by including it in the game state specification command. Further, the time reduction designation command or the high probability number designation command may not be transmitted to the effect control board 102.

(General control control processing of main control board)
The common drawing and common control processing will be described with reference to FIG. The main CPU 101a first loads the value of the data processing routine data in step S401, and refers to the branch destination address from the data processing routine data loaded in step S402, and For example, the normal symbol storage determination process including the normal symbol determination whether or not to execute the auxiliary game (open the second starting opening 7) based on the common drawing determination information acquired based on the winning on the winning gate 10 The process proceeds to (step S410), and if the ordinary figure generalization process data = 1, the process is performed for the normal symbol variation process (step S420) when the normal symbol display device 22 is varying based on the normal symbol determination. If it is transferred, the normal drawing general processing data = 2, the processing is transferred to the normal symbol stopping process (step S430) when the normal symbol display device 22 is stopped, and the general drawing common processing process Data = if 3 controls the opening and closing of the second start hole 7 (actuating the second start hole control device 70) and moves the process to the auxiliary game process (step S440).

(Normal symbol memory judgment processing of main control board)
Normal symbol storage determination processing will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S410-1, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the variation display of the normal symbol is in progress, and if it is determined that the variation display is in progress, the normal symbol storage determination process is ended, and the variation display is in progress. If it is determined that there is not, the process moves to step S410-2.

  In step S410-2, the main CPU 101a determines whether the counter value of the common drawing reservation number counter that counts the common drawing reservation number (G) is 1 or more. In the case where the common drawing reservation number (G) is “0”, the variation display of the normal symbol is not performed, so the normal symbol variation processing is ended.

  If the main CPU 101a determines in step S410-2 that the common drawing reserve number (G) is “1” or more, in step S410-3, from the counter value (G) of the normal symbol reserve number counter Subtract 1 "and update, set a new common drawing reservation number (G), and transmit the normal symbol memory specification command corresponding to the common drawing reservation number (G) after subtraction in step S410-4 Set in the data storage area. As a result, the general drawing reserve number (G) is notified to the effect control board 102.

  In step S410-5, the main CPU 101a performs shift processing of common drawing determination information stored in the normal symbol storage area. Specifically, the common drawing determination information stored in the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit is shifted to the storage unit of the immediately preceding number. At this time, the common drawing determination information stored in the immediately preceding storage unit is written to a predetermined processing area and erased from the normal symbol storage area. Here, in order to change the display contents of the normal symbol hold display device 25 in accordance with the shift of the common view determination information, specifically, the normal symbol hold display data for displaying the current number of general view hold (G) Are set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 101c.

  In step S410-6, the main CPU 101a performs a collision determination, that is, a determination of a collision determination random number stored in the normal symbol storage area. Specifically, main CPU 101a checks whether or not the random number for collision determination shifted in step S410-5 and stored in the 0th storage unit against the collision determination table for a normal symbol stored in main ROM 101b. Make a decision on In the present embodiment, since the hit determination table is associated with the state (non-time game state / time short game state) of starting opening winning a prize ease (refer to FIG. 10A), the time saving flag storage area Is selected, and the hit determination table for the normal symbol according to the current state of the starting opening winning a prize is selected.

  In step S410-7, the main CPU 101a performs normal symbol determination. Specifically, the main CPU 101a performs the regular symbol determination by checking the regular symbol determination random number shifted in step S410-5 and stored in the zero storage unit with the regular symbol determination table stored in the main ROM 101b. As described above, since this normal symbol determination table is associated with the result of the hit determination (hit / loss), the result of the hit determination is confirmed, and the normal symbol determination table related to the result of the hit determination is select.

  Then, in step S410-8, the main CPU 101a determines the stop symbol data (hereinafter referred to as "normal stop symbol data") related to the normal symbol based on the result of the normal symbol determination, that is, determines the type of the normal symbol, The determined common drawing stop symbol data is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 101c, and in step S410-9, a normal rendering symbol specification command corresponding to the common drawing stop symbol data is set in the effect transmission data storage area. As a result, the regular drawing stop data is notified to the effect control board 102.

  When determining whether the determined common drawing stop symbol data is a common drawing stop pattern in FIG. 30 when determining the common drawing fluctuation pattern in the common drawing fluctuation pattern determination, when determining whether or not it is a hit normal symbol in the normal symbol stop processing in FIG. Is also used to determine the opening and closing mode of the second starting port 7.

  In step S410-10, the main CPU 101a performs common drawing fluctuation pattern determination. Specifically, since the common drawing fluctuation pattern determination table for performing the common drawing fluctuation pattern judgment is classified according to the state of starting opening winning a prize ease, the main CPU 101a first confirms the time saving flag storage area, A common drawing fluctuation pattern determination table according to the current state of the starting opening winning a prize is selected. Then, the main CPU 101a checks the random number for common drawing variation pattern determination shifted in step S410-5 and stored in the 0th storage unit against the selected common drawing variation pattern judgment table and sets the common drawing variation pattern (general drawing Determine the fluctuation time).

  In step S410-11, the main CPU 101a sets a common drawing variation pattern specification command corresponding to the determined common drawing variation pattern in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 101c. The common drawing fluctuation pattern designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 102, and by receiving this command, the effect control board 102 can recognize that the fluctuation display of the normal symbol starts, and can execute the roulette effect described later.

  In step S410-12, the main CPU 101a sets a common drawing fluctuation time corresponding to the determined common drawing fluctuation pattern to the auxiliary game timer counter. The auxiliary game timer counter is subjected to subtraction processing every 4 ms in step S110.

  In step S410-13, main CPU 101a sets normal symbol variation display data to perform normal symbol variation display in normal symbol display device 22. If the result of the hit determination is a hit, then in step S410-14. The common game stop symbol data is collated with the auxiliary game reference data determination table to determine the auxiliary game reference data, and is set in the auxiliary game reference data storage area of the main RAM 101c.

  In step S410-15, the main CPU 101a sets “1” to the common-use generalization processing data, and ends the normal symbol variation processing. The data for normal symbol variation display includes information such as the type of the normal symbol display device 22 to be operated, the mode of variation display, and the variation time.

(Normal pattern change processing of main control board)
Next, normal symbol variation processing will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S420-1, the main CPU 101a ends the variation display of the normal symbol, or in other words, whether or not the general drawing variation time set in step S410-12 has elapsed (the auxiliary gaming timer counter ? = 0? As a result, when it is determined that the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is not ended, the normal symbol fluctuation processing is ended, and the next subroutine is executed.

  In step S420-2, main CPU 101a sets a normal effect design stop designation command in the transmission data storage area for effect, and in step S420-3, based on the common view stop symbol data set in step S410-8. Data for ordinary drawing stop display for stopping display on the symbol display device 22 is set. As a result, the player is notified of the result of the normal symbol lottery. At step S420-4, the main CPU 101a sets a normal symbol stop time (for example, 0.8 seconds) to the auxiliary gaming counter. The auxiliary game timer counter is subjected to subtraction processing every 4 ms in step S110.

  Then, in step S420-5, the main CPU 101a sets 2 to the data for general-purpose general-purpose processing, and ends the normal symbol change processing.

(Normal pattern stop processing of main control board)
Next, normal symbol stop processing will be described using FIG. In step S430-1, main CPU 101a first determines whether the stop display of the normal symbol ends, in other words, whether the normal symbol stop time set in the auxiliary game timer counter in step S420-4 has elapsed It is determined whether or not (auxiliary gaming timer counter = 0?). As a result, when it is determined that the stop display of the normal symbol is not ended, the normal symbol stop processing is ended, and the next subroutine is executed.

  When the main CPU 101a determines that the stop display of the normal symbol is finished, the main CPU 101a determines in step S430-2 whether or not the determination of the hit determination related to the normal symbol stop processing is “hit”. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the common drawing stop symbol data stored in the common drawing stop symbol data storage area relates to a hit normal symbol. Here, when it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, the processing is transferred to step S430-4, and when it is not determined that the hit is a normal symbol, the processing is transferred to step S430-3.

  At step S430-4, the main CPU 101a sets 3 to the common-use general processing data. Then, in step S430-5, main CPU 101a sets an opening designation command according to the common drawing stop symbol data in the effect transmission data storage area of main RAM 101c, and according to the common drawing stop symbol based on the auxiliary game control table. An auxiliary game opening process of setting the opening time to the auxiliary game timer counter is performed. The auxiliary game timer counter is subjected to subtraction processing every 4 ms in step S110. When this process is ended, the normal symbol stop process is ended.

  In step S430-3, the main CPU 101a sets 0 to the data for general-purpose fueling process, and ends the normal symbol stopping process.

(Auxiliary game processing of the main control board)
The auxiliary game process will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S440-1, the main CPU 101a determines whether the opening is currently in progress. If it is determined that the opening is currently in progress, the process proceeds to step S440-2. If it is determined that the opening is not currently in progress, the process proceeds to step S440-5.

  In step S440-2, the main CPU 101a determines whether a preset opening time has elapsed. That is, it is determined whether or not the auxiliary game timer counter = 0, and when the auxiliary game timer counter = 0, it is determined that the opening time has elapsed. As a result, when the opening time has not passed, the present auxiliary game processing is ended, and when the opening time has passed, the processing shifts to step S440-3.

  At step S440-3, the main CPU 101a performs an auxiliary game start process. In the auxiliary game start process, the main CPU 101a first selects the second start opening / closing control table based on the auxiliary game reference data stored in the auxiliary game reference data storage area of the main RAM 101c, and sets it to the predetermined area of the main RAM 101c. set.

  In step S440-4, the main CPU 101a performs a second start opening process. In the second start opening process, first, the value stored in the common power operation number storage area (general power operation number (D) is stored by adding “1”. Then, the normal movable piece 70A is operated. Data for the second start port opening / closing solenoid 70B is set, and the second start port opening / closing control table set in step S440-3 is referred to based on the current general The opening time of the second starting opening 7 is set to the auxiliary game timer counter.

  At step S440-5, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not it is in the process of ending. The term "ending" as used herein refers to the period from the end of the last opening of the second starting opening 7 to the end of the auxiliary game. Therefore, when the main CPU 101a determines that the process is currently being performed, the process proceeds to step S440-12. When the main CPU 101a determines that the process is not currently being performed, the process proceeds to step S440-6.

  At step S440-6, the main CPU 101a determines whether or not the second starting port 7 is open. If the main CPU 101a determines that the second start port 7 is open, whether or not the “open end condition” for ending the open of the second start port 7 is satisfied in step S440-7. Determine As this "opening end condition", the counter value of the starting opening specified winning counter has reached the specified (maximum) number (for example 10) or that one opening time of the second starting port 7 has elapsed ( Auxiliary gaming timer counter = 0) is adopted. Then, when the main CPU 101a determines that the "opening completion condition" is satisfied, the processing proceeds to step S440-8, and when it is determined that the "opening completion condition" is not satisfied, the main game processing is ended. .

  At step S440-8, the main CPU 101a performs second start port closing processing. In the second start opening closing process, the energization stop data of the second start opening opening / closing solenoid 70B is set to close the second start opening 7, and the second start opening opening / closing control table set in step S440-3. Referring to, the closing time of the second start port 7 is set to the auxiliary game timer counter based on the current power operating number (D). As a result, the second start port 7 is closed.

  In step S440-9, the main CPU 101a determines whether the auxiliary game end condition is satisfied and the auxiliary game is ended. The auxiliary game end condition means that the common use operating number (D) is the number of times of opening of the second starting opening 7 set in advance, or the counter value of the second starting opening specified winning counter is the maximum number (for example 10) It has reached). Then, when the main CPU 101a determines that the auxiliary game end condition is established, the process proceeds to step S440-10, and when it is determined that the auxiliary game end condition is not established, the present auxiliary game process is ended. .

  In step S440-10, the main CPU 101a performs an auxiliary game end process of setting “0” in the power operating number storage area and setting “0” in the second starting opening winning provision counter. That is, the common charge operating number storage area and the second starting opening specified winning counter are cleared.

  In step S440-11, the main CPU 101a sets an ending specification command according to the common drawing stop symbol data in the transmission data storage area for effect, and an ending time according to the common drawing stop symbol data based on the auxiliary game control table. Is set to the auxiliary game timer counter.

  If the main CPU 101a determines in step S440-6 that the second starting port 7 is not open, in step S440-13, the main CPU 101a determines whether the closing time set in step S440-8 has elapsed. Do. The closing time is also determined based on whether or not the auxiliary game timer counter = 0, as in the opening time. As a result, when determining that the closing time has not elapsed, the main CPU 101a ends the auxiliary game processing, and when determining that the closing time has elapsed, the main CPU 101a shifts the processing to step S440-4.

  In step S440-12, main CPU 101a determines whether the set ending time has elapsed, and when it is determined that the ending time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S440-14, and the ending time elapses. If it is determined that the game is not being performed, the auxiliary game process is ended.

  At step S440-14, the main CPU 101a sets the program general processing process data = 0, and ends the auxiliary game process.

(Control processing of effect control board)
Next, control processing executed by the sub CPU 102 a in the effect control board 102 will be described.

(Main processing of effect control board)
First, the main processing of the effect control board 102 will be described with reference to FIG. This main processing is executed when the power is supplied from the power supply substrate 107 to the sub CPU 102a, and a system reset occurs in the sub CPU 102a.

  First, in step S1001, the sub CPU 102a performs an initialization process. In this processing, the main processing program is read from the sub ROM 102 b and initialization processing is performed to initialize the sub RAM 102 c in which flags, commands, etc. are stored.

  In step S1002, the sub CPU 102a determines an icon display mode determination random number, effect pattern stop display pattern determination random number, prefetch zone effect scenario determination random number, final number determination random number, precursor effect scenario determination random number, variation effect pattern, which will be described later. The effect random number updating process is performed to update the effect random number which is made of the determination random number, the effect mode determination random number, and the like and is used for the determination for controlling the effect.

  A random number counter is provided in the sub RAM 102c for each of the various random numbers that make up the effect random number. In the process of updating the effect random number, “1” is added to the random number counter provided for each type of random number. A random number range is provided for various random numbers constituting the effect random number. The random number range is from “0” to the maximum value defined for the random number. Then, when updating the random number, when the random number value indicated by the random number counter is the maximum value of the random number range, the random number counter is returned to “0” without adding “1”.

  Further, the maximum value of the random number range is set to be different depending on the type of random number. This is to prevent the random number counters related to the effect random number from being completely synchronized and always having the same random number value. Since it is only necessary to prevent the random number counters related to the effect random numbers from being completely synchronized, the maximum values of the various random number ranges are not made different, and different initial value random numbers are provided for the various effect random numbers. When updating the random number, if the random number value indicated by the random number counter is the maximum value of the random number range, the respective random number values may be newly updated from the initial value random number at that time.

(Timer interrupt processing of effect control board)
The timer interrupt process of the effect control board 102 will be described with reference to FIG. The timer interrupt process is executed by generating a clock pulse every predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) by a reset clock pulse generation circuit provided in the effect control board 102.

  First, in step S1100, sub CPU 102a saves the information stored in the register of sub CPU 102a in the stack area.

  In step S1200, the sub CPU 102a performs time control processing of updating each timer counter for performing time management related to various effects.

  In step S1300, the sub CPU 102a performs command analysis processing. In this process, the sub CPU 102a analyzes the command stored in the reception buffer of the sub RAM 102c. Details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 34 and 35.

  When the effect control board 102 receives a command transmitted from the main control board 101, the effect control board 102 performs a reception interruption process of the effect control board 102 (not shown) and stores the received command in the reception buffer. Thereafter, a process of analyzing the command received in the command analysis process is performed.

  In step S1400, the sub CPU 102a performs customer waiting display control processing for controlling the variable display of the special symbol and the image display in the customer waiting state where the special game (big hit game) is not executed. The details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S1500, the sub CPU 102a checks the input signal from the effect button detection switch 18a or the selection button detection switch 19a, and suggests the result of the jackpot determination based on the operation on the effect button 18A or the selection button 19A. An effect input control process is performed to execute an effect or the like.

  In step S1600, the sub CPU 102a is able to execute the game information relating to the game to be notified (displayed) in the current game state (right-handed information prompting the game ball to be fired to the right area of the game area 2A, probability variation game state) The high probability remaining number information which is the remaining number of the variable display which becomes, the time remaining number information which is the remaining number of the variable display which can be executed in the low probability time short game state, the jackpot which occurred while the time short game state continues A game information display control process is performed to display on the image display device 14 the jackpot number of times information which is the number of times, left hitting information prompting to shoot the game ball in the left area of the game area 2A, etc.

  In step S1700, the sub CPU 102a performs rightward display control relating to display control of first rightward information (first rightward image) to third rightward information (second rightward image) displayed on the image display device 14. Do the processing. The details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S1800, the sub CPU 102a controls left display related to display control of the first left-handed information (first left-handed image) to the third left-handed information (second left-handed image) displayed on the image display device 14. Do the processing. The details will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S1900, the sub CPU 102a performs data output processing for transmitting various effect control commands set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105.

  In step S2000, the sub CPU 102a restores the information saved in step S1100 to the register of the sub CPU 102a.

(Command analysis processing of effect control board)
The command analysis process by the effect control board 102 will be described with reference to FIGS. 34 and 35.

  In step S1301, the sub CPU 102a newly receives a command, and determines whether a command is stored in the reception buffer. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the command has not been received, it ends this command analysis, and if it determines that the command has been received, the process proceeds to step S1302.

  In step S1302, the sub CPU 102a determines whether the command stored in the reception buffer is a start opening winning combination designation command. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the reception buffer is the starting opening prize designation command, the process proceeds to step S1303, and if it is determined that the command is not the starting opening prize designation command, the process proceeds to step S1304.

  In step S1303, the sub CPU 102a performs a continuous advance presentation effect or a pending icon or variation displayed on the image display device 14 to execute a predetermined effect over the variation display (variation presentation) of one or more special symbols based on the preliminary determination result. A start opening winning process is performed such as determination on so-called preview advance notice effects such as an icon change notice for changing the display mode of the middle icon and setting of information on the advance notice advance effects, and the command analysis process is ended. The process of starting opening winning will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the present embodiment, as a continuous advance notice effect, a pre-reading zone effect that performs zone precursor effect and zone effect with the image display device 14 and the sound output device 15 in one or more change effects including the change effect of the advance object. Continuous step-up notice effect of performing stepwise step effect with image display device 14 and effect character device 17 over one or more fluctuation effects including effects, one or more fluctuation effects before fluctuation effect of notice object A chance to make the image display device 14 stop displaying the design symbols (TZ1 to TZ3) in an array having a predetermined regularity. An image over one or more fluctuation effects including a serif announcement effect performing a predetermined speech effect by the display device 14 and the sound output device 15, and a fluctuation effect of an announcement object In Display device 14 and the audio output device 15 is adapted to perform a five effects announcement attraction for performing a predetermined effect effect.

  In step S1304, the sub CPU 102a determines whether the command stored in the reception buffer is a special symbol storage designation command. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the reception buffer is a special symbol storage designation command, the process proceeds to step S1305, and if it is not determined to be a special symbol storage designation command, the process proceeds to step S1306.

  In step S1305, the sub CPU 102a updates the number of special map reservations (U1, U2) stored in the presentation information storage area of the sub RAM 102c described later according to the special symbol storage specification command, or the presentation information storage area This command analysis processing is performed to shift various effect information stored in the main screen, or to display on the image display device 14 the number of pending icons (pending specific information) corresponding to the number of special views pending, and this command analysis End the process. The pending information update process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S1306, the sub CPU 102a determines whether the command stored in the reception buffer is a game state specification command. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the reception buffer is a gaming state designation command, the process proceeds to step S1307, and if it is not determined to be a gaming state designation command, the process proceeds to step S1309.

  In step S1307, the sub CPU 102a performs gaming state update processing for updating the gaming state stored in the predetermined storage area of the sub RAM 102c to the gaming state specified by the gaming state designation command. In step S1308, the sub CPU 102a performs effect mode setting processing for setting any of a plurality of effect modes relating to the execution of the fluctuation effect, and ends the command analysis processing. The effect mode setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In addition, with the effect mode, in the present embodiment, the classification mode (category of the change effect performed by the effect device such as the image display device 14 corresponding to the change display of the special symbol executed based on the result of the big hit determination In the present embodiment, roughly three types of effect modes of effect mode A, effect mode B, and effect mode C are provided.

  The effect mode A is a normal effect mode representing that the game state is disadvantageous to the player set corresponding to the normal gaming state which is the low probability gaming state and the non-time-short playing state. The effect mode B is an effect mode representing that the gaming state is most advantageous to the player set corresponding to the probability variation gaming state which is the high probability gaming state and the time saving gaming state. The effect mode C is an effect mode representing a second advantageous game state set corresponding to the low probability time short game state which is the low probability gaming state and the time saving game state.

  In step S1309, the sub CPU 102a determines whether the command stored in the reception buffer is a rendering symbol designation command. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the reception buffer is a rendering symbol designation command, the process proceeds to step S1310, and if it is determined that the command is not a rendering symbol designation command, the process proceeds to step S1311.

  In step S1310, the sub CPU 102a is stopped on a predetermined effective line, that is, an effect pattern to be displayed on the image display device 14 as a result of the change effect (special figure lottery effect) performed during the change display of the special symbol. The effect symbol stop display pattern determination process is performed to determine the arrangement (combination) of the effect symbols. The effect symbol stop display pattern determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S1311, the sub CPU 102a determines whether the command stored in the reception buffer is a special figure fluctuation pattern designation command. If sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the reception buffer is a special figure fluctuation pattern designation command, the process proceeds to step S1312, and if it is not a special figure fluctuation pattern designation command, the process proceeds to step S1316. .

  In step S1312, the sub CPU 102a performs a fluctuation effect pattern determination process for determining a fluctuation effect pattern that is an effect content (aspect) of a fluctuation effect (special figure lottery effect) performed during fluctuation display of a special symbol. The variation effect pattern determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The sub CPU102a, in step S1313, the determination of whether or not to execute the accurate presentation to definitely notify that the result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol (the fluctuation presentation) will be a big hit, of the accurate presentation (one-shot notification production) An accurate effect determination process of determining an execution mode is performed. The final presentation determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S 1314, the sub CPU 102 a determines whether or not to start prefetch zone effect, which is a type of preview advance notice (rendering) based on the preliminary determination result, and performs a process to start prefetch zone effect execution determination Do the processing. The prefetch zone effect execution determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S1315, the sub CPU 102a simply refers to the case where the holding icon or the changing icon displayed on the image display device 14 based on the predetermination result (hereinafter, referred to as "icon"). Also, an icon change notice execution is performed to determine whether or not to change the "pending specific information") into a special mode or a different type of special mode with the execution of a production effect (notice of throwing kiss, notice of handshake meeting) The determination processing is performed, and this command analysis processing ends. The icon change advance notice execution determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S1316, sub CPU 102a determines whether the command stored in the reception buffer is a special figure fluctuation stop designation command. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the reception buffer is the special view fluctuation stop designation command, the process proceeds to step S1317. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the special view fluctuation stop designation command is not present, the process proceeds to step S1319. .

  In step S1317, the sub CPU 102a performs performance symbol fluctuation stop processing for setting a production symbol stop control command indicating that production of the production symbol is stopped and ending the fluctuation production in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c. The effect symbol variation stop control command is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output process of step S1900. The lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 recognize the end of the fluctuation effect by receiving the effect symbol stop control command, and cause the stop display of the effect pattern to be performed to end the fluctuation effect.

  In step S1318, the sub CPU 102a performs pre-reading zone effect end processing for ending pre-reading zone effect or gasse zone precursor effect, triggered by the end of the fluctuation display of the special symbol, and ends this command analysis processing. The pre-reading zone effect end determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S1319, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a high probability frequency designation command or a time reduction frequency designation command. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the reception buffer is the high probability frequency designation command or the time reduction designation command, it transfers the process to step S1320 and determines that it is not the high probability frequency designation command or the time reduction designation command. Then, the process proceeds to step S1321.

  In step S 1320, the sub CPU 102 a updates the high probability remaining number which is the remaining number of fluctuation display (variation effect) that can be executed in the probability variation gaming state based on the received high probability number designation command, or designates the received time reduction number Based on the command, a remaining number updating process is performed to update the number of short remaining times, which is the remaining number of the variable display (variation effect) that can be executed in the low probability time short game state, and the command analysis process is ended.

  In step S1321, the sub CPU 102a determines whether the command stored in the reception buffer is a jackpot game opening designation command. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the reception buffer is a jackpot game opening designation command, the process proceeds to step S1322, and if it is determined that there is no jackpot game opening designation command, the process proceeds to step S1324.

  In step S1322, the sub CPU 102a determines an opening effect pattern which is an effect mode of the opening effect to be performed during the opening of the big hit game, and sets an opening effect pattern specification command corresponding to the determined opening effect pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c. Perform an opening effect pattern determination process.

  The opening effect pattern specification command is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output process of step S1900, and the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 execute the opening effect of the big hit game.

  In step S1323, the sub CPU 102a updates the number of consecutive guest houses, which is the number of jackpot games generated continuously while the short time gaming state (including high probability time low and low probability time short) continues. Performs processing and ends this command analysis processing.

  Specifically, when the jackpot game is executed in the normal gaming state, "1" is set to the number of consecutive loafers, and the jackpot during the short time gaming state (including the high probability time short gaming state and the low probability time short gaming state) When the game is executed, processing is performed to add "1" to the number of consecutive runs.

  In step S1324, the sub CPU 102a determines whether the command stored in the reception buffer is a round designation command. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the reception buffer is a round designation command, the process proceeds to step S1325, and if it is determined that there is no round designation command, the process proceeds to step S1326.

  In step S1325, sub CPU 102a determines a round effect pattern which is an aspect of a round effect to be performed during a round of big hit game, and sets a round effect pattern specification command corresponding to the determined round effect pattern in the transmission buffer of sub RAM 102c. A round effect pattern determination process is performed, and this command analysis process is ended. The round effect pattern specification command is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output process of step S1900, and the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 execute a round effect of the big hit game.

  In step S1326, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a jackpot game ending designation command (a jackpot game ending designation command). If the sub CPU 102a determines that the command stored in the reception buffer is a big hit game ending designation command, the process proceeds to step S1327, and if it is not a big hit gaming ending designation command, the command analysis process is ended.

  In step S1327, the sub CPU 102a determines an ending effect pattern that is an effect aspect of the ending effect to be performed during the big hit game ending, and sets an ending effect pattern specification command corresponding to the determined ending effect pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c. A jackpot game ending effect pattern determination process is performed, and the command analysis process ends. The ending effect pattern designating command is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output process of step S1900, and the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 execute the ending effect of the big hit game.

(Pre-reading zone effect, icon display, explanation of icon display area)
Before explaining the processing at the time of starting opening winning shown in FIG. 36, first, pre-reading zone effect performed on the basis of the prior determination result etc. indicated by the starting opening winning specifying command and the holding icon display and the changing icon display etc. .

(Pre-reading zone effect)
First, the prefetch zone effect will be described. The pre-reading zone effect implies that the expectation (expected value) of winning the jackpot is high over one or more fluctuation effects (the fluctuation display of the special symbol) (performing execution of the special game) Pre-read advance notice effect, and in this embodiment, it can be executed in effect mode A set in the normal gaming state, and is performed based on the pre-judgment result indicated by the start opening winning combination designation command.

  While the pre-reading zone effect is being executed, a zone background image dedicated to pre-reading zone effect is displayed on the display unit 140 of the image display device 14 (there is a portion not shown), and the zone BGM exclusively for pre-reading zone effect is voice output A zone illumination dedicated to the pre-reading zone effect is executed in the effect illumination device 16, which is output from the device 15. The zone background image, the zone BGM, and the zone illumination can be collectively referred to as zone effect.

  In addition, a zone turning effect is provided as an effect associated with the pre-reading zone effect. Zone turning effect is effect to tell whether or not pre-reading zone effect is executed, and special effect pattern (hereinafter referred to as "special symbol") dedicated to zone turning effect in fluctuation display and stop display of the effect design. It is done using. In the present embodiment, the zone turning effect is performed using a dedicated special symbol, but it is possible to use a special effect pattern which is not dedicated to the zone turning effect but is different from usual. It is also possible to stop and display the chance eye (combination of predetermined effect symbols) with a normal effect symbol. Furthermore, it is also possible to perform zone turning effects using other effect images (characters etc.) instead of the effect pattern, and other effect devices that are not the image display device 14 (for example, the voice output device 15 or effects It is also possible to perform the effect of the predetermined mode on the lighting device 16 or the like.

  In the present embodiment, as the types of zone turning effects, zone turning success effects and zone turning failure effects are provided. The zone-turn success effect includes an effect for asking whether or not a pre-reading zone effect is to be performed, and an effect for notifying that a pre-reading zone effect is to be performed after the effect. In the zone turning success effect, it is informed that the pre-reading zone effect is to be executed by stopping and displaying the combination of the special symbols set in advance. In the present embodiment, the pre-reading zone effect is executed from the start time of the fluctuation display (including the re-variation display in the pseudo continuous effect) of the effect design that is started after the zone turning success effect is executed.

  On the other hand, the zone turning failure rendition is constituted by rendition whether or not the pre-reading zone effect is executed, and an effect notifying that the pre-reading zone effect after the effect is not executed. In the zone turning failure effect, it is informed that the pre-reading zone effect is not performed because only a part of the combination of the special symbols set in advance is stopped and displayed. In the present embodiment, the pre-reading zone effect is not performed in the variable display (including the re-variation display in the pseudo continuous effect) of the effect design started after the zone turning failure effect is executed. However, in the variation display of the effect pattern (including the re-variation display in the pseudo series effect) started after the zone turning failure effect is executed, it is possible for the zone turning success effect to be executed, in this case, The pre-reading zone effect is executed from the start time of the fluctuation display (including the re-variation display in the pseudo continuous effect) of the effect design that is started after the zone turning success effect is executed.

  In the present embodiment, as a special symbol used for zone turning effect, a special symbol (referred to as a “prefetched symbol”) including the characters “pre-read”, a special symbol (“zones”) is included. The symbol ") and the special symbol including the character" Push "(referred to as" Push "symbol) are set. A zone turning effect in which all special symbols of these "pre-reading" symbols, "zone" symbols and "piercing" symbols are stopped and displayed is "zone turning success effect", and these "pre-reading" symbols, "zone" symbols And the zone turning effect in which only a part of the special symbols of the "rush" symbol is stopped and displayed is "zone turning failure effect". The zone turning failure effect is a zone turning failure effect 1 in which the "pre-reading" symbol and the "zone" symbol are stopped and displayed as a part of special symbols, and a zone in which only the "pre-reading" symbol is stopped and displayed as a part of special symbols. It consists of a misstep production 2.

  Also, in the present embodiment, the special symbols are stopped one by one. For example, in the zone turn success direction, the "pre-reading" symbol is stopped first, then the "zone" symbol is stopped, and finally it is asked whether the "rush" symbol stops while decelerating or not. All special symbols are aligned by stopping the symbol at a preset stop position. And between this "pre-reading" symbol stops first, and until "stop" symbol stops at last constitutes an effect whether pre-reading zone effect is performed.

  On the other hand, in the zone turning failure effect, for example, the "pre-read" symbol first stops, then the "zone" symbol stops, and finally it is asked whether the "rush" symbol stops while decelerating or not Slipping past a preset stop position results in alignment of only some special symbols. And from this "pre-reading" symbol stops to the time until the "plunging" symbol slips, the effect of whether or not the pre-reading zone effect is executed is configured.

  In the present embodiment, as the "all special symbols are aligned" mode, "prefetched" symbols, "zone" symbols and "rush" symbols gradually stop, but all these special symbols are aligned at the same time, In other words, it is also possible to make all the special symbols coincide with each other without performing the effect of whether or not the pre-reading zone effect is executed.

(Display icon)
Next, the pending icon display and the changing icon display will be described. The hold icon display is to display a hold icon in a first hold icon display area 141 and a second hold icon display area 143 described later. The special icon determination information is stored in the main RAM 101c in the first start opening detection signal input process in step S230 or the second start opening detection signal input process in step S240, and the special symbol variation display (or the special symbol lottery) ) Has acquired the right to carry out), but since it is in a holding state where the variable display of the special symbol can not be started immediately, the right to execute the variable display of the special symbol in the holding state (hereinafter referred to as "special figure holding") ) Is displayed on the display unit 140 of the image display device 14.

  The hold icon is a first hold icon representing the right to execute the variable display of the first special symbol based on the winning on the first starting opening 6, and the variable display of the second special symbol based on the winning on the second starting opening 7. And a second holding icon representing the right to execute (hereinafter, when both the first holding icon and the second holding icon point, they are simply referred to as a "holding icon").

  The displaying of the changing icon is to display the changing icon in the changing icon display area 142 described later. The fluctuating icon is an icon (image) representing a fluctuating display of the special symbol under execution corresponding to the special symbol determination information stored in the special symbol related storage area of the main RAM 101c, and the display unit 140 of the image display device 14 Is displayed on. In other words, when the start condition of the variable display of the symbol is satisfied with respect to the special view hold indicated by the hold icon while the hold icon is displayed, this corresponds to the variable display of the symbol according to the start condition. The hold icon is displayed as a floating icon. Note that, in the following, when pointing to both the hold icon and the floating icon, it is simply referred to as an "icon".

  In the present embodiment, a normal mode and a special mode are set as the icon display mode. The normal mode is a standard display mode for icons, and the special mode is a special display mode for suggesting or notifying a preset predetermined item. In the present embodiment, one type of normal mode is set, and the special modes are classified into a plurality of types according to the content to be suggested or notified. In the present embodiment, the special modes are classified into the first to fourth special modes, and the reserve icon is displayed as the special mode, or the type of the special mode is changed to change the reserve icon as the advance notice effect. A notice is executed, and a changing icon change notice is executed by displaying the changing icon in a special mode or changing the type of the special mode. The display mode of the icon is not limited to the normal mode, the first special mode, the second special mode, the third special mode, and the fourth special mode, and can be set as appropriate.

  The normal mode is a standard display mode, and is a standard for predetermined items set in advance. As shown in FIG. 59, the shape of the icon of the normal mode is circular, and the color of the icon of the normal mode is white.

  The first special mode is a display mode that indicates the possibility of winning a jackpot and / or the expectation of winning a jackpot, and may also be a display mode that suggests that the special mode may be changed to another special mode. In the present embodiment, only one type is set. As shown in FIG. 59, the shape of the icon of the first special aspect is circular, and the color of the icon of the first special aspect blinks in white. That is, it can be said that the first special mode is a state in which the normal mode is blinking. As for the jackpot winning expectation suggested by the first special aspect, the normal aspect <the first special aspect.

  The second special mode is a display mode that indicates the possibility of winning a jackpot and / or the expectation of winning a jackpot, and in the present embodiment, the expected jackpot winning degree suggested as a type of the second special mode. There are eight types of second special aspects 11 to 15 and second special aspects 21 to 23 different from one another.

  As shown in FIG. 59, the shapes of the icons of the second special modes 11 to 15 are the same in the silhouette of one person regardless of the type, and the colors of the icons of the second special modes 11 to 15 are the types. Depends on. Specifically, the color of the icon of the second special aspect 11 is white, the color of the icon of the second special aspect 12 is green, the color of the icon of the second special aspect 13 is red, the color of the icon of the second special aspect 14 Is the zebra pattern, and the color of the icon of the second special aspect 15 is rainbow.

  Regarding the jackpot winning expectation according to the second special aspect 11-15, the normal aspect <first special aspect <second special aspect 11 <second special aspect 12 <second special aspect 13 <second special aspect 14 <second It becomes high in order of special aspect 15. In addition, the second special mode 15 indicates that the jackpot winning expectation is 100%, that is, reports a jackpot winning.

  Also, while the second special aspects 11-14 may occur for both the pending icon and the floating icon, the second special aspect 15 occurs only for the floating icon. This is because when the stop icon representing the special figure hold is displayed in the second special mode 15 and the jackpot is notified at the stage when the variable display of the special symbol related to the special view hold is not started, the interest of the game is reduced It is because there is a fear. However, the matter can be set as appropriate, and the hold icon can also be displayed in the second special mode 15.

  As shown in FIG. 59, the shapes of the icons of the second special aspect 21-23 are circular regardless of the type, and the colors of the icons of the second special aspect 21-23 differ depending on the type. Specifically, the color of the icon of the second special aspect 21 is yellow and the letters "SP" are drawn to indicate the execution of SP / SPSP reach production, and the color of the icon of the second special aspect 22 is purple and the jackpot expectation The letters of "superheat" suggesting that the degree is high are drawn, and the letters of the icon of the second special mode 23 are painted in gold and the word of "certain" suggesting a big hit.

  About the jackpot winning expectation degree which concerns on the 2nd special aspect 21-23, it is high in the order of a normal aspect <1st special aspect <2nd special aspect 21 <2nd special aspect 22 <2nd special aspect 23. Note that the second special mode 23 indicates that the jackpot winning expectation is 100%, that is, reports a jackpot winning.

  Also, while the second special aspects 21 and 22 may occur for both the pending icon and the floating icon, the second special aspect 23 occurs only for the floating icon. This is that if the stop icon indicating the special figure hold is displayed in the second special mode 23 and the big hit is notified at the stage when the variable display of the special symbol pertaining to the special view hold is not started, the interest of the game decreases. It is because there is a fear. However, the matter can be set as appropriate, and the hold icon can also be displayed in the second special mode 23.

  In this embodiment, the normal mode and the first special mode are common modes to be used regardless of whether the normal gaming state or the short time gaming state (including the high probability time short and the low probability time short). , The second special aspect 11-15 has become a normal limitation aspect that is used by limiting to the normal gaming state, the second special aspect 21 to 23 is a short time gaming state (including high probability time short and low probability time short) It is a time-limited mode which is used limitedly.

  That is, the type (number of changes) of the icons displayed on the image display device 14 in the normal gaming state is set to be larger than the type (number of changes) of the icons displayed on the image display device 14 in the short time gaming state It is done. By doing this, it becomes possible to prevent the player from being bored in the normal gaming state in which the variation time of the special symbol tends to be longer than the time saving gaming state. In addition, it is possible to make it easy for the player to grasp the change of the icon in the short time game state that the variation time of the special symbol tends to be shorter than the normal game state because the type (number of changes) of the icon in the short time game state is small. Become.

  It should be noted that the normal mode, the first special mode and the second special mode are not common modes in the normal gaming state and the short time gaming state (including high probability short time and low probability time short), but the normal mode for time short gaming state ( For example, the shape of the icon is a square, the color of the icon is blue), the first special mode for the short time gaming state (for example, the shape of the icon is a square, the color of the icon is blue blinks), the short time gaming state A second special mode (for example, the shape of the icon is a square and the color of the icon is the same) may be set. Also, the normal mode and the first special mode may be different between the normal gaming state, the high probability time short gaming state, and the low probability time short gaming state.

  The third special mode implies the degree of expectation for the execution of the look-ahead zone effect (hereinafter referred to as "the degree of expectation for execution of the look-ahead zone"). If the kind of 3rd special mode is divided roughly, six types of 3rd special modes 1 to 6 from which anticipation presentation execution execution expectation differs are set up are set up.

  Here, the third special modes 1 to 3 (11 to 35) are icons corresponding to the start opening winning combination designation command for which the pre-reading zone effect or the zone turning effect is to be executed (hereinafter referred to as "zone effect target icon" The third special mode 4 to 6 (41 to 65) is an icon that is not an icon corresponding to the start opening winning combination designation command that is to execute the pre-reading zone effect or the zone turning effect (hereinafter referred to as This is a display mode of “zone effect non-target icon”. In other words, the zone effect non-target icon is an icon (previous to or after the start opening prize winning command) corresponding to the icon for the start opening prize winning designation command for which the pre-reading zone effect or zone turning effect is to be executed. Or it is an icon on which a variable presentation is performed later).

  As shown in FIG. 60, the shapes of the icons in the third special modes 1 to 3 (11 to 35) include the shapes of the icons according to the second special mode. Specifically, the shapes of the icons in the third special aspect 1 (11 to 15) are such that the silhouette of one person is arranged on each of the left and right sides of the silhouette of one person according to the second special aspect At the same time, substantially in the center, characters indicating “pre-reading zone effect execution” are attached with “? Zone?”. In the third special aspect 2 (21 to 25), the shapes of the icons according to the second special aspect are similar to that in which the silhouettes of two persons are arranged on the left and right sides of the silhouette of one person according to the second special aspect It is composed of an execution of the pre-reading zone effect called “Δ zone Δ” and a letter indicating that the expectation of the execution is higher than the “? Zone?” Of the third special aspect 1. In the third special aspect 3 (31 to 35), the shapes of the icons of the third special aspect are the same as that of the second special aspect in which the silhouettes of four persons are arranged on the left and right sides of one person and The character which announces execution of the pre-reading zone effect called "(circle) zone (circle)] is attached to and is comprised.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 61, the shapes of the icons in the third special modes 4 to 6 (41 to 65) also have shapes including the shapes of the icons according to the second special mode. Specifically, the shapes of the icons in the third special mode 4 (41 to 45) are such that the silhouettes of one person are arranged on the left side and the right side of the silhouette of one person according to the second special mode. It is a structure. The shape of the icon of the third special mode 5 (51 to 55) is configured such that the silhouettes of two people are arranged on the left and right sides of the silhouette of one person according to the second special mode. . The shape of the icon of the third special aspect 6 (61 to 65) is configured such that the silhouettes of three persons are arranged on the left and right sides of the silhouette of one person according to the second special aspect. . In the third to third special aspects 4 to 6, as in the third to third special aspects 1 to 3, characters such as "? Zone?" Are not attached. In other words, it is also suggested that the “? Zone?” Of the third special mode 1, the “Δ zone Δ” of the third special mode 2, and the “の zone ○” of the third special mode 3 are zone effect target icons, respectively. ing.

  About the read-ahead zone execution expectation concerning the zone effect object icon, it is high in the order of (normal mode <) second special mode <third special mode 1 <third special mode 2 <third special mode 3. On the other hand, the pre-reading zone execution expectation concerning the zone effect non-target icon is higher in the order of (normal mode <) second special mode <third special mode 4 <third special mode 5 <third special mode 6 There is.

  Here, the second special aspect is included with respect to the prefetching zone execution expectation degree relating to the zone effect object icon and the zone effect non-target icon, by setting the icon display mode to the second special aspect and the third special aspect This is because the zone precursor effect is executed to suggest or notify the execution of the prefetch zone effect described later, and the second special mode also suggests the prefetch zone execution expectation.

  As described above, the shapes of the icons in the second and third special modes include the silhouette of a person, and the number of silhouettes of the icons in the second special mode is “1”, and the third special mode 1 , The number of silhouettes of the icon of 4 is "3", the number of silhouettes of the icon of the third special mode 2, 5 is "5", and the number of the silhouettes of icon of the third special mode 3, 6 Has become "7" people. And, the larger the number of silhouettes of icons, the higher the expectation of execution of the prefetch zone.

  Further, in the present embodiment, each of the third special aspect 1 and the third special aspect 4, the third special aspect 2 and the third special aspect 5, the third special aspect 3 and the third special aspect 6 is the display aspect concerned. It is assumed that the attributes of the icons to be targets of (zone effect target icon and zone effect non-target icon) are different but are in the correspondence relationship, and the same prefetch zone execution expectation is set. That is, the prefetch zone execution expectation suggested by the third special aspect 1 and the prefetch zone execution expectation suggested by the third special aspect 4 are the same, and the prefetch zone execution expectation suggested by the third special aspect 2 The look-ahead zone execution expectation suggested by 3 special modes 5 is the same, and the look-ahead zone execution expectation suggested by the third special mode 3 and the look-ahead zone execution expectation suggested by the third special mode 6 are the same .

  In addition, the third special modes 3 and 6 indicate that the prefetch zone execution expectation is 100%, that is, it is informed that the prefetch zone effect is to be executed. Further, although details will be described later, the icons are displayed in the third special modes 3 and 6 also when the pre-reading zone effect is performed. Therefore, the third special modes 3 and 6 may notify that pre-reading zone effect is being performed.

  In the following, the third special mode 1 and 4 are referred to as "pre-reading zone effect suggesting mode 1", and the third special mode 2 and 5 are referred to as "pre-reading zone effect suggesting mode 2", the third special mode Aspects 3 and 6 are referred to as "pre-reading zone effect notification mode". Moreover, when referring to any of the prefetch zone effect suggestion mode 1 and the prefetch zone effect suggestion mode 2, it is simply referred to as “prefetch zone effect suggestion mode”.

  In addition, as described above, the shape of the icon according to the third special aspect is constituted by the silhouette of a person, and the silhouette of one person according to the second special aspect is included, but this second special aspect The part of the silhouette of one person in question is the main silhouette part, and the part of the person's silhouette on the left and right sides of the main silhouette part is the secondary silhouette part.

  And about the main silhouette part of the icon which concerns on each of the 3rd special aspect 1-the 3rd special aspect 6, several kinds of colors are set like a 2nd special aspect. Third special aspect 1 is divided into third special aspect 11 to third special aspect 15, and third special aspect 2 is divided into third special aspect 21 to third special aspect 25 according to the color of the main silhouette portion. The third special aspect 3 is divided into the third special aspect 31 to the third special aspect 35, the third special aspect 4 is divided into the third special aspect 41 to the third special aspect 45, and the third special aspect 5 is the third special aspect The third special embodiment 51 is divided into third special embodiment 51 through third special embodiment 55, and the third special embodiment 6 is divided into third special embodiment 61 through third special embodiment 65.

  The color of the main silhouette part according to the third special aspect 11, the third special aspect 21, the third special aspect 31, the third special aspect 41, the third special aspect 51 and the third special aspect 61 is white. The color of the main silhouette portion according to the third special aspect 12, the third special aspect 22, the third special aspect 32, the third special aspect 42, the third special aspect 52 and the third special aspect 62 is green. The color of the main silhouette portion according to the third special aspect 13, the third special aspect 33, the third special aspect 43, the third special aspect 53 and the third special aspect 63 is red. The color of the main silhouette part according to the third special aspect 14, the third special aspect 24, the third special aspect 34, the third special aspect 44, the third special aspect 54 and the third special aspect 64 is a zebra pattern. The color of the main silhouette portion according to the third special aspect 35 and the third special aspect 65 is iridescent. And, as in the second special aspect, the color of the main silhouette part of the third special aspect suggests the jackpot winning expectation, and is higher in the order of white <green <red <zebra pattern <rainbow color.

  On the other hand, the fourth special mode suggests or notifies predetermined matters related to a handshake meeting advance notice. The handshake event advance notice is a pre-reading advance notice effect that indicates the expectation of a big hit by changing the display mode of the fluctuating icon based on the preliminary determination result indicated by the start opening winning combination designation command, and in this embodiment, the effect It is executable in mode A. In addition, although you may carry out based on the determination result at the time of the start of a fluctuation production, the detail of a handshake meeting advance is mentioned later.

  When the types of the fourth special modes are broadly divided, four types of fourth special modes 1 to 4 are set. Here, the fourth special mode 1 (11 to 15) is a fluctuating icon corresponding to the start opening prize winning designation command which is to execute the handshake meeting advance notice (hereinafter referred to as "the handshake meeting notice subject fluctuating icon") The fourth special mode 2 (21 to 24) is a display icon corresponding to the start opening prize winning designation command for which the handshake meeting advance notice is to be executed (hereinafter referred to as the The fourth special mode 3 (31) is a changing icon corresponding to a starting opening prize designation command which is not a starting opening prize winning designation command which is to cause a handshake meeting advance notice to be executed (hereinafter referred to as “handshake start” The fourth special mode 4 (41) is a display mode of "notice that is not subject to a target Hold icon corresponding to the command (hereinafter, referred to as a "handshake meeting notice non-target Hold icon") is a display mode of.

  In other words, the handshake meeting advance non-target pending icon is an icon corresponding to the start opening win specification command before or after the icon corresponding to the start opening prize specification command for which the handshake meeting advance notification is to be executed. It is an icon for which a variable presentation is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 62, the shape of the fluctuating icon of the fourth special aspect 1 (11 to 15) is a silhouette of a person who is shaking hands, viewed from the side, and a heart attached to the chest of the silhouette. And consists of. The form of the holding icon in the fourth special mode 2 (21 to 24) is composed of a silhouette of a person who has given a predetermined pose, as viewed from the front, and a heart attached to the chest of the silhouette. The “heart” attached commonly to the icons of the fourth special aspect 1 and the fourth special aspect 2 indicates that it is the object of the handshake meeting advance notice.

  Also, the shape of the during-changing icon in the fourth special mode 3 (31) is configured by the silhouette of the same person as the during-changing icon according to the fourth special mode 1, and as in the fourth special mode 1, the heart is Not attached. The form of the holding icon in the fourth special mode 4 (41) is also composed of the silhouette of the same person as the holding icon according to the fourth special mode 2, and the heart is not attached as in the fourth special mode 2. .

  Moreover, about the part of the person's silhouette contained in the icon of the 4th special aspect 1-the 4th special aspect 2, several types of color are set similarly to the 2nd special aspect. The fourth special aspect 1 is divided into five types of the fourth special aspect 11 to the fourth special aspect 15 according to the color of the silhouette portion, and the fourth special aspect 2 is the fourth special aspect 21 to the fourth special aspect 24. Are divided into four types.

  The color of the silhouette part of the icon according to the fourth special aspect 11 and the fourth special aspect 21 is white, and the color of the silhouette part of the icon according to the fourth special aspect 12 and the fourth special aspect 22 is green The color of the silhouette part of the icon according to the special aspect 13 and the fourth special aspect 23 is red, and the color of the silhouette part of the icon according to the fourth special aspect 14 and the fourth special aspect 24 is a zebra pattern The color of the silhouette portion of the icon according to aspect 15 is iridescent.

  The rainbow color is set only in the fourth special aspect 1 because the handshake meeting notice object pending icon is displayed in rainbow color, and the variation display of the special symbol related to the special view pending corresponding to the icon is not started If the jackpot is notified at the stage, the interest of the game may be reduced. However, the matter can be set as appropriate, and it is possible to provide a rainbow-colored display mode also for the handshake meeting notice target holding icon.

  Further, in the present embodiment, although the color relating to the handshake event non-target fluctuating icon and the handshake party asymmetric asymmetry pending icon is one type of white, a plurality of types are set, and the handshake event non-target object fluctuating icon And, as in the case of the handshake event advance notice pending icon, the color can indicate the jackpot expectation.

  As described above, the normal mode and the special mode are set as the display mode of the icon, and during the game, the display mode of the icon is changed from the normal mode to the special mode and from a special mode to a different special mode. Is improving the interest of the game. The change pattern of the display mode of the icon will be described later.

(Icon display area)
Next, the pending icon display areas 141 and 143 for displaying the pending icon and the changing icon display area 142 for displaying the changing icon will be described. As shown in FIG. 82A, the pending icon display areas 141 and 143 and the changing icon display area 142 are formed in the display unit 140 of the image display device 14.

  The first hold icon display area 141 where the first hold icon is displayed is formed on the lower left side of the display unit 140, and the second hold icon display area 143 where the second hold icon is displayed is the lower right side of the display unit 140. The floating icon display area 142 is formed between the first hold icon display area 141 and the second hold icon display area 143 so as not to overlap each other.

  The first reserved icon display area 141 is divided into a first display unit 141a, a second display unit 141b, a third display unit 141c, and a fourth display unit 141d from the side of the fluctuating icon display area 142. Each display part 141a-141d respond | corresponds to the 1st memory | storage part-4th memory | storage part of the 1st special symbol reservation storage area of main RAM101c.

  Therefore, the first hold icon displayed on the first display unit 141a represents the special view hold based on the special view determination information stored in the first storage unit of the first special symbol hold storage area, and the second display unit 141b. The first hold icon displayed on the screen represents the special view hold based on the special view determination information stored in the second storage unit of the first special symbol hold storage area, and the first hold displayed on the third display unit 141c The icon represents the special view hold based on the special view determination information stored in the third storage unit of the first special symbol hold storage area, and the first hold icon displayed on the fourth display unit 141d is the first special symbol A special map reservation based on the special map determination information stored in the fourth storage unit of the storage area is displayed.

  The second reserved icon display area 143 is divided into a first display unit 143a, a second display unit 143b, a third display unit 143c, and a fourth display unit 143d from the changing icon display area 142 side. Each display part 143a-143d respond | corresponds to the 1st memory | storage part-4th memory | storage part of the 2nd special symbol reservation storage area of main RAM101c.

  Therefore, the second hold icon displayed on the first display unit 143a represents the special view hold based on the special view determination information stored in the first storage unit of the second special symbol hold storage area, and the second display unit 143b The second holding icon displayed on the second symbol represents the special view holding based on the special view determination information stored in the second storage unit of the second special symbol holding storage area, and the second holding displayed on the third display unit 143c The icon represents the special view hold based on the special view determination information stored in the third storage unit of the second special symbol hold storage area, and the second hold icon displayed on the fourth display unit 143d is the second special symbol A special map reservation based on the special map determination information stored in the fourth storage unit of the storage area is displayed.

  In addition, the changing icon displayed in the changing icon display area 142 represents the change display of the special symbol currently being executed based on the special symbol determination information stored in the special symbol relevant storage area (the zero storage unit). .

  In addition, the changing icon display area 142 in which the changing icon is displayed is provided on the pedestal image D in order to be clearly distinguished from the first holding icon display area 141 and the second holding icon display area 143. The broken line in FIG. 82 (a) is for showing each display portion and display area, and may not be actually displayed, but may be displayed.

(Processing at the time of starting opening winning of effect control board)
The start opening winning process of the effect control board 102 will be described with reference to FIG.

  In step S1303-1, sub CPU 102a stores the start opening winning combination designation command determined to be received in step S1304 in the effect information storage area of sub RAM 102c.

  The effect information suspension storage area is, as shown in FIG. 37A, a first special map suspension count storage area in which the first special map suspension count (U1) is stored and a second special map suspension count (U2). The second special drawing reserve number storage area to be stored, the first effect information storage area for storing the effect information related to the advance notice (rendering) based on the result of the first preliminary determination process, and the second preliminary determination process A second effect information suspension storage area in which the effect information relating to the advance notice (rendering) based on the result of the previous reading is stored, and effect information shifted from the first effect information suspension storage area or the second effect information suspension storage area Effect information is constituted by the storage area.

  Like the first special symbol hold storage area and the second special symbol hold storage area of the main RAM 101c, the first effect information hold storage area and the second effect information hold storage area are divided into the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit. It is done. Further, the effect information storage area corresponds to the fluctuation display (variation effect) of the special symbol currently being executed, and is a storage area common to the first effect information holding storage area and the second effect information holding storage area Therefore, for convenience, the 0th storage unit is used.

  As shown in FIG. 37 (b), each storage unit has, as a storage area of effect information relating to preview advance notice (production), a starting opening winning combination designation command area in which a starting opening winning combination designation command is stored; A continuous notice effect execution information area in which continuous notice effect execution information representing a scenario or the like is stored, and an icon display mode scenario area in which icon display mode scenario data representing a scenario of an icon display mode to be described later are stored.

  In step S1303-1, if the received start opening winning combination designation command is a first start opening winning combination designation command, the first special view holding number among the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit of the first effect information holding storage area It stores in the storage unit corresponding to (U1). In addition, if the received start opening winning combination designation command is the second start opening winning combination designation command, the second special drawing reservation number (U2) among the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit of the second effect information storage storage area It stores in the corresponding storage unit.

  In step S1303-2, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the jackpot variation presentation is currently being performed, based on the variation presentation data stored in the variation presentation data storage area of the sub RAM 102c described later. Although the fluctuation effect data is identification information indicating the contents of the effect of the fluctuation effect, the fluctuation effect data also includes a jackpot determination result as an opportunity for the fluctuation effect to be executed. The sub CPU 102a shifts the processing to step S1303-7 when determining that the jackpot variation presentation is being performed, and shifts the processing to step S1303-3 when determining that the jackpot variation presentation is not being performed.

  In step S1303-3, the sub CPU 102a is already stored in the effect information holding storage area (the first effect information holding storage area or the second effect information holding storage area) of the sub RAM 102c in which the starting opening winning a prize designation command is newly stored this time. It is determined whether or not all the preliminary determination results pertaining to the starting opening winning combination designation command (variation display executed in advance) which has been performed are "reach without a reach". The sub CPU 102a shifts the processing to step S1303-4 if it determines that all is "no reach loss", and shifts the processing to step S1303-19 if it determines that it is not "no reach loss".

  In step S1303-4, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the above-described continuous announcement rendering execution information is stored in the continuous announcement rendering execution information area of the sub RAM 102c. The sub CPU 102a shifts the process to step SS1303-5 when determining that the continuous advance notice effect execution information is stored, and shifts the process to step SS1303-8 when determining that the continuous advance notice effect execution information is not stored.

  In step S1303-5, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the continuous advance notice effect execution information stored in the continuous advance notice effect execution information area of the sub RAM 102c is the prefetch zone effect execution information. The sub CPU 102a shifts the processing to step S1303-6 if it determines that it is prefetch zone effect execution information, and shifts the processing to step S1303-7 if it determines that it is not prefetch zone effect execution information.

  Sub CPU102a, in step S1303-6, corresponding to the zone precursor effect and the pre-reading zone effect executed based on the pre-reading zone effect execution information, the pending icon corresponding to the start opening prize specified command received this time (zone effect non Determine the zone display effect scenario display scenario for zone precursor effect to change the display mode of target icon to the display mode for preview zone effect (prefetch zone effect notification mode, prefetch zone effect suggestion mode 1 or prefetch zone effect suggestion mode 2) Then, the process proceeds to step S1303-20.

  In step S1303-7, the sub CPU 102a determines an icon display scenario for no icon change notice without changing the display mode of the hold icon, and moves the process to step S1303-20. That is, the execution of the icon change notice is restricted while the predetermined conditions such as the change effect of the jackpot and the execution of continuous notice effects other than the pre-reading zone effect are satisfied.

  Sub CPU102a, in step S1303-8, the corresponding figure reserve number which is the number of reserve special features corresponding to the type of the special symbol specified by the starting opening winning a prize specified command which is received this time (the number of 1 It is determined whether or not the number of special map reservations is greater than zero. The sub CPU 102a shifts the processing to step S1303-9 if it determines that the number of corresponding special map reservations is greater than 0, and shifts the processing to step S1303-19 if it determines that the number of corresponding special map reservations is not greater than zero.

  The sub CPU 102a performs a predetermined number of changes (for example, the number of times of change) after the end of the execution of the Gasse continuous notice effect in which the result of the fluctuation display (change effect) of the special symbol targeted for the continuous notice effect is lost in Step S1303-9. It is determined whether or not it is within 1). The sub CPU 102a shifts the processing to step S1303-19 when it is determined that it is within the predetermined number of fluctuations, and shifts the processing to step S1303-10 when it is determined that it is not within the predetermined fluctuation number.

  In step S1303-10, the sub CPU 102a acquires a random number for continuous announcement effect determination, and in step S1303-11, the continuous announcement effect determination to determine the presence or absence of execution of the continuous announcement effect and the type of continuous announcement effect to be executed. A table (see FIG. 38) is selected, and a continuous notice determination process is performed to make a determination regarding a continuous notice effect by collating the preliminary determination result specified by the starting opening winning combination designation command with the random numbers for the continuous notice effect determination. The details of the continuous advance presentation effect determination table will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S1303-12, the sub CPU 102a determines whether the execution of the continuous advance presentation effect has been determined. The sub CPU 102a shifts the process to step S1303-13 if it determines that the execution of the continuous advance notice effect is determined, and shifts the process to the step S1303-19 if it determines that the non-execution of the continuous advance notice effect is determined.

  In step S1303-13, the sub CPU 102a performs processing to branch to the step to be executed next according to the result of the continuous advance presentation effect determination processing in step S1303-11. Specifically, the process proceeds to step S1303-14 when the pre-reading zone effect is performed, and the process proceeds to step S1303-15 when the continuous step-up notice effect is performed, and the chance eye notice effect is executed. In the case, the process moves to step S1303-16, and the process moves to step S1303-17 when executing the speech advance announcement effect, and moves to step S1303-18 when executing the effect announcement effect.

  In step S1303-14, the sub CPU 102a determines an execution mode of pre-reading zone effect in which zone anticipation effect and zone effect are performed by the image display device 14 and the sound output device in one or more change effects including the change effect of the notice object. Pre-reading zone effect mode determination processing is performed, and the process proceeds to step S1303-20. The pre-reading zone effect mode determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S1303-15, the sub CPU 102a performs successive step-up notice effects in which the image display device 14 and the effect service device 17 perform stepwise step effects over one or more change effects including the change effect of the advance object. In order to determine the execution mode of (1), the continuous step-up notice effect mode determination process is performed, and the process proceeds to step S1303-19. The continuous step-up notice effect mode determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 45 (a).

  In step S1303-16, the sub CPU 102a stops displaying the effect designs (TZ1 to TZ3) in an array having a predetermined regularity on the image display device 14 over one or more change effects before the change effect of the advance object. A chance eye advance notice effect mode determination process is performed to determine the execution mode of the chance eye advance notice effect to be caused, and the process proceeds to step S1303-19. The processing for determining the chance eye preview effect mode will be described later using FIG. 45 (b).

  In step S1303-17, the sub CPU 102a determines the execution mode of the serif notice effect in which the image display device 14 and the sound output device 15 perform predetermined serif effects over one or more change effects including the change effect of the advance object. In step S1303-19, the processing advances to step S1303-19. The speech advance announcement effect mode determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S1303-18, the sub CPU 102a determines the execution mode of the effect preview effect for performing predetermined effect effects by the image display device 14 and the sound output device 15 over one or more change effects including the change effect of the advance object. In step S1303-19, the processing proceeds to step S1303-19. The effect advance presentation effect mode determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S1303-19, sub CPU 102a displays the presence or absence of execution of the icon change notice displayed on image display device 14 based on the prior determination result specified by the start opening winning combination designation command, and the icon until the fluctuation effect is executed. An icon change advance notice determination process is performed to determine an icon display mode scenario or the like which is a display scenario of. The icon change advance notice determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S1303-20, sub CPU 102a sends an icon effect control command indicating an icon display mode scenario determined in the processing of step S1303-6, step S1303-7, step 1303-19, etc. to the transmission buffer of sub RAM 102c. Set, and finish the processing at the time of winning opening opening winning.

  The icon effect control command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output process of step S1900. When the image control board 105 receives the icon effect control command, the image control board 105 displays the display mode of the pending icon or the fluctuating icon corresponding to the icon effect control command in a display mode according to the icon display mode scenario. Is supposed to do.

  As described above, according to the processing at the time of starting opening winning of the present embodiment, when the continuous advance presentation effect is being executed or the continuous advance announcement effect is scheduled to be executed, the continuous advance announcement effect determination process is not executed. The production is not performed. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the player is puzzled by the plurality of continuous advance notice effects being executed in duplicate.

  Moreover, while the execution information of the pre-reading zone effect is stored, the display mode for the pre-reading zone effect (pre-reading mode effect display area (pre-reading zone effect non-target icon) corresponding to the newly received starting opening winning a prize designation command Since the display mode of the zone effect asymmetry icon becomes a normal mode after the end of the zone precursor effect or the pre-reading zone effect, the zone effect notification mode, the prefetch zone effect suggestion mode 1 or the prefetch zone effect suggestion mode 2) is changed. It becomes possible to emphasize that the pre-reading zone effect is being executed, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, since the continuous advance notice effect is not executed within the predetermined number of times of change from the execution of the Gasse continuous advance notice effect where the result of the fluctuation display (the change effect) of the special symbol that became the object of the continuous advance notice effect is lost, the continuous advance notice effect is It is possible to avoid such a disadvantage that the game does not occur continuously, and the player gets bored with the continuous notice effect and can not have a sense of expectation. It should be noted that only the Gasse continuous notice effect may not be performed within the predetermined number of changes from the execution of the Gase continuous notice effect.

◆ (Continuous notice effect judgment table)
FIG. 38 is a diagram showing a continuous preview effect determination table that is referred to when determining the presence or absence of continuous preview effect execution and the type of continuous preview effect to be executed.

  In the continuous notice effect determination table shown in FIG. 38, the effect mode (playing state), the type of special symbol specified by the start opening winning combination designation command, the prior determination result specified by the start opening winning combination designation command, and the continuation The selection rate (%) based on the random number for preliminary announcement effect determination and the type of the continuous preliminary announcement effect to be selected are uniquely associated with each other and stored.

  In addition, about five types of continuous notice effects specified in the continuous notice effect judging table shown in FIG. 38, the effect periods (hours) during the change effect of 1 are set to be different, specifically, the prefetching The effect periods of zone effects and continuous step-up notice effects are relatively (relatively) long, and the effect periods of chance eye notice effects, serif notice effects and effect notice effects are relatively (relatively) short. In addition, the presentation period is different even between each continuous notice production, the production period of the pre-reading zone production is the longest, at least the chance of the eye-shot notice production or serif notice production and effect notice production is a variation of ultra-shortening fluctuation It is shorter than time.

  Also, among the five types of continuous notice effects specified in the continuous notice effect determination table, the movable portion of the effect product device 17 for continuous step-up notice effects, chance eye notice effects, serif notice effects and effect notice effects It is a color such as the luminescent color of 17A, the color arrangement (color) of the effect pattern image that constitutes the chance eye, the color arrangement (color) of the speech image, or the color arrangement (color) of the effect image Depending on the type of, it has been a production to predict (suggest) an expectation of becoming a big hit.

  As a first feature of the continuous notice effect determination table shown in FIG. 38, continuous notice effect at a low rate in the high probability / low probability time short game state (effect mode B and C) than in the normal game state (effect mode A). Is set to be executed. By doing in this way, it is possible to prevent the reduction effect of the continuous advance presentation effect in the short time gaming state where the fluctuation time tends to be shorter than the normal gaming state, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game .

  In addition, it may include that the execution ratio of the continuous advance notice effect in the high probability / low probability time short game state is 0%, in which case the continuous advance notice effect is not executed in the high probability / low probability time short game state Become. However, even in this case, it is possible to achieve the same effect as described above. In addition, execution ratio of continuous notice effect of normal gaming state, high probability time short gaming state and low probability time short gaming state, normal gaming state> low probability time short gaming state> high probability time short gaming state, normal gaming state> high It is possible to achieve the same effect even when the short game state at a certain time> the short game state at a low certainty.

  As a second feature of the continuous notice effect determination table shown in FIG. 38, types of continuous notice effects performed in the normal gaming state (specifically, prefetch zone effect, continuous step up notice effect, chance eye notice effect) and The types of continuous notice effects executed in the high probability / low probability time short game state (specifically, chance eye notice effects, speech notice effects, effect notice effects) are different. By doing this, it is possible to prevent the player from being bored with the continuous advance notice effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, the types of continuous notice effects performed in the normal gaming state and the high probability / low probability short game state may be made different so as not to overlap, and the types of continuous notice effects performed in all the game states are It may be different so as not to overlap. Even in this case, it is possible to achieve the same effect as described above. Further, the number of types of continuous notice effects to be executed in all the game states may be made different, or only the number of types of continuous notice effects to be performed in a specific game state may be made different. Furthermore, the type of continuous notice effect performed in the normal gaming state may be the same as the type of continuous notice effect performed in the high probability / low probability time short game state.

  As a third feature of the continuous advance notice effect determination table shown in FIG. 38, a plurality of types of continuous advance notice effects are set to be executed which are different in the effect period (time) during one change effect in each gaming state. Can be mentioned. By doing this, the continuous advance notice effect becomes rich in variations, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, among the plurality of types of continuous advance notice effects executed in each gaming state, at least two continuous advance notice effects are made equal to each other, while at least one other continuous notice effect is made different. May be Even in this case, it is possible to achieve the same effect as described above. Further, the rendering periods of all the continuous preview effects may be the same.

  As a fourth feature of the continuous advance notice effect determination table shown in FIG. 38, when the change display of the first special symbol in the normal gaming state is targeted, the effect period (time) during the change effect of 1 is relative (compare Production period (time) is relatively continuous (relatively) during continuous production of one variation rather than continuous announcement production (specifically, chance eye announcement production, speech announcement announcement production, effect announcement presentation production) that is short There is a point that the execution ratio of the rendering (specifically, the pre-reading zone rendering and the continuous step-up notice rendering) is high. By doing this, it is possible to improve the effect of the continuous notice effect in the normal gaming state in which the variation time tends to be longer than in the high probability / low probability short gaming state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game Become.

  In addition, in the normal game state execution period (time) during 1 fluctuation production is relative (relatively) execution of continuous notice production (specifically, chance eye notice production, serif notice production, effect notice production) execution is short The ratio may be 0%, and even in this case, it is possible to achieve the same effect as described above.

  As a fifth feature of the continuous advance notice effect determination table shown in FIG. 38, when the change display of the second special symbol in the high probability / low probability time short game state is targeted, the effect period (time) during one change effect The relative (relatively) long continuous notice effect (specifically, the pre-reading zone effect and the continuous step-up notice effect) is shorter than the relative (relatively) time period (time) during the one variable production There is a point that the execution ratio of continuous advance notice effects (specifically, chance notice notice effects, speech advance notice effects, effect advance notice effects) is high. In this way, in the high probability / time reduction gaming state in which the fluctuation time tends to be shorter than that in the normal gaming state, the fluctuation time is short, and the inconvenience such as continuous notification effect being executed halfway is not generated. It is possible to improve the interest of

  In addition, in high probability / low certainty short game state production period (time) during the fluctuation production of 1 is relatively (relatively) long continuous notice effect that is relatively long (specifically, pre-reading zone effect and continuous step-up notice effect) Is not executed, but may be executed as long as the effect period (time) during the variation effect of 1 is lower than the execution rate of the continuous advance notice effect having a short duration. Even in this case, the same effect as described above can be obtained.

  As a sixth feature of the continuous notice effect judging table shown in FIG. 38, a high probability / low probability time short game state is more than a rate of giving notice of the expectation of becoming a big hit by the kind of color in the continuous notice effect executed in the normal gaming state. There is a point that the ratio which announces the expectation which will be a jackpot according to the kind of color is high in the continuous notice production performed in. By doing this, it is possible for the player to intuitively grasp the notice content even in the high probability / low probability time short game state in which the fluctuation time tends to be short, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Become.

  In addition, four types of continuous notice effects (continuous step-up notice effects, chance eye notice effects, serif notice effects, effect notice effects) for giving notices according to the type of color are executed in the normal gaming state and high probability / time reduction The degree of anticipation to be a jackpot for each color of an advance notice and / or the degree of anticipation that an SP reach effect is to be performed may be different depending on when it is executed in the gaming state.

  Specifically, to explain the effect notice effect as an example, in the normal gaming state, when the pre-decision result is lost or in the case of normal reach, the pre-decision result in the high probability / time-short game state than the ratio at which the blue effect image is displayed. By setting the rate at which the blue effect image is displayed high in the case of a loss or normal reach, the expectation and / or the SP reach effect to be a jackpot when the blue effect image is displayed in the normal gaming state are executed To lower the expectation that will be the jackpot when the blue effect image is displayed in the high probability / low probability time game state and / or the expectation that the SP reach effect will be executed, rather than the expected degree, or And vice versa.

  In addition, the expectation for becoming a big hit for the effect image of all colors and / or the expectation for executing the SP reach effect are not made different between the normal gaming state and the high probability / low probability time short gaming state, for example, a predetermined Expected degree of success when a color (for example, blue or green) effect image is displayed and / or expected degree of SP reach effect to be executed in the normal gaming state and the high probability / low probability time short gaming state Different from the normal gaming state and / or the expected degree of expectation that will be a jackpot when the effect image of colors other than the predetermined color (for example, red and rainbow) is displayed It may be made to be the same in the low probability time short game state.

  In addition, for predetermined continuous notice effects (for example, effect notice effects and chance eye notice effects), for each color of the notice in the case of being executed in the normal gaming state and in the case of being executed in the high probability / time reduction gaming state The degree of jackpot expectation and / or the degree of expectation for the SP reach effect to be executed are made different, and for the continuous notice effect other than the predetermined continuous notice effect (for example, the continuous step-up notice effect and the serif notice effect) In the case where it is executed in the state and in the case where it is executed in the high probability / time short game state, the expectation for becoming the jackpot for each color of the advance notice and / or the expectation for the SP reach effect to be executed become the same. It is also good.

◆ (Modified example of continuous notice effect judgment table)
FIG. 39 is a view showing a modified example of the continuous advance presentation effect determination table which is referred to when determining the presence or absence of the execution of the continuous advance presentation effect and the type of the continuous advance presentation effect to be executed.

  In the continuous advance notice effect determination table shown in FIG. 39, the effect mode (playing state), the type of special symbol specified by the start opening winning combination designation command, the prior determination result specified by the start opening winning combination designation command, and the continuation The selection rate (%) based on the random number for preliminary announcement effect determination and the type of the continuous preliminary announcement effect to be selected are uniquely associated with each other and stored.

  In addition, about five types of continuous notice effects prescribed in the continuous notice effect judging table shown in FIG. 39, the effect period (time) during the fluctuation effect of 1 is set to be different, specifically, the prefetching The effect periods of zone effects and continuous step-up notice effects are relatively (relatively) long, and the effect periods of chance eye notice effects, serif notice effects and effect notice effects are relatively (relatively) short. In addition, the presentation period is different even between each continuous notice production, the production period of the pre-reading zone production is the longest, at least the chance of the eye-shot notice production or serif notice production and effect notice production is a variation of ultra-shortening fluctuation It is shorter than time.

  Also, among the five types of continuous notice effects specified in the continuous notice effect determination table, the movable portion of the effect product device 17 for continuous step-up notice effects, chance eye notice effects, serif notice effects and effect notice effects It is a color such as the luminescent color of 17A, the color arrangement (color) of the effect pattern image that constitutes the chance eye, the color arrangement (color) of the speech image, or the color arrangement (color) of the effect image Depending on the type of, it has been a production to predict (suggest) an expectation of becoming a big hit.

  As a first feature of the continuous notice effect judging table shown in FIG. 39, continuous notice effect at a high rate in the high probability / low probability time short game state (effect mode B and C) than in the normal game state (effect mode A). Is set to be executed. By doing this, it is possible to improve the presentation effect in the high probability / low probability time short gaming state in which the fluctuation time is likely to be shorter than in the normal gaming state, and to improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, it may include that the execution ratio of the continuous advance notice effect in the normal gaming state is 0%, in which case the continuous advance notice effect is not executed in the normal gaming state. However, even in this case, it is possible to achieve the same effect as described above. In addition, execution ratio of continuous notice effect of normal gaming state, high probability time short gaming state and low probability time short gaming state, normal gaming state <low probability time short gaming state <high probability time short gaming state, normal gaming state <high The same effect can be achieved even when the short game state at the time of <time low game time.

  As a second feature of the continuous notice effect determination table shown in FIG. 39, types of continuous notice effects performed in the normal gaming state (specifically, prefetch zone effect, continuous step-up notice effect, chance eye notice effect) The types of continuous notice effects executed in the high probability / low probability time short game state (specifically, chance eye notice effects, speech notice effects, effect notice effects) are different. By doing this, it is possible to prevent the player from being bored with the continuous advance notice effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, the types of continuous notice effects performed in the normal gaming state and the high probability / low probability short game state may be made different so as not to overlap, and the types of continuous notice effects performed in all the game states are It may be different so as not to overlap. Even in this case, it is possible to achieve the same effect as described above. Further, the number of types of continuous notice effects to be executed in all the game states may be made different, or only the number of types of continuous notice effects to be performed in a specific game state may be made different. Furthermore, the type of continuous notice effect performed in the normal gaming state may be the same as the type of continuous notice effect performed in the high probability / low probability time short game state.

  As a third feature of the continuous advance notice effect determination table shown in FIG. 39, a plurality of types of continuous advance notice effects are set to be executed in different effect periods (time) during one change effect in each gaming state. Can be mentioned. By doing this, the continuous advance notice effect becomes rich in variations, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, among the plurality of types of continuous advance notice effects executed in each gaming state, at least two continuous advance notice effects are made equal to each other, while at least one other continuous notice effect is made different. May be Even in this case, it is possible to achieve the same effect as described above. Further, the rendering periods of all the continuous preview effects may be the same.

  As a fourth feature of the continuous advance notice effect determination table shown in FIG. 39, when the change display of the first special symbol in the normal gaming state is targeted, the effect period (time) during the change effect of 1 is relative (compare Production period (time) is relatively continuous (relatively) during continuous production of one variation rather than continuous announcement production (specifically, chance eye announcement production, speech announcement announcement production, effect announcement presentation production) that is short There is a point that the execution ratio of the rendering (specifically, the pre-reading zone rendering and the continuous step-up notice rendering) is high. By doing this, it is possible to improve the effect of the continuous notice effect in the normal gaming state in which the variation time tends to be longer than in the high probability / low probability short gaming state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game Become.

  In addition, in the normal game state execution period (time) during 1 fluctuation production is relative (relatively) execution of continuous notice production (specifically, chance eye notice production, serif notice production, effect notice production) execution is short The ratio may be 0%, and even in this case, it is possible to achieve the same effect as described above.

  As a fifth feature of the continuous advance notice effect determination table shown in FIG. 39, when the change display of the second special symbol in the high probability / low probability time short game state is targeted, the effect period (time) during one change effect The relative (relatively) long continuous notice effect (specifically, the pre-reading zone effect and the continuous step-up notice effect) is shorter than the relative (relatively) time period (time) during the one variable production There is a point that the execution ratio of continuous advance notice effects (specifically, chance notice notice effects, speech advance notice effects, effect advance notice effects) is high. In this way, in the high probability / time reduction gaming state in which the fluctuation time tends to be shorter than that in the normal gaming state, the fluctuation time is short, and the inconvenience such as continuous notification effect being executed halfway is not generated. It is possible to improve the interest of

  In addition, in the high probability / low certainty short gaming state, the execution period (time) of 1 during the fluctuation production of 1 is relatively (relatively) long, but the execution ratio of the continuous advance notice effect is 0%, but 1 fluctuation production It may be executed if it is a ratio that is lower than the execution ratio of continuous notice effect (specifically, prefetch zone effect and continuous step-up notice effect) in which the effect period (time) in the inside is short. Even in this case, the same effect as described above can be obtained.

  As a sixth feature of the continuous announcement effect judging table shown in FIG. 39, it is a big hit according to the kind of color in the high probability / low probability time short game state than the ratio of giving a priori expectation of becoming a big hit according to the color type in the normal gaming state. One of the points is that the rate of anticipating expectations is high. By doing this, it is possible for the player to intuitively grasp the notice content even in the high probability / low probability time short game state in which the fluctuation time tends to be short, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Become.

(Pre-reading zone effect mode decision processing of effect control board)
The pre-reading zone effect mode determination process of the effect control board 102 will be described with reference to FIG.

  In step S1303-14-1, the sub CPU 102a acquires a random number for pre-reading zone effect scenario determination, and in step S1303-14-2, pre-reading zone effect scenario determination table (see FIG. 41) for performing pre-reading zone effect scenario determination. Is selected, and the pre-reading zone effect scenario is determined by collating the predetermination result specified by the starting opening winning combination designation command with the pre-reading zone effect scenario determination random number or the like.

  The pre-reading zone effect scenario means effect contents of zone turning effect and pre-reading zone effect. The effect contents of the zone turning effect and the pre-reading zone effect include whether or not the turning effect is executable, the timing when the turning effect is executed when the turning effect is executed, the type of the turning effect to be executed, and the execution of the pre-reading zone effect The timing at which the pre-reading zone effect is executed when the pre-reading zone is performed is included.

  The pre-reading zone effect scenario determination table shown in FIG. 41 is associated with the pre-determination result indicated by the starting opening winning combination designation command which is the target of the processing at the time of starting opening winning and the current first special drawing reserve number (U1). Therefore, when sub CPU 102a selects the pre-reading zone effect determination table, the preliminary determination result indicated by the starting opening winning combination designation command, which is the target of the processing of main starting opening winning, stored in sub RAM 102c The number of the first starting opening winning a prize specified command which is remembered in 1 production information retention storage territory (the 1st storage section-the 4th storage section), namely, it refers to the 1st special figure reservation number (U1).

  In addition, with regard to the first special view reservation number (U1) of the prefetch zone effect scenario determination table shown in FIG. 41, the start opening winning process in step S1303 is executed prior to the hold information update process in step S1305. The number of reservations 1 less than the actual first special view reservation number (U1) is defined.

  Also, in each prefetch zone rendering scenario determination table associated with the preliminary determination result and the first special map reservation number (U1), the prefetch zone rendering scenario determination value and the selection rate (%) for each scenario, The pre-reading zone effect scenario is correlated and stored.

  In addition, “relevant fluctuation”, “1 fluctuation before”, “2 fluctuation before” and “3 fluctuation before” described in the pre-reading zone effect scenario determination table are pre-reading zone effect, turning success effect, turning failure effect 1 or It represents the timing at which the insult failure effect 2 is executed. Here, "the said fluctuation" in the present embodiment represents a fluctuation display (hereinafter referred to as "the fluctuation") of the special symbol corresponding to the starting opening winning combination designation command according to the processing at the time of starting opening winning a prize, "" Represents the fluctuation display of the special symbol before the fluctuation is performed, "2 fluctuation before" represents the fluctuation display of the special symbol before the fluctuation is performed, "3 fluctuation before" is the , Represents the change display of the special symbol of the previous three when the change is performed.

  In step S1303-14-3, the sub CPU 102a acquires a final number determination random number in order to determine the final number of people (hereinafter simply referred to as "the final number of people") associated with the zone precursor effect icon, and step S1303-14. In -4, the final number determination table (see FIG. 42) for determining the final number is selected, and by matching the prefetch zone effect scenario with the final number determination random number etc., the final number is correlated with the final number. Aura production scenario judgment TBL. Decide No.

  The final number is the number of people constituting the icon used for zone precursor effect, and means the number of people finally reached. The reason is "final" because the effect mode of the zone precursor effect, in other words, the number of people configuring the icon used for the zone precursor effect (display mode of the icon) may change in the middle is there. In the present embodiment, the final number of persons is set to four types of one, three, five and seven, and this "one" corresponds to the second special mode, and "three" is the third. "3" corresponds to the third special mode 1, "5" corresponds to the third special mode 2, and "7" corresponds to the third special mode 3. That is, determining the final number of people can also determine the final icon display mode of the zone precursor effect.

  The final number determination table shown in FIG. 42 is associated with the pre-reading zone effect scenario determined in the pre-reading zone effect scenario determination. In each final number determination table associated with the pre-reading zone effect scenario, the final number determination value and the final number are stored in association with each other such that the selection rate (%) shown in FIG. Therefore, when selecting the final number determination table, the sub CPU 102a refers to the pre-reading zone effect scenario indicated by the pre-reading zone effect scenario data stored in the sub RAM 102 c.

  In addition, “precursor effect scenario determination TBL. No” described in the final number determination table is identification information of the precursor effect scenario determination table used in the zone precursor effect scenario determination described later, and is performed in the process of starting opening prize winning The determination result of the pre-reading zone effect scenario determination and the determination result of the final number determination are associated with each other. Therefore, the final number of people is determined by the final number of people determination, and a precursor effect scenario determination table used in the zone predictive effects scenario determination is also determined.

  In step S1303-14-5, the sub CPU 102a acquires a random number for zone precursor effect scenario determination in order to determine a zone precursor effect scenario, and in step S1303-14-6, a zone for performing zone precursor effect scenario determination. The precursor effect scenario determination table (see FIG. 43) is selected, and the precursor effect scenario determination TBL. A zone precursor presentation scenario is determined by collating No and a zone precursor presentation scenario determination random number or the like.

  The zone precursor presentation scenario means the contents of the zone precursor presentation. Whether the zone precursor effect is performed or not, and the icon display mode in the case where the zone precursor effect is performed is one of the second special mode or the third special mode 1 to the third special mode 3 in the effect contents of the zone predictive effect The timing of change, and the icon display mode after change (the number of persons configuring the icon) in the case of change are included.

  As described above, in the zone precursor rendering scenario determination table shown in FIG. 43, the precursor rendering scenario determination TBL.L in which the determination result of the prefetch zone rendering scenario determination in the starting opening winning process and the determination result of the final number of people determination are associated. It is associated with No. Therefore, when the sub CPU 102a selects the zone precursor rendering scenario determination table, the precursor rendering scenario determination TBL.S derived as the determination result of the final number determination of step S1303-14-4. See No.

  The timing at which the number of people constituting the icon pertaining to the zone precursor effect will be the “at winning”, “3 before fluctuation → 2 before fluctuation” and “2 before fluctuation → 1 before fluctuation” described in the zone precursor effect scenario determination table Represents Here, "at the time of winning" indicates the time of occurrence of the special view reserve corresponding to the starting opening winning combination designation command according to the processing at the time of starting opening winning, "3 before change → 2 before change", the change is performed It represents the period until the variation display of the last three special symbols is finished and the variation display of the last two special symbols is started (during the shift of the reserve icon), “2 variation before → 1 variation before” is It represents a period between the time when the variable display of the second special symbol on which the fluctuation is performed and the start of the variable display of the next special symbol (when the hold icon is shifted).

  In FIG. 43, “at the time of winning”, “3 before fluctuation → 2 before fluctuation” and “2 before fluctuation → 1 before fluctuation” are provided as the timing of becoming the number of people constituting the icon concerning zone precursor effect. In this embodiment, the timing at which the number of people constituting the icon concerning zone precursor effect changes is "when winning", "4 before fluctuation → 3 before fluctuation" and "3 before fluctuation → 2 before fluctuation" And the zone precursor rendering scenario determination table shown in FIG. 43 is used as the first special view reservation number “3”, which is set to any of “2 before change → 1 before change”. Because, it is because only "when winning a prize", "3 before fluctuation → 2 before fluctuation" and "2 before fluctuation → 1 before fluctuation" can occur.

  In the zone precursor rendering scenario determination table used in the case of the first special drawing reserve number “4”, “when winning”, “4 before fluctuation” as the timing at which the number of people configuring the icon pertaining to the zone precursor rendering changes In the precursor effect scenario determination table used in the case of “3 change before”, “3 change before → 2 change before” and “2 change before → 1 change before”, and used in the case of the first special view reservation number “2” "When winning a prize" and "2 before fluctuation → 1 before fluctuation" are set as the timing at which the number of people constituting the icon related to the precursor effect changes, and the precursor effect scenario used in the case of the first special view reservation number "1". In the determination table, "at the time of winning" is set as the timing at which the number of people constituting the icon related to the zone precursor effect changes.

  In addition, the numbers “1”, “3”, “5” and “7” described in the lower part of the column of the timing at which the number of people configuring the icon pertaining to the zone precursor effect changes in FIG. It shows that it changes to the icon of the display mode constituted by the person of the number of people.

  Therefore, for example, in the precursor effect scenario 17-1, the display mode (second special mode) in which the display mode of the suspension icon generated at the time of winning and the icon displayed at that time is the number "one person" is In "before change → 2 before change", the display mode of the icon displayed at that time is the display mode (third special mode 1) consisting of the number "3 persons", and in "2 before change → 1 before change", The display mode of the icon displayed at that time represents the effect contents of the zone precursor effect that is the display mode (third special mode 2) in which the number of people is "5".

  In step S1303-14-7, the sub CPU 102a sub-stores pre-reading zone effect execution information indicating a pre-reading zone effect scenario, which is the judgment result of the pre-reading zone effect scenario determination, and a zone precursor effect scenario, which is the judgment result of the zone precursor effect scenario determination. It is set (stored) in the continuous notice effect execution information area of the same storage unit as the storage unit storing the starting opening winning combination designation command of the RAM 102c.

  In step S1303-14-8, the sub CPU 102a sub-stores a pre-reading zone effect control command indicating a pre-reading zone effect scenario, which is the judgment result of the pre-reading zone effect scenario determination, and a zone precursor effect scenario, which is the judgment result of the zone precursor effect scenario determination. It sets to the transmission buffer of RAM102c.

  The prefetch zone effect control command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output process of step S1900. When the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 receive the pre-reading zone effect control command, the pre-reading zone effect control command indicates a pre-zone effect effect scenario and a pre-reading zone effect scenario indicates an action content (effect mode). And control (perform) zone turn presentation and pre-reading zone presentation.

  In step S1303-14-9, the sub CPU 102a acquires a random number for icon display mode scenario determination for determining an icon display mode scenario for the execution of the prefetch zone effect or the zone precursor effect.

  In step S1303-14-10, the sub CPU 102a determines whether the result of the pre-reading zone effect scenario determination is the pre-reading zone effect scenario including the execution of pre-reading zone effect or not, in other words, relates to the processing at the starting opening winnings It is determined based on the starting opening winning combination designation command whether or not to execute the pre-reading zone effect. If it is determined that the pre-reading zone effect is to be performed, the sub CPU 102a shifts the processing to step S1303-14-11, and does not execute the pre-reading zone effect, but executes the zone turning effect (hereinafter, pre-reading zone effect is not performed, but around the zone If it is determined that execution of the effect is referred to as “Gasse zone turning effect”), the processing moves to step S1303-14-12.

  In step S1303-14-11, the sub CPU 102a selects an icon display mode scenario determination table (refer to FIG. 44) for prefetching zone effect execution to determine an icon display mode scenario in the case of executing the prefetch zone effect. The icon display mode scenario determination is performed to determine the icon display mode scenario by collating the icon display mode scenario determination random numbers.

  The icon display mode scenario determination table for the preliminary read zone effect execution shown in FIG. 44 is a precursor effect scenario in which the determination result of the preliminary read zone effect scenario determination in the starting opening winning process and the determination result of the final number of people determination are associated. It is provided for each. Therefore, when the sub CPU 102a selects the icon display mode scenario determination table for performing pre-reading zone effect execution, it refers to the precursor effect scenario indicated by the precursor effect scenario data stored in the sub RAM 102c.

  A plurality of icon display mode scenarios are provided in each icon display mode scenario determination table provided for each precursor presentation scenario, and an icon display mode scenario determination value is appropriately allocated to each icon display mode scenario. ing.

  In addition, “when winning”, “2 before fluctuation”, “1 before fluctuation” and “the above fluctuation” described in the icon display mode scenario determination table for the pre-reading zone effect execution are the timing at which the icon display mode changes. It represents. As described above, when the pre-reading zone effect is executed, the display mode of the displayed zone effect object icon is the third special mode 3, and the display mode of the zone effect non-target icon is the third special mode 6. .

  In addition, even if the pre-reading zone effect is not executed, before the pre-reading zone effect is executed, the zone effect target icon becomes the second special mode or the third special mode 1 or 2 as the zone pre-event effect, and the zone effect The non-target icon is the second special mode or the third special mode 4 or 5. And, when the icon of the second special aspect or the third special aspect including the silhouette of a person is displayed in this way, the silhouette of the person who composes the icon (the main silhouette portion for the third special aspect) Colors can change.

  For example, “white → green” of “1 change before” of the icon display mode scenario “5” in FIG. 44 is a silhouette of a person configuring an icon displayed in white (a main silhouette portion for the third special mode) Represents that the color of changes to green.

  In addition, “white → green → red → zebra → rainbow” of “the relevant variation” of the icon display mode scenario “15” in FIG. 44 is a silhouette of a person configuring an icon displayed in white (about the third special mode Indicates that the color of the main silhouette part changes stepwise from green to red to zebra pattern to iridescent colors.

  The change in color of the silhouette of the person configuring the icon (the main silhouette portion in the third special mode) is appropriately performed in accordance with the contents of the change effect being performed at that time. As the contents of the change production for changing the color of the silhouette of a person, one or more times during one change production depending on the temporary stop or re-change of the pseudo-series production or the expectation of the jackpot win Step-up of a predetermined effect (effect image, effect sound, etc.) in a stepwise manner In the case of step-up of so-called step-up notice, a predetermined cut-in for displaying on the image display device 14 a cut-in image according to the expectation of the big hit An announcement, a speech announcement made to output speech speech from the speech output device 15 while displaying a speech image according to the anticipation, the degree of expectation of the jackpot win, an announcement of a character, an appearance of a character, or an execution of developmental development that develops into super reach production At the time, when the reach state is established, the predetermined action presentation by the presentation service object apparatus 17 is appropriately set according to the fluctuation presentation at that time.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the timing at which the color of the silhouette (the main silhouette portion in the third special mode) of the person configuring the icon according to the icon display mode scenario for executing the prefetch zone effect changes is the present embodiment. It is possible to appropriately set, for example, when the icon shifts, when the predetermined fluctuation presentation ends and the next fluctuation presentation is started.

  In step S1303-14-12, the sub CPU 102a selects an icon display mode scenario determination table (not shown) for executing the gasse zone rotation effect execution to determine the icon display mode scenario when executing the gasse zone rotation effect, and displays the icon The icon display mode scenario determination is performed to determine the icon display mode scenario by collating the display mode scenario determination random numbers.

  In step S1303-14-13, sub CPU102a is the same as the storage unit storing the start opening winning combination designation command of sub RAM 102c in the icon display mode scenario determined in step S1303-14-11 or step S1303-14-12. The icon display mode scenario area of the storage unit is stored, and the pre-reading zone effect mode determination process is ended.

(Continuous step-up notice effect mode determination process of effect control board)
The continuous step-up notice effect mode determination process of the effect control board 102 will be described using FIG. 45 (a).

  In step S1303-15-1, the sub CPU 102a acquires a random number for continuous step-up notice effect scenario determination, and in step S1303-15-2, the continuous step-up notice effect scenario determination table (see FIG. 46A) is obtained. Select and select the advance determination result specified by the starting opening winning combination designation command, and the number of special drawing reservations (the number of first special drawing reservations or the number of second special drawing reservations) corresponding to the type of special symbol to be notified A step-up notice scenario for continuous step-up notice is determined by collating random numbers for step-up notice presentation scenario determination and the like. The continuous step-up notice effect scenario determination table will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The continuous step-up notice effect scenario means the effect contents (effect mode) of the continuous step-up notice effect, and the timing when the various step effects constituting each step of the continuous step-up notice effect are executed, the step effect to be executed Indicates the type of

  In step S1303-15-3, the sub CPU 102a performs continuous step-up notice effect execution information indicating a continuous step-up notice effect scenario and continuous notice execution of the same storage portion as the storage portion storing the starting opening winning combination designation command of the sub RAM 102c. Set (store) in the information storage area.

  In step S1303-15-4, the sub CPU 102a sets a continuous step-up notice effect control command indicating a continuous step-up notice effect scenario in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c, and ends the continuous step-up notice effect mode determination process.

  The continuous step-up notice effect control command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output process of step S1900. When the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 receive the continuous step-up notice production control command, the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 continuously perform the contents according to the production contents (production mode) according to the continuous step-up notice production scenario indicated by the continuous step-up notice production control command. Control (execute) the step-up notice effect.

(Continuous step up notice scenario scenario judgment table)
FIG. 46 (a) is a diagram showing a continuous step-up notice effect scenario determination table.

  In the continuous step-up notice effect scenario determination table shown in FIG. 46 (a), the preliminary determination result specified by the start opening winning combination designation command, the number of special figure reservations corresponding to the type of the special symbol to be notified, and The selection rate (%) by step-up notice effect scenario selection random number, the continuous step-up notice effect scenario No. selected, and the effect contents (render mode) corresponding to the scenario are uniquely associated and stored There is.

  In addition, "blue round (SU1)" of the column of the effect content (effect mode) means that the movable portion 17A of the effect character device 17 is located in front of the image display device 14 as the first step effect. A plurality of LEDs provided in the inside emit light in blue while performing the effect operation of moving to the effect position (moving width: small), and a blue effect image is displayed at a position corresponding to the movable portion 17A of the image display device 14 It means that.

  In addition, “greenishness (SU2)” moves to the second effect position (moving width: middle) in which the movable portion 17A of the effect character apparatus 17 is positioned in front of the image display device 14 as a second step effect. This means that a plurality of LEDs provided inside emit green light while performing rendering operation, and a green effect image is displayed at a position corresponding to the movable portion 17A of the image display device 14.

  In addition, “red turning (SU3)” moves to the third effect position (moving width: large) where the movable portion 17A of the effect character device 17 is positioned in front of the image display device 14 as the third step effect. This means that a plurality of LEDs provided inside emit red light while performing rendering operation, and a red effect image is displayed at a position corresponding to the movable portion 17A of the image display device 14.

  In addition, “rainbow-like (SU4)” refers to the third effect position (moving width: large) in which the movable portion 17A of the effect character device 17 is located in front of the image display device 14 as the last fourth step effect. This means that a plurality of LEDs provided in the interior emit light in a rainbow color while performing a moving rendering operation, and a rainbow effect image is displayed at a position corresponding to the movable portion 17A of the image display device 14.

  In addition, the big hit expectation degree of each step production has become "blue round (SU1) <" green round (SU2) "<" red round (SU3) <<rainbow round (SU4) ", and continuous step up At the stage of stepping up (progressing) up to "red turn (SU3)" in the preliminary production, it was decided that the fluctuation presentation over the SP reach production was to be executed at the step up (progressed), and the change production at the stage of stepping up to "rainbowing (SU4)" It is decided that the result of the will be a big hit. However, the “rainbow-like (SU4)” appears only in the variation to maintain the player's expectation.

(Process for determining the chances of the presentation control board
The chance eye advance notice effect mode determination process of the effect control board 102 will be described with reference to FIG.

  In step S1303-16-1, the sub CPU 102a acquires a random number for the chance eye preview effect scenario determination, and selects the chance eye preview effect scenario determination table (see FIG. 46 (b)) in step S1303-16-2. , The preliminary judgment result specified by the starting opening winning combination designation command, the number of special drawing reservations (the number of first special drawing reservations or the number of second special drawing reservations) corresponding to the types of special symbols to be notified A chance eye notice presentation scenario is determined by collating the presentation scenario determination random numbers and the like. The chance eye advance presentation scenario determination table will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The chance eye notice presentation scenario means the contents of the presentation (presentation mode) of the chance eye notice presentation, and indicates the timing at which the various chance eyes constituting the chance eye notice presentation are stopped and the type of the chance eye displayed. It is a thing.

  In step S1303-16-3, the sub CPU 102a stores, in the same storage unit, the successive notice execution information storage unit in the same storage unit as the storage unit storing the start opening winning combination designation command of the sub RAM 102c. Set (store) in the area.

  In step S1303-16-4, the sub CPU 102a sets a chance eye advance notice effect control command indicating a chance eye advance notice effect scenario in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c, and ends this chance eye advance notice mode determination processing.

  The chance eye advance notice control command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output process of step S1900. When the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 receive the chance eye notice production control command, the chance eye notice production according to the production contents (production mode) according to the chance eye notice production scenario indicated by the chance eye notice production control command. Control (execute)

(Chance eye notice production scenario judgment table)
FIG. 46 (b) is a diagram showing a chance eye advance presentation scenario determination table.

  In the chance-eye notice presentation scenario determination table shown in FIG. 46 (b), the preliminary determination result specified by the start-up winning combination designation command, the number of special-characters holdings corresponding to the types of special symbols to be notified, and the chance eyes The selection rate (%) based on the random number for preview presentation scenario scenario determination, the selected chance eye preview presentation scenario No, and the contents of the presentation (the presentation mode) corresponding to the scenario are uniquely associated and stored.

  In addition, "blue design" of the column of the effect content (reproduction mode) means that the combination of the effect patterns whose color is set to blue as the chance eye is stopped and displayed. "Green design" means that the combination of the production design whose color is set to green as a chance eye is stopped and displayed. "Red design" means that the combination of the production design whose color is set to red as the chance eye is stopped and displayed.

  In addition, the expectation for the big hit of each chance eye is “blue pattern” <“green pattern” <“red pattern”, and at the stage when “red pattern” is stopped and displayed in the chance eye preview effect, SP reach effect or more is displayed It is decided that the fluctuation presentation of will be executed. Although there is no chance for the jackpot to be determined in the chance eye preview effect, a chance for the jackpot to be established may be provided.

(Delivery notice production mode decision processing of production control board)
Referring to FIG. 47 (a), the speech advance notice effect mode determination process of the effect control board 102 will be described.

  In step S1303-17-1, the sub CPU 102a acquires a random number for serif notice effect scenario determination, and in step S1303-17-2, selects the serif notice effect scenario determination table (see FIG. 48A) and starts up. Serif notice effect scenario determination with the prior judgment result specified by the mouth prize designation command, the number of special figure holdings (the number of first special drawing holdings or the number of second special drawing holdings) corresponding to the type of special symbol to be notified The dialogue warning effect scenario is determined by collating the random numbers and the like. The speech advance presentation effect scenario determination table will be described later with reference to FIG. 48 (a).

  The dialogue warning presentation scenario means the contents of the announcement of the announcement announcement of the speech (rendering mode), and indicates the timing when various speech effects constituting the announcement announcement of the speech are executed, and the type of speech presentation to be performed.

  In step S1303-17-3, the sub CPU 102a places the speech pre-notice effect execution information indicating the serif pre-notice effect scenario in the continuous pre-notice execution information memory area of the same memory section as the memory section storing the starting opening prize designation command of the sub RAM 102 c. Set (memory).

  In step S1303-17-4, the sub CPU 102a sets a speech preview production control command indicating a speech preview production scenario in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c, and ends the speech production presentation mode determination process.

  The speech notification effect control command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output process of step S1900. When the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 receive the speech notification effect control command, the lamp control board 104 and the image control substrate 105 control the speech notification effect according to the presentation contents (rendering mode) indicated by the speech notification effect scenario indicated by the speech notification effect control command (execution) Do.

(Interactive notice scenario scenario judgment table)
FIG. 48 (a) is a diagram showing a dialogue warning presentation scenario determination table.

  In the serif notice effect scenario scenario determination table shown in FIG. 48 (a), the preliminary judgment result specified by the start opening prize winning designation command, the number of special drawing reservations corresponding to the type of the special symbol to be notice object, and the serif notice effect The selection rate (%) based on the scenario determination random number, the selected dialogue warning effect scenario No., and the effect contents (effect mode) corresponding to the scenario are uniquely associated and stored.

  In the column of the contents of the presentation (the presentation mode), "Hello", "Where?", "Hey ~~~", "This is it!" And "No!" ) Means a serif displayed in black on the image display device 14 in order to speak).

  Also, “reach?” Means a serif displayed in black on the image display device 14 to suggest that the SP reach effect or more may be executed. “Leach!” Means a serif displayed in black on the image display device 14 to indicate the execution of the reach effect.

  Further, “Hot!” Means a line displayed in red on the image display device 14 to indicate that the jackpot has high expectation. “Extreme heat!” Means a serif displayed in gold on the image display 14 to indicate that the jackpot's expectation is quite high. "OK!" Means a message displayed in rainbow characters on the image display device 14 to indicate the occurrence of a jackpot.

  In addition, the jackpot expectation degree of each line is "black line words" <"red line words" <"gold line words" <"rainbow line words", and "red line words" and "gold line words" are displayed in the speech announcement effect At this point, it is determined that the change effect more than the SP reach effect is executed, and it is determined that the result of the change effect will be a big hit when the "rainbow character" speech is displayed. However, “deficit line words”, “gold character line words”, and “rainbow character line words” are displayed only in the above-mentioned fluctuation in order to maintain the player's expectation.

(Effect notice notice mode determination process of effect control board)
With reference to FIG. 47 (b), the effect notification presentation effect mode determination processing of the effect control board 102 will be described.

  In step S1303-18-1, the sub CPU 102a acquires a random number for effect announcement presentation scenario determination, and in step S1303-18-2, performs an effect announcement presentation scenario determination table (FIG. b) Select and select the advance determination result specified by the start opening winning combination designation command, and the number of special map reservations corresponding to the type of special symbol to be notified (first special drawing reservation number or second special drawing reservation) The effect notice presentation scenario is determined by comparing the number) and the effect notice presentation scenario determination random numbers and the like. The effect advance presentation rendering scenario determination table will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The effect preview effect scenario means effect contents (effect mode) of the effect preview effect, and indicates the timing at which the variation start effect image of the effect pattern constituting the effect preview effect is displayed, and the type of the effect image.

  In step S1303-18-3, the sub CPU 102a places the effect preview presentation execution information indicating the effect preview presentation scenario in the continuous announcement execution information storage area of the same storage section as the storage section storing the starting opening prize designation command of the sub RAM 102c. Set (memory).

  In step S1303-18-4, the sub CPU 102a sets an effect preview effect control command indicating an effect preview effect scenario in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c, and ends the effect preview effect mode determination process.

  The effect preview effect control command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output process of step S1900. When the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 receive the effect notice effect control command, the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 control the effect notice effect according to the effect contents (effect mode) according to the effect notice effect scenario indicated by the effect notice effect control command ).

(Effect notice production scenario decision table)
FIG. 48 (b) is a diagram showing an effect advance presentation rendering scenario determination table.

  In the effect notice presentation scenario scenario determination table shown in FIG. 48 (b), the preliminary judgment result specified by the start opening winning combination designation command, the number of special drawing reservations corresponding to the type of the special symbol to be notified, and the effect notice presentation effect A selection rate (%) based on a scenario determination random number, a selected effect notice presentation scenario scenario No, and presentation contents (stage presentation) corresponding to the scenario are uniquely associated and stored.

  In addition, with the "blue effect" of the column of the effect content (render mode), when the variation display of the effect design on the image display device 14 is started, the blue effect image is displayed so as to surround the periphery of the effect design. means. Further, “green effect” means that a green effect image is displayed so as to surround the periphery of the effect pattern when the variable display of the effect pattern on the image display device 14 is started.

  Further, “red effect” means that a red effect image is displayed so as to surround the periphery of the effect pattern at the start of the variable display of the effect pattern on the image display device 14. Further, “rainbow effect” means that an effect image of rainbow color is displayed so as to surround the periphery of the effect pattern when the variable display of the effect pattern in the image display device 14 is started.

  In addition, the jackpot expectation degree of each effect image is “blue effect” <“green effect” <“red effect” <“rainbow effect”, and SP reach when “red effect” occurs in the effect preview effect production Execution of the fluctuation effect above the effect is decided, and the jackpot of the fluctuation effect is decided when the "rainbow effect" occurs. However, the “rainbow effect” is generated only by the change in order to maintain the player's expectation.

  In the present embodiment, when the continuous advance notice effect occurs, the reach effect or more is determined by the change, but the continuous advance notice effect is performed by the variable display of the predetermined number of times (for example, three times). More than the reach effect may be determined or the SP reach effect or more may be determined by the change. In addition, although the continuous advance notice effect is executed only under the condition that it is determined that a plurality of change effects are to be executed, the continuous advance notice effect is also executed under the condition that only one change effect (the change) is executed. It may be done.

(Icon change notice judgment processing of effect control board)
The icon change advance notice determination process of the effect control board 102 will be described with reference to FIG.

  In step S1303-19-1, the sub CPU 102a is currently in an icon change advance notice prohibition period, specifically, during a big hit game, during SP / SPSP reach effect, a predetermined time after the variation display of the special symbol is started (for example, , A period of 3 seconds), a period (for example, 10 seconds) before the predetermined time the stop display of the special symbol is performed, or the effect of changing the display mode of the icon has already been executed or has already been executed Determine if it is planned to do. The sub CPU 102a shifts the process to step S1303-19-5 if it determines that it is an icon change advance notice period, and it shifts the process to step S1303-19-2 if it determines that it is not an icon change advance notice period.

  In step S1303-19-2, the sub CPU 102a acquires a random number for icon change notice execution determination, and in step S1303-19-3, determines the presence / absence of execution of the icon change notice and the type of icon change notice to be executed. The icon change notice determination table (see FIG. 50) is selected, and the icon change notice is made by collating the effect mode, the pre-determination result specified by the start opening winning combination designation command, the icon change notice execution determination random number etc. An icon change notice determination process is performed to make a determination. The details of the icon change advance notification determination table will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S1303-19-4, the sub CPU 102a determines whether the result of the icon change advance determination processing is not executing the icon change advance. The sub CPU 102a shifts the process to step S1303-19-5 if it determines that the icon change advance notice is not executed, and shifts the process to step S1303-19-6 if it determines that the icon change advance advance is not not executed.

  In step S1303-19-5, the sub CPU 102a determines an icon display scenario for no icon change notice to cause the icon to be displayed in the normal mode during the period until the fluctuation effect ends, and proceeds to step S1303-19-22. Transfer the process to

  In step S1303-19-6, the sub CPU 102a determines whether the result of the icon change advance determination processing is to execute normal change advance without change effect (action effect) by a predetermined character. The sub CPU 102a shifts the processing to step S1303-19-7 if it determines that the normal change notification is to be executed, and shifts the processing to step S1303-19-10 if it determines that the normal change notification is not to be executed.

  In step S1303-19-7, sub CPU 102a acquires a random number for icon final display mode determination for normal change notification, and in step S1303-19-8, a normal change notification according to the current gaming state (effect mode). Select the icon final display form judgment table (see Figure 51 or 52) for the pre-judgment result specified by the start opening winning combination designation command, and the number of special figure reservations corresponding to the type of special symbol to be notified The icon final display mode, which is the final display mode of the icon, by collating the first special view reservation number or the second special view reservation number) with the icon final display mode determination random number etc. Icon display mode scenario judgment TBL. Used for selecting the icon display mode scenario judgment table. Decide No. The icon final display mode determination table for normal change advance notice will be described later with reference to FIGS. 51 and 52.

  In step S1303-19-9, sub CPU 102a selects the icon display mode scenario determination table (see FIG. 53) for normal change advance notice, and performs icon display mode scenario determination TBL. The icon display mode scenario for normal change notification is determined by collating No and the like, and the process proceeds to step S1303-19-22. The icon display mode scenario determination table for normal change advance notice will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S1303-19-10, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the result of the icon change advance determination processing is execution of a throwing kiss advance. The sub CPU 102a shifts the processing to step S1303-19-11 when determining that the throwing kiss announcement is to be executed, and shifts the processing to step S1303-19-14 when determining that the throwing kiss announcement is not to be executed.

  A throwing kiss notice is constituted by a pending icon change notice and / or a changing icon change notice, and the display mode of the icon is changed by the throwing kiss (the action of skipping the heart) by the throwing kiss character, and the jackpot corresponding to the icon It is a notice effect of whether or not to improve the jackpot expectation of the determination (special symbol lottery) (so-called, whether or not to increase the chance), and is a kind of advance notice effect performed based on the pre-judgment result. In the throwing kiss announcement, since the action presentation (change presentation) acting on the icon is performed by the throwing kiss character, it can be said that the presentation is longer in the presentation period (time) than the normal presentation of the change.

  In step S1303-19-11, the sub CPU 102a acquires a random number for icon final display mode determination for throwing kiss notice, and in step S1303-19-12, throwing kiss notice according to the current gaming state (effect mode). The icon final display mode determination table (see FIG. 51) is selected, and the prior determination result specified by the starting opening prize designation command, the first special drawing reservation number corresponding to the first special symbol, and the icon final display mode The icon display mode and scenario judgment TBL.5 used when selecting the final display mode of the icon, which is the final display mode of the icon by collating the judgment random number etc. and the icon display mode and scenario judgment table for throwing kiss notice described later. Decide No. An icon final display mode determination table for throwing kiss notice will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S1303-19-13, sub CPU 102a selects the icon display mode scenario determination table (see FIG. 54) for throwing kiss notice, and performs icon display mode scenario determination TBL. No. etc. are collated to determine the icon display mode scenario for throwing kiss notice, and the process moves to step S1303-19-22. The icon display mode scenario determination table for throwing kiss notice will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S1303-19-14, the sub CPU 102a determines whether the result of the icon change advance determination processing is execution of a handshake meeting advance. The sub CPU 102a shifts the processing to step S1303-19-15 when determining that the handshake notification is to be executed, and ends the icon change preview determination processing when determining that the handshake notification is not performed.

  The handshake event advance notice is constituted by the pending icon change advance notice and the fluctuating icon change advance notice, and is a handshake target character and the handshake action appearing in the vicinity of the fluctuating icon display area 142 which is the notice target icon displayed in the fourth special mode 1 In response to the appearance of a predetermined line while shaking hands with the meeting character, the display mode (color) of the shaking hands main character is gradually changed, and a jackpot expectation of a jackpot determination (special symbol lottery) corresponding to the icon It is a notice effect of whether or not to improve the degree (so-called, whether or not to increase the chance), and is a kind of advance notice effect performed on the basis of the preliminary determination result. In the handshake meeting advance, since the action presentation (change presentation) acting on the handshake meeting main character (the changing icon) is performed by the handshake meeting character, it can be said that the presentation is longer in the presentation period (time) than the normal change announcement.

  It should be noted that the display mode (color) of the handshake party main character is not determined to change just because a predetermined line has appeared in the handshake party advance notice, but the display mode (color) of the handshake party main character is completely changed. There are cases where the change in the display mode (color) succeeds, and in the middle of the change in the display mode (color), the display mode returns to the original display mode and the change in the display mode fails.

  In addition, the number of times of speech appearance (hereinafter referred to as "line number of times") in one handshake meeting advance notice is set plurally. In the present embodiment, the number of speech times is set to one of four times.

  In addition, in conjunction with the notice of a handshake meeting, a handshake notice notification suggestion effect is provided. The handshake meeting advance notice suggestive effect is an effect that suggests that a handshake meeting advance notice is to be executed. The handshake meeting notice suggestion effect, the decision to execute the handshake meeting notice, until the handshake meeting notice is started, for the execution of the handshake meeting notice, the pending icon for the handshake meeting notice target fourth special It is executed by displaying the handshake meeting advance notice non-target changing in motion icon in the fourth special mode 3 and displaying the handshake start notice non-target pending icon in the fourth special mode 4 while displaying it in the second mode.

  In step S1303-19-15, the sub CPU 102a acquires a random number for icon final display mode determination for handshake meeting advance notice, and in step S1303-19-16, displays an icon final display mode decision table for handshake forward notice (FIG. 55). Select the icon) and compare the pre-decision result specified by the starting opening winning combination designation command, the number of first special drawing reservations corresponding to the first special symbol, and the icon final display mode judgment random number etc. The final display mode of the icons and the final color pattern described later are determined. The icon final display mode determination table for handshake party advance notice will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S1303-19-17, the sub CPU 102a acquires a speech number determination random number, and in step S1303-19-18 selects the speech number determination table (see FIG. 56) for performing the speech number determination, and the final The number of speech for notice of the handshake meeting is determined by collating the color pattern and the random number for judging the number of speech. The speech frequency determination table will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S1303-19-19, the sub CPU 102a selects the icon display mode scenario determination TBL determination table (see FIG. 57) for notice of handshake meeting, and collates the final color pattern with the number of serifs for notice of handshake meeting. The icon display mode scenario determination table No. of is determined. The icon display mode scenario determination TBL determination table for handshake meeting advance notice will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S1303-19-20, the sub CPU 102a acquires a random number for icon display mode scenario determination for handshake meeting advance notice, and in step S1303-19-21, displays an icon display mode scenario decision table for handshake start notice (FIG. 58). Refer to) and compare the icon display mode for judging a handshake meeting notice with a scenario judgment random number or the like to determine an icon display mode scenario for a shaking picture meeting notice. The icon display mode scenario determination table for handshake meeting advance notice will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S1303-19-22, the sub CPU 102a determines the icon display mode scenario determined in the process of step S1303-19-5, step S1303-19-9, step S1303-19-13, and step S1303-19-21. Are stored in the icon display mode scenario area of the sub RAM 102c, and the icon change advance notice determination process is ended.

◆ (Icon change notice judgment table)
FIG. 50 is a diagram showing an icon change notice determination table which is referred to when determining whether or not the icon change notice is to be executed and the type of icon change notice to be executed.

  In the icon change notice determination table shown in FIG. 50, the effect mode (playing state), the predetermination result specified by the start opening winning combination designation command, the selection rate (%) by the icon change notice execution determination random number, and selection The types of icon change notices to be made are uniquely associated with each other and stored.

  As a first feature of the icon change advance notice determination table shown in FIG. 50, in the normal gaming state (effect mode A), a normal change notice (normally hold change effect) without an action effect (change effect), and a throw with an action effect While 3 types of kiss notice and handshake notice (special hold change production) are set to be executed, in high probability / low probability time short game state (production mode B, C), throwing kiss notice and handshake There is a point that it is set so that only the change notice is usually carried out without the meeting notice being carried out. In this way, in the high probability / low probability time short gaming state in which the variation time tends to be shorter than in the normal gaming state, the presentation time for the throwing kiss notice and the handshake party notice can not be sufficiently secured, and the staging effect is reduced It is possible to prevent the game from ending up, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In the high probability / low probability time short game state (effect mode B, C), at least one of the throwing kiss notice and the handshake party notice is executed at a rate lower than the execution rate in the normal game state (effect mode A). It is also good. Even in this case, the same effect as described above can be obtained.

  Furthermore, at least one of the throwing kiss notice and the handshake notice may be executed at a rate lower than the execution rate in the normal gaming state only in one of the high probability time short gaming state and the low probability time short gaming state. Even in this case, the same effect as described above can be obtained.

  In addition, when at least one of the throwing kiss notice and the handshake meeting notice is performed in at least one of the high probability time short game state and the low precision time short game state, the fluctuation time tends to be long because there is no waiting display. The icon during fluctuation may be executed only during the fluctuation display (variation effect) of the second special symbol being executed when the special drawing reservation number is “0”. In this way, it is possible to secure the presentation time of the throwing kiss notice and the handshake party notice, so it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the high probability / low probability time short game state.

  In addition, when executing at least one of the throwing kiss notice and the handshake party notice in the high probability time short game state and the low probability time short game state, the execution ratio is made different between the high probability time short game state and the low probability time short game state ( For example, high probability time short> low probability time short, high probability time short <low probability time short)). In this way, the player is less likely to get bored by the different execution modes of the icon change notice for each gaming state, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In addition, when executing throwing kiss notice or handshake party notice (special hold change presentation) in the high probability time short game state or the low precision time short game state, the production mode (the production time is short or appearance different from the normal game state) Character or its motion may be different), or in a high probability short game state or a low probability time short game state, a special hold change effect of a type different from the normal game state (the effect time may be short, The appearing character or its action may be different). Furthermore, different types of special hold change effects may be executed in the normal gaming state, the high probability time short gaming state, and the low probability time short gaming state.

  As a second feature of the icon change advance notice determination table shown in FIG. 50, the high probability / low probability time short game state (effect mode B, C) than the ratio at which the normal change notice is executed in the normal game state (effect mode A). In the above, the rate at which a change forecast is usually executed is high. By doing this, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the high probability / low probability time short gaming state in which the fluctuation time is likely to be shorter than in the normal gaming state (the reach effect is hard to occur).

  It should be noted that the ratio at which the normal change notice is executed between the high probability time short gaming state and the low probability time short gaming state may be made different while being higher than the normal gaming state, and even in this case, the same effect as above It is possible to play

  Also, although the execution ratio of the normal change notice, the throwing kiss notice and the handshake notice in the normal gaming state is the same, the execution ratio of the throwing kiss notice and the handshake notice is higher than the execution rate of the normal change notice. It may be set to, or the execution ratio of the throwing kiss notice and the handshake meeting notice may be different. In this way, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game in the normal gaming state, in which the variation time tends to be longer than in the high probability / low probability time minor gaming state.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the effect presentation (change presentation) is performed during the 1 variable display for the icon change notice (the throwing kiss notice, the handshake meeting notice) accompanied with the action presentation (the change presentation). The effect presentation may be performed across the display, or both of the icon change announcement for performing the action presentation during one variation display and the icon change announcement for performing the action presentation across a plurality of variation displays may be executed. May be

  In that case, it is preferable to set the execution ratio in the high probability / low probability time short gaming state lower than that in the normal gaming state for the icon change notice in which the effect presentation (change presentation) is executed during the variable display of 1. In addition, with regard to the icon change notice for executing change effects over a plurality of variable displays, the execution ratio in the normal gaming state and the high probability / low probability time short gaming state may be the same, or the high probability / low probability time short game The execution ratio in the normal gaming state may be higher than the state, or the execution ratio in the high probability / low probability time short gaming state may be higher than the normal gaming state.

(Icon final display form judgment table for normal change notice in the normal game state)
FIG. 51 is a diagram showing an icon final display mode determination table for a normal change notice in the normal game state. FIG. 51 also doubles as an icon final display mode determination table for throwing kisses' notice.

  In the icon final display mode determination table for the regular change notice in the normal gaming state shown in FIG. 51, the preliminary determination result specified by the start opening winning a prize designation command, the current first special figure reserve number, and the normal change The selection rate (%) of the icon final display mode determination random number, the type (seven types) of the icon final display mode for the normal change to be selected, and the icon display mode scenario determination TBL. No is uniquely associated with and stored.

  Therefore, when the sub CPU 102a determines the icon final display mode determination for normal change advance notice, the preliminary determination result indicated by the starting opening winning combination designation command which is the target of the main starting opening winning combination process stored in the sub RAM 102c. And the number of the first starting opening winning a prize specified command which is remembered in the 1st production information reservation storage territory of sub RAM102c is referred to.

(Icon final display mode judgment table for notice of normal change during the short time game state)
FIG. 52 is a diagram showing an icon final display mode determination table for notice of change during normal (high / low probability) time gaming state.

  In the icon final display mode determination table for the regular change notice in the short time game state shown in FIG. 52, the preliminary determination result specified by the start opening winning a prize designation command, the current second special view reserve number, and the normal change The selection rate (%) based on the icon final display mode determination random number, the type of the icon final display mode for normal change to be selected (five types smaller than in the normal gaming state), and the icon display mode scenario determination TBL. No is uniquely associated with and stored.

  Therefore, when the sub CPU 102a determines the icon final display mode determination for normal change advance notice, the preliminary determination result indicated by the starting opening winning combination designation command which is the target of the main starting opening winning combination process stored in the sub RAM 102c. And the number of the second starting opening winning a prize specified command which is remembered in the 2nd effect information reservation storage territory of sub RAM102c is referred to.

  As a first feature of the icon final display form determination table for the regular change notice in the normal gaming state shown in FIG. 51, the icon final display aspect determination table for the normal change in the short time gaming state shown in FIG. There is a point that the number of types of final display modes is increasing. By doing this, the player is less likely to get bored with the normal change notice in the normal gaming state in which the stay period is likely to be longer than the short time gaming state, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  As a first feature of the icon final display mode determination table for the regular change notice in the short time game state shown in FIG. 52, the icon final display mode determination table for the normal change in the normal game state shown in FIG. Although the type of the final display mode is reduced, there is a display mode in which the player is notified of the preliminary determination result more specifically (it is easy for the player to immediately grasp the notification content). By doing this, it becomes easy to grasp the notice content of the normal change notice in the short time game state in which the fluctuation time tends to be shorter than the normal game state, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, when the 2nd special mode 22 (superheat) is selected as an icon final display mode, it is constituted so that reach production by a specific production design (for example, "7") may be generated in object variation production concerned. May be In this way, the player's expectation for the type of final display mode of the icons can be effectively enhanced, and the interest of the game can be improved.

(Icon display mode scenario judgment table for notice of normal change during normal gaming state)
FIG. 53 is a diagram showing an example of the icon display mode scenario determination table for the normal change notice in the normal gaming state.

  In the icon final display mode determination table for normal change notification in the normal gaming state shown in FIG. 53, an icon display mode scenario determination TBL. For normal change notification associated with the icon final display mode for normal change notification. No, selected normal change notice icon display mode scenario, effect contents of the normal change notice icon display mode scenario are uniquely associated, as an icon final display mode as a remarks, by the first starting opening winning combination designation command The identified prior determination result is stored.

  "When winning a prize," "2 before fluctuation → 1 before fluctuation", "1 before fluctuation", "1 before fluctuation → said fluctuation" and "the fluctuation" , Represents the timing at which the icon display mode changes.

  For example, in the icon display mode scenario "70" for the regular change advance notice, the hold icon of the second special mode is displayed at the time of winning, and the fluctuation display of the special symbol that is two previous to the fluctuation is finished When the variation display of the special symbol is started, the display mode of the hold icon changes to the second special mode 11, and in the change display of the special symbol one before, the display mode of the hold icon is the second in the throwing kiss notice. It is effect content in which the display mode of the holding icon changes to the second special mode 13 when changing to the special mode 12 and the fluctuation is started after the fluctuation display of the previous special symbol is finished.

(Icon display mode scenario judgment table for throwing kiss notice in the normal game state)
FIG. 54 is a diagram showing an example of an icon display mode scenario determination table for a tossed kiss notice in the normal game state.

  In the icon display mode scenario judgment table for throwing kiss notice in the normal gaming state shown in FIG. 54, an icon display mode scenario judgment TBL. For throwing kiss notice corresponding to the icon final display mode for throwing kiss notice. No, an icon display mode scenario for throwing kiss notice selected at a predetermined selection rate, an effect display content of an icon display mode scenario for throwing kiss notice are uniquely associated, and an icon final display mode as a remark, first start The preliminary determination result specified by the mouth prize designation command is stored.

  "When winning a prize" in the column of the effect contents of the icon display mode scenario for throwing kiss notice, "2 before fluctuation → 1 before fluctuation", "1 before fluctuation", "1 before fluctuation → said fluctuation" and "the fluctuation" are , Represents the timing at which the icon display mode changes.

  Further, “Tossing Kiss Notice Success” indicates that a tossing kiss notice to be described later is performed, and the display mode of the hold icon or the change icon changes. Further, “Tossing Kiss Notice Failure 1” indicates that a tossing kiss notice to be described later is performed, but the display mode of the hold icon or the variation icon does not change. Furthermore, “Tossing Kiss Notice 2” indicates that a tossing kiss notice to be described later is to be made, but the tossing kiss notice is not executed.

  Also, in the parenthesis following “throwing kiss preview success”, the display mode of the holding icon or the variation icon that changes according to the throwing kiss preview is shown.

  For example, in the icon display mode scenario "73" for throwing kiss notice, the hold icon of the normal mode is displayed at the time of winning, and the display mode of the hold icon in the throwing kiss notice in the variation display of the special symbol one before the change. Is going to change to the second special mode 11, but the change ends in failure, and remains in the normal mode, and is suspended when the fluctuation display of the previous special symbol is finished and then the fluctuation is started, The display mode of the icon is changed to the second special mode 12, and the display mode of the changing icon is changed to the second special mode 13 at the notice of the throwing kiss in the variation.

(Icon final display mode judgment table for handshake meeting notice)
FIG. 55 is a diagram showing an example of an icon final display mode determination table for handshake party advance notice.

  In the icon final display mode determination table for handshake party advance notice shown in FIG. 55, the preliminary decision result specified by the first start opening prize winning designation command, the first special view reserve number, and the icon final display for handshake party advance notice The selection rate (%) based on the mode determination random number, the icon final display mode to be selected, and the final color pattern corresponding to the icon final display mode are uniquely associated and stored.

  The final color pattern is used when selecting the line number determination table used in the line number determination described above, and the preliminary determination result indicated by the start opening winning combination designation command according to the processing of this start opening winning, the first special drawing reserve number And the icon final display mode is identification information associated with each other.

(Line count judgment table for handshake meeting notice)
FIG. 56 is a diagram showing a speech number determination table for handshake party advance notice.

  The final color pattern, the selection rate (%) by the random number for judging the number of speech, and the number of speech to be selected are uniquely associated with each other in the speech number judgment table for notice of handshake meeting shown in FIG. The prior determination result specified by the first starting opening winning combination designation command and the color of the icon are stored.

  The number of lines is set to 1 to 4, and the larger the number of lines, the higher the rate at which the icon changes. Therefore, the degree of expectation of the jackpot according to the number of lines is once a line <2 times a line < The line 3 times <the line 4 times.

(Icon display mode scenario judgment TBL decision table for handshake meeting advance notice)
FIG. 57 is a diagram showing an icon display mode scenario determination TBL determination table for handshake meeting advance notice.

  In the icon display mode scenario determination TBL determination table for handshake party advance notice shown in FIG. 57, the final color pattern, the number of speeches, and the icon display mode scenario decision TBL. No is uniquely associated with and stored.

  Icon display mode scenario judgment TBL. "No" is identification information for selecting an icon display mode scenario determination table (see FIG. 58) for handshake meeting advance notice used in icon display mode scenario determination for handshake meeting advance notice.

(Icon display mode scenario judgment table for handshake meeting advance notice)
FIG. 58 is a diagram showing an example of an icon display mode scenario determination table for handshake party advance notice.

  In the icon display mode scenario determination table for handshake party notice shown in FIG. 58, an icon display mode scenario decision TBL. No, the icon display scenario for notice of handshake meeting selected by random number for icon presentation for scenario notice and the display content of icon display scenario for notice of handshake meeting are uniquely associated As the remarks, the number of words, the icon final display mode, and the prior determination result specified by the first starting opening winning combination designation command are stored.

  "At the time of winning" described in the effect contents of the icon display mode scenario for the handshake meeting advance notice, "1 before the change → said change" and "the first (corresponding) (line)", "the second (corresponding) (line)" The “third line” and “the fourth line” indicate the timing at which the icon display mode is changed by the notice of the handshake meeting.

  As described above, the number of lines that can appear from a predetermined character in one handshake meeting advance notice is 1 to 4 times, and "the first (corresponding line)" indicates the appearance of the first speech in the handshake meeting advance notice. Represents the second appearance of the line in the handshake meeting advance notice, and the third related to the speech form indicates the third appearance of the speech in the handshake meeting advance, The (4th line) indicates the appearance of the 4th line in the notice of the handshake meeting.

  "White" for "when winning" indicates that the handshake party notice object pending icon is displayed in the fourth white special mode 21 when it is displayed at the time of winning. On the other hand, “white” for “1 before change → that change” is that during the winning, the handshake meeting notice target pending icon displayed in the normal mode is shifted to the changing icon display area 142 and the shake meeting notice target changing When becoming an icon, it indicates that the icon during the handshake event advance notice changing is displayed in the fourth special aspect 11 in white.

  In addition, "~ Succeeded success" means that the change to the color that applies to "~" of the "Succeeded success" is successful, and "Failed to Succeed" means "-~ of Succeeded Succeeded". It means that the change to the color that applies to “” fails, specifically, it tries to change to the color that applies to “to”, but returns to the color before the change in the middle of the change. In the present embodiment, the color change is performed from the lower end to the upper end of the handshake party notice main character.

  For example, in the icon display mode scenario "120" for notice of handshake meeting, the handshake meeting advance notice target pending icon of the fourth special mode 21 (the part of the person is white) is displayed at the time of winning, When it is shifted to the fluctuating icon display area 142 and becomes a handshake meeting notice target fluctuating icon, it becomes a handshake meeting notice subject fluctuating icon of the fourth special mode 11 (the handshake meeting main character is white), Triggered by the appearance of the first line, the color of the handshake meeting protagonist changes to green after the hail presentation of whether or not the color of the handshake meeting protagonist of the icon of the handshake meeting preview object is changing to green is performed, Triggered by the appearance of the second line, the handshake party protagonist's color changes to red after the pitching effect of whether or not the color of the handshake party main body changes to red, and is triggered by the appearance of the third line To the handshake partner The color of the handshake meeting main character changes to the zebra pattern after the turn production of whether or not the color of the color changes to the zebra pattern, and the color of the handshake meeting main character becomes iridescent triggered by the appearance of the fourth dialog It represents the contents of the presentation in which the color of the handshake meeting main character changes to iridescent after the change production of whether it changes or not is performed.

  In addition, the icon display scenario “122” for notice of handshake meeting notices that the handshake meeting notice target pending icon of the fourth special mode 21 (the part of the person is white) is displayed at the time of winning, the said handshake meeting notice target pending icon When it is shifted to the fluctuating icon display area 142 and becomes a handshake meeting notice target fluctuating icon, it becomes a handshake meeting notice target fluctuating icon of the fourth special mode 12 (the handshake meeting protagonist is green), Triggered by the appearance of the first dialogue, the handshake party protagonist's color changes to red after the pitching effect of whether or not the color of the handshake meeting hero changes to red, and the second appearance of the dialogue is triggered Then, after the pitching production of whether or not the color of the handshake party main character changes to the zebra pattern is performed, the color of the handshake association main character returns to red without changing to the zebra pattern, triggered by the appearance of the third line , The color of the handshake party main character After being turned to a bra pattern, it turns red without changing to a zebra pattern, and the color of the main character of the handshake event changes to iridescent, triggered by the appearance of the fourth dialogue. It represents the contents of the presentation in which the color of the handshake meeting main character changes to rainbow after the ghost production is performed.

(Pending control information update process of effect control board)
The hold information update process of the effect control board 102 will be described with reference to FIG.

  In step S1305-1, sub CPU102a confirms the current number of special drawing reservations stored in the effect information suspension storage area of sub RAM 102c, and in step S1305-2, in response to the special symbol storage specification command, the first special The figure holding number (U1) or the second special drawing holding number (U2) is updated.

  In step S1305-3, sub CPU 102a determines whether the number of special map reservations (U1, U2) has decreased before and after updating, and if it is determined that the number of special map reservations has decreased, to step S1305-4. If it is determined that the number of to-be- reserved special drawings has not decreased, the process proceeds to step S1305-8 as the number of to-be- reserved special drawings increases.

  The sub CPU 102a shifts various effect information stored in each storage unit of the effect information hold storage area corresponding to the type of the reduced number of special view hold (starting opening) among the effect information hold storage area of the sub RAM 102c. .

  Specifically, the effect information (data) stored in the first to fourth storage units is shifted to the immediately preceding storage unit. For example, various types of effect information stored in the fourth storage unit of the first effect information suspension storage area are shifted to the third storage unit of the first effect information suspension storage area. In addition, the effect information stored in the first storage unit of the first effect information pending storage area is shared with the first effect information pending storage area and the second effect information pending storage area. Shift to the As a result, the effect information stored in the storage area is deleted.

  In step S1305-5, the sub CPU 102a performs a pending icon shift control command (first pending display shift control command or second pending display shift control command) indicating the type of the reduced number of special views pending (starting opening) in the sub RAM 102c. Set in the send buffer.

  The pending icon shift control command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 in the data output process of step S1900. When the image control board 105 receives the hold icon shift control command, the image control board 105 performs shift processing for shifting the hold icon associated with the starting opening indicated by the received hold icon shift control command toward the fluctuating icon display area 142.

  In step S1305-6, the sub CPU 102a confirms the icon display mode scenario stored in the effect information suspension storage area of the sub RAM 102c, shifts the suspension icon to be performed from now on with the icon being displayed (execution of variation presentation According to), it is determined whether there is an icon that changes the display mode (executes pending icon change notification), and if it is determined that there is an icon that changes the display mode, the process proceeds to step S1305-7. If it is determined that there is no icon for changing the display mode, this pending information update process is ended.

  In step S1305-7, the sub CPU 102a sets, in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c, an icon change control command indicating the contents of change according to the icon display mode scenario related to the icon whose display mode is to be changed. Here, the “content of change according to the icon display mode scenario” includes an icon for which the display mode is to be changed and a display mode to be changed.

  The icon change control command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 in the data output process of step S1900. When receiving the icon shift control command, the image control board 105 changes the display mode of the icon according to the icon display mode scenario indicated by the received icon change control command together with the shift of the hold icon related to the hold icon shift process.

  In step S1305-8, the sub CPU 102a adds the suspension icon based on the increase in the number of special map reservations, and adds the suspension icon addition control command indicating the type of the increased number of special diagrams reservations (starting opening) to the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c. Set and complete this pending information update process.

  The pending icon addition control command set in the transmission buffer is sent to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 in the data output process of step S1900. When the image control board 105 receives the hold icon addition control command, the image control board 105 additionally displays a hold icon corresponding to the starting opening indicated by the received hold addition control command.

  Since the icon effect control command indicating the icon display mode scenario is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by executing the process of step S1303-20 described above, the icon change in this hold information update process The icon change notice may be executed by the image control board 105 without sending a control command.

(Processing process setting process of production control board)
Next, with reference to FIG. 64, an effect mode setting process by the effect control board 102 will be described.

  In step S1308-1, the sub CPU 102a selects the effect mode determination table (see FIG. 65) for setting the effect mode, and in step S1308-2, the gaming state stored in the sub RAM 102c, the number of remaining time saving, high Check the number of remaining probabilities.

  The effect mode determination table shown in FIG. 65 is a table for determining the effect mode, and gaming state (low probability gaming state, high probability gaming state, non time saving gaming state, time saving gaming state), time remaining count, high probability The remaining number, presentation mode, presentation mode flag are associated.

  In step S1308-3, the sub CPU 102a determines the effect mode by collating the gaming state, the number of time remaining, and the high probability remaining number in the selected effect mode setting table, and determines the effect mode determined in step S1308-4. The corresponding effect mode flags "00H" to "04H" are set (stored) in the effect mode flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c, and the effect mode setting process is ended.

(Process of determining the display pattern stop of the presentation control board)
Next, with reference to FIG. 66, the effect symbol stop display pattern determination process by the effect control board 102 will be described.

  In step S1310-1, the sub CPU 102a analyzes the received effect symbol designation command, and in step S1310-2, determines whether or not the special figure lottery (big hit determination) result is a loss. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the special figure lottery (big hit determination) result is a loss, the process proceeds to step S1310-3, and if it is determined that the special figure lottery (big hit determination) result is not a loss, the process proceeds to step S1310-15. .

  In step S1310-3, the sub CPU 102a refers to the effect information in the sub RAM 102c or the effect information pending storage area to confirm the chance eye advance notice effect scenario in step S1310-3, and in step S1310-4, the chance for the fluctuation effect starting from now It is determined whether or not to execute the eye preview effect. The sub CPU 102a shifts the process to step S1310-5 when it is determined that the chance eye advance notice effect is to be executed, and shifts the process to step S1310-9 when it is determined that the chance eye advance notice effect is not to be executed.

  In step S1310-5, the sub CPU 102a selects the effect symbol stop display pattern determination table (see FIG. 67 (a)) for the advance notice for the chance eye, and in step S1310-6, the effect pattern stop display for the advance notice for the chance eye Determine the pattern.

  As shown in FIG. 67 (a), in the effect pattern stop display pattern determination table for the chance eye notice, the types of the current chance eyes specified by the chance eye notice effect scenario, the effect pattern stop display pattern, and each effect The selection rate (%) of the symbol stop display pattern is uniquely associated and stored.

  For example, if the type of the chance eye of this time is a blue pattern, a combination of a plurality of types of effect patterns whose color is set to blue as the effect pattern stop display pattern ("2" "4" "6" or "6" " Any one of 4 "and" 2 ") will be determined at a predetermined selectivity.

  In step S1310-7, the sub CPU 102a sets (stores) the effect symbol stop display pattern data corresponding to the determined effect symbol stop display pattern in the effect symbol stop display pattern data storage area of the sub RAM 102c.

  In step S1310-8, the sub CPU 102a sets the effect symbol stop display control command for the chance eye preview effect corresponding to the determined effect symbol stop display pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c, and the main effect symbol stop display pattern determination process Finish.

  In step S 1310-9, sub CPU 102 a refers to the presentation information relevant storage area or presentation information suspension storage area of sub RAM 102 c to confirm the pre-reading zone presentation scenario, and in step S 1310-10, in zone effects in the variation presentation to be started from now It is determined whether to execute the effect. If it is determined that the zone turning effect is to be executed, the sub CPU 102a shifts the processing to step S1310-1, and if it is determined that the zone turning effect is not to be executed, it shifts the processing to step S1310-15.

  In step S1310-1, the sub CPU 102a selects the effect symbol stop display pattern determination table (see FIG. 67 (b)) for zone effect, and in step S1310-12, the effect symbol stop display pattern for zone effect Decide.

  As shown in FIG. 67 (b), in the effect symbol stop display pattern determination table for zone effect, there are various types of effect effects defined by the zone precursor effect scenario, a plurality of effect symbol stop display patterns, and each effect symbol. The selection ratio (%) of the stop display pattern is uniquely associated and stored.

  For example, if the type of this turning effect is a turning success effect, the “pre-reading” symbol, the “rush” symbol, and the “zone” symbol combination (special symbol match) at the selection ratio of 100% as the effect symbol stop display pattern It will be decided. In addition, if the type of this turning effect is a turning failure effect 1, "pre-reading" symbol, "1 (green)" symbol, combination of "zone" symbols or "pre-reading" symbol, "5" as a producing symbol stop display pattern The combination of "(green)" symbol and "zone" symbol is to be determined with 50% selectivity.

  In step S1310-13, the sub CPU 102a sets (stores) the effect symbol stop display pattern data corresponding to the determined effect symbol stop display pattern in the effect symbol stop display pattern data storage area of the sub RAM 102c.

  In step S1310-14, the sub CPU 102a sets the effect symbol stop display control command for zone turning effect corresponding to the determined effect symbol stop display pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c, and performs this effect symbol stop display pattern determination process. finish.

  In step S1310-15, sub CPU 102a refers to the effect mode flag stored in the effect mode flag storage area of sub RAM 102c to confirm the current effect mode, and in step S1310-16 corresponds to the effect mode. The effect pattern stop display pattern determination table for normal use (see, for example, FIG. 67C) is selected, and the normal effect pattern stop display pattern is determined in step S1310-17.

  As shown in FIG. 67 (c), in the effect pattern stop display pattern determination table for normal according to the effect mode, a effect symbol specification command, a special figure lottery result, and a plurality of types of normal effect pattern stop display patterns The selection rate (%) of each normal effect pattern stop display pattern is uniquely associated with each other and stored.

  In step S1310-18, the sub CPU 102a sets (stores) the normal effect symbol stop display pattern data corresponding to the determined normal effect symbol stop display pattern in the effect symbol stop display pattern data storage area of the sub RAM 102c.

  In step S1310-19, sub CPU 102a sets a normal effect symbol stop display control command corresponding to the determined normal effect symbol stop display pattern in the transmission buffer of sub RAM 102c, and ends this effect symbol stop display pattern determination process. Do.

  The effect symbol stop display control command set in the transmission buffer in steps S1310-8, S1310-14, S1310-19, etc. described above is the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output process of step S1900. Sent to When the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 receive the effect symbol stop display control command, when the stop display of the special symbol is performed, the effect symbol based on the effect symbol stop display pattern indicated by the command is displayed on the image display device The stop display is made on the display unit 140 of FIG.

  Therefore, in the chance eye advance notice effect, for the left area, the center area, and the right side area of the display unit 140, the effect design according to the chance eye notice effect is stopped and displayed. Moreover, with respect to the turning success effect, the special symbol relating to the turning effect is stopped and displayed for the left area, the center area, and the right area of the display unit 140. Moreover, in the failure to produce effect 1 for the left and right regions of the display unit 140, the special symbol relating to the effect is stopped and displayed, and for the central region, the normal effect pattern relating to the effect is It will be displayed stopped. Moreover, in the failure to produce a turn 2, the special symbol relating to the turn toiment is stopped and displayed for the left side area of the display unit 140, and the normal effect pattern relating to the turn toiment effect is stopped for the central area and the right side area It will be displayed.

(Variation effect pattern determination process of effect control board)
The fluctuation effect pattern determination process by the effect control board 102 will be described using FIG.

  In step S1312-1, the effect mode flag stored in the effect mode flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c and the effect information of the sub RAM 102c are referred to the pre-read zone effect scenario data stored in the storage area, and the current effect mode and Confirm the read ahead zone presentation scenario.

  In step S 1312-2, a variation effect pattern determination table (see FIGS. 69 to 73) associated with the current effect mode and the prefetch zone effect scenario is selected. This is because the fluctuation effect pattern determination table for determining the effect content of the fluctuation effect is set in association with the effect mode (rendering modes A to C) and the pre-reading zone effect scenario.

  As shown in FIG. 69 to FIG. 73, in the variation effect pattern determination table associated with each effect mode, the selection result by the determination result of the big hit determination, the special figure variation pattern specification command, the random number for variation effect pattern determination %), The type of the selected fluctuation effect pattern, the fluctuation effect control command corresponding to the fluctuation effect pattern, the time of the fluctuation effect corresponding to the fluctuation effect pattern, and the contents of the fluctuation effect.

  The fluctuation effect pattern is an effect aspect of the fluctuation effect, and the image display device 14, the sound output device 15, the illumination device 16 for effect, the role device 17 for effect, and the feature device for movement are determined by determining the fluctuation effect pattern. The specific effect contents (aspect) of the fluctuation effect performed by the effect button device 18 will also be determined. For example, in the effect contents of the change production in the image display device 14, the aspect of the fluctuation display of the production design (presence or absence of pseudo continuous production), the presence or absence of reach production, the contents of reach production, component elements of fluctuation production such as presentation development configuration Are associated. The details of the variation presentation pattern determination table will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In step S1312-3, the sub CPU 102a confirms the special image fluctuation pattern designation command stored in the storage area of the effect information in the sub RAM 102c, and in step S1312 the random number counter related to the fluctuation effect pattern determination random number The random number value to be shown is acquired, and in step S1312-5, the variation presentation pattern determination table selected in step S1312-2 is compared with the determination result of the big hit determination, the special figure variation pattern specification command, and the variation presentation pattern determination random number. Determine the fluctuation presentation pattern.

  In step S1312-6, the sub CPU 102a sets a change effect control command corresponding to the determined change effect pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c, and in step S1312-7, the change effect time which is the effect time of the change effect The variation representation timer counter of the sub RAM 102c is set, and in step S1312-8, variation representation data corresponding to the variation representation pattern is set in the variation representation data storage area of the sub RAM 102c.

  The variation effect control command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output process of step S1900. Then, when the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 receive the fluctuation effect control command, the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 cause the effect device such as the image display device 14 to execute the fluctuation effect based on the fluctuation effect pattern indicated by the command.

  In addition, the fluctuation effect timer counter is subjected to subtraction processing every 4 ms in the above-mentioned step S1200. The sub CPU 102a can specify the remaining time of the variation effect, in other words, the time elapsed after the variation effect is started, by the variation effect timer counter.

(Variation production pattern judgment table)
69 to 73 are diagrams showing a variation presentation pattern determination table to be referred to when determining a variation presentation pattern. 69 to 71 are fluctuation effect pattern determination tables for effect mode A, FIG. 72 is a fluctuation effect pattern determination table for effect mode B, and FIG. 73 is a change effect pattern determination for effect mode C. It is a figure which shows a table.

  Of the variation effect pattern determination table for effect mode A, FIG. 69 is a table selected at the time of non-execution of zone precursor effect and pre-reading zone effect, and FIG. FIG. 70 (b) is a table selected at the time of execution, and FIG. 70 (b) is a table selected at the time of execution of zone turning failure effect 2; FIG. 70 (c) is a table selected at the time of execution of zone turning success effect FIG. 71 is a table selected during execution of the prefetch zone effect.

  Here, each term described in the effect contents of the fluctuation effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 69 to 73 will be described.

  "No simulated resemblance" means not to execute a simulated resemblance effect (it is expected to generate a simulated render) whether the simulated run symbol or the chance eye is temporarily stopped indicating the occurrence of the simulated render. . "Pseudo snarl failure" means that the pseudo roster effect is executed but the pseudo run symbol and the chance eye do not temporarily stop. The "pseudo-scoring success" means that the pseudo-scoring effect is executed and the simulated consecutive symbols and chance eyes are temporarily stopped. "Pseudo reunion" means that re-variation of the temporary stopped production pattern is executed.

  "Leach beat failure" means that reach beat production is performed whether reach production is performed or not, but reach production is not performed without reach being established. The "reach reach success" means that reach reach production is executed, reach is established, and reach production is executed.

  The “shortened fluctuation” means that a shortened fluctuation presentation is performed in which the presentation time (variation time) is shorter than the normal fluctuation (6 seconds or 8 seconds) and no reach occurs. The "ultra-shortening fluctuation" means that the ultra-shortening fluctuation presentation in which the rendering time (the fluctuation time) is shorter than the shortening fluctuation presentation (2 seconds or 4 seconds) and the reach is not generated.

  "N reach" means that normal reach production is performed. “N reach (transition effect)” indicates development to normal reach effect and SP reach effect and SPSP reach effect (executed in the process of developing to SP reach effect and SPSP reach effect) transition effect (development effect) Means to be performed. “N reach (transition / return effect)” means that normal reach effect and transition effect are executed but return effect is not executed to develop SP reach effect or SPSP reach effect.

  "SP reach 1" means that the first SP reach effect dedicated (specific) to the effect mode A (normal game state) is executed. “SP reach 2” means that a second SP reach effect dedicated (specific) to the effect mode A (normal game state) is executed. Note that the second SP reach effect is set so that the degree of expectation of the big hit (special game is executed) is higher than that of the first SP reach effect.

  “SP reach 3” means that the third SP reach effect dedicated (specific) is performed in the effect mode B (probable variation gaming state). “SP reach 4” means that the fourth SP reach effect dedicated (specific) is performed in the effect mode B (probable variation gaming state). Note that the fourth SP reach effect is set so that the degree of expectation of the big hit (special game is executed) is higher than that of the third SP reach effect.

  “SP reach 5” means that the fifth SP reach effect dedicated (specific) is performed in the effect mode C (low probability time short game state). “SP reach 6” means that the sixth SP reach effect dedicated (specific) is performed in the effect mode C (low probability time short game state). Note that the sixth SP reach effect is set so that the expectation of the big hit (special game is executed) is higher than that of the fifth SP reach effect.

  “SPSP reach 1” means that the first SPSP reach effect dedicated (specific) to the effect mode A (normal game state) is executed. “SPSP reach 2” means that the second SPSP reach effect dedicated (specific) to the effect mode A (normal game state) is executed. In addition, the second SPSP reach effect is set so that the degree of expectation of the big hit (special game is executed) becomes higher than the first SPSP reach effect.

  “SPSP reach 3” means that the third SPSP reach effect dedicated (specific) is performed in the effect mode B (probability change gaming state). The “SPSP reach 4” means that the fourth SPSP reach effect dedicated (specific) to the effect mode B (probability change gaming state) is executed. Note that the fourth SPSP reach effect is set so that the degree of expectation of the big hit (special game is executed) is higher than that of the third SPSP reach effect.

  The “SPSP reach 5” means that the fifth SPSP reach effect dedicated (specific) is performed in the effect mode C (low probability time short game state). “SPSP reach 6” means that the sixth SPSP reach effect dedicated (specific) is performed in the effect mode C (low probability time short game state). Note that the sixth SPSP reach effect is set so that the degree of expectation of the big hit (special game is executed) is higher than that of the fifth SPSP reach effect.

  “ST effect 1” means that the first step effect, which is the first step of the story effect consisting of a plurality of steps (steps), is performed on the display unit 140 of the image display device 14. The "ST effect 2" means that the second step effect, which is the second step of the story effect, is performed. "ST effect 3" means that the third step effect which is the final step of the story effect is executed.

  In addition, the story production has a high expectation that the jackpot is won by the step production progressing to the next and subsequent step production along with the temporary stop and re-variation (special production) of the production pattern in the pseudo-series production Suggestive (expecting the execution of a special game) It is an advance notice, and suggests that the degree of expectation that the special game is executed is higher than when the story effect is not executed (expecting the execution of the special game) It is a kind. Further, the expectation for winning the special game when each step effect of the story effect is executed is the first step effect <second step effect <third step effect.

  “Zone turning failure 1” means that a zone turning failure effect 1 is executed asking whether or not the pre-reading zone effect is to be executed. “Zone turning failure 2” means that a zone turning failure effect 2 is performed to ask whether or not the pre-reading zone effect is to be performed. The “zone-turn success” means that a zone-turn success effect for notifying (presence) that a pre-reading zone effect is to be performed is performed.

  The “zone effect” means that the first zone effect of the prefetch zone effect is performed on the display unit 140 of the image display device 14. The “thermal zone effect” means that the second zone effect of the pre-reading zone effect is performed on the display unit 140 of the image display device 14.

  In addition, pre-reading zone production is pre-reading announcement production which expects big hit winning by executing zone production over 1 or multiple fluctuation production (the fluctuation indication of the special symbol), expectation degree where special game is executed is It is a kind of indication effect that suggests high. Further, the expectation for winning the special game when each pre-reading zone effect is executed is the first zone effect <the second zone effect.

  As described above, the image display apparatus 14 is executed by setting a dedicated variation effect pattern in each variation effect pattern determination table or setting various effects to be performed at different rates. The effect mode of the variable effect is different for each effect mode (playing state). It should be noted that the types of the variation effect patterns executed in the normal gaming state and the probability variation gaming state may be the same, and the types of the variation effect patterns executed in the normal gaming state and the low probability time short gaming state may be the same. Alternatively, the types of variation effect patterns executed in the probability variation gaming state and the low probability time minor gaming state may be the same.

  As a first feature of the variation production pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 69, 72 and 73, if the presentation time (variation time) is the same variation presentation pattern, the simulation is more simulated than the variation presentation pattern in which the pseudo continuous presentation is not performed. The point is that the variation presentation pattern in which the series presentation is executed has a higher expectation (a special game is executed) in which the jackpot is won. By doing this, it is possible to boost the player's sense of expectation as to whether or not the pseudo-series effect is executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  As a second feature of the variation production pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 69, 72 and 73, if the presentation time (variation time) is the same variation presentation pattern, the pseudo-series production is executed without the story presentation. The point is that the expectation level of the jackpot (special game is executed) is higher in the fluctuation effect pattern in which the pseudo-series effect is executed with the story effect than the fluctuation effect pattern. By doing this, the player's sense of anticipation as to whether or not the pseudo-series effect involves a story effect can be enhanced, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  As a third feature of the variation production pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 69, 72 and 73, the transition presentation is executed after the story presentation (corresponding to the indication production) is executed as the variation presentation pattern, and the specific reach is achieved The first story simulated change effect pattern (corresponding to the first specific effect aspect) that develops into effect (SP / SPSP reach effect) and transition effect are executed after the story effect is executed, but return effect is executed There is a point in which a second story simulated change presentation pattern (corresponding to a second specific presentation mode) is set in which transition presentation is executed after returning to story presentation and develops into specific reach presentation. By doing this, it is possible to execute a novel fluctuation effect unlike before, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  As a fourth feature of the fluctuation production pattern determination table shown in FIG. 69, FIG. 72 and FIG. 73, the second story pseudo fluctuation presentation pattern is larger than the first story pseudo fluctuation presentation pattern and the special game is executed High expectations). By doing this, it is possible to stimulate the player's expectation for whether it is the first story simulated fluctuation presentation pattern or the second story simulated fluctuation presentation pattern when the story production is executed, and the fun of the game It is possible to improve the

  As a fifth feature of the fluctuation production pattern determination table shown in FIG. 69, FIG. 72 and FIG. 73, the story production that returns after the restoration production is performed in the second story pseudo fluctuation presentation pattern is the first before the execution of the transition production. Not the second step effect following the step effect but the third step effect (step skipping is performed across the transition effect) may be mentioned. By doing this, it is possible to clarify the difference between the first story simulated fluctuation presentation pattern and the second story simulated fluctuation presentation pattern, and to stimulate the player's expectation for the second story simulated fluctuation presentation pattern. It becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In the above-mentioned second story simulated fluctuation presentation pattern, the story presentation that returns after the return presentation is executed is set as the third step presentation, but it may be set as the second step presentation. Moreover, what performs 2nd step production after return production is performed is made into a 2nd story false change production pattern, and what executes 3rd step production after return production is executed is 3rd story pseudo change production pattern The expectation of the big hit in the case where each story pseudo fluctuation presentation pattern is executed (the special game is executed) is 1st story pseudo fluctuation presentation pattern <2nd story pseudo fluctuation production pattern <3rd story pseudo fluctuation production It may be a pattern. By doing this, it is possible to build up the player's sense of expectation as to whether or not the step skipping is performed across the return effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, SPSP reach production may be executed via SP reach production after transition production in each story pseudo fluctuation presentation pattern, or SPSP reach production without SP reach production after transition production. It may be performed. Also, although the story effect (indication effect effect) is performed in the change effect pattern with the execution of the pseudo continuous effect, it may be performed in the change effect pattern without the execution of the pseudo continuous effect.

  As a first feature of the change effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 71, a transition effect is executed after a zone effect (corresponding to a sign effect effect) is executed as a change effect pattern, and a specific reach effect (SP / SPSP reach) After the zone effect is executed, the transition effect is executed after the zone effect is executed, but the zone effect is restored by the return effect being executed. There is a point that a second zone simulated change presentation pattern (corresponding to a second specific presentation mode) is set after the transition presentation is executed and the specific reach presentation is developed. By doing this, it is possible to execute a novel fluctuation effect unlike before, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  As a second feature of the variation production pattern determination table shown in FIG. 71, the second zone pseudo variation presentation pattern is more likely to win a big hit (special game is executed) than the first zone pseudo variation presentation pattern described above. Is high. By doing this, when the pre-reading zone effect is executed, the player's expectation for whether it is the first zone pseudo change effect pattern or the second zone pseudo change effect pattern can be enhanced, and the game is It will be possible to improve the interest.

  As a third feature of the variation production pattern determination table shown in FIG. 71, the second zone pseudo variation presentation pattern has a higher probability of winning a big hit (a special game is executed) than the first zone pseudo variation presentation pattern. There is a point. By doing this, it is possible to stimulate the player's expectation for whether it is the first zone simulated change presentation pattern or the second zone simulated change presentation pattern when zone effects are executed, and the game is entertaining It is possible to improve the

  As a fourth feature of the fluctuation effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 71, transition effect is executed after the first zone effect is executed, but return effect is executed to return to the second zone effect, and then transition is made There is a point in which a third zone simulated change presentation pattern (corresponding to a third specific presentation mode) in which the presentation is executed and developed into a specific reach presentation is set. By doing this, it is possible to boost the player's sense of expectation as to whether or not the zone effect promotion is performed with the return effect interposed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  As a fifth feature of the fluctuation effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 71, the third zone pseudo fluctuation effect pattern has a higher probability of winning a big hit (a special game is executed) than the second zone pseudo fluctuation effect pattern. There is a point. By doing this, the player's sense of anticipation as to which of the first to third zone simulated change presentation patterns is realized when the zone presentation is executed can be enhanced, and the interest of the game can be improved. It becomes possible.

  In addition, in each zone false fluctuation production pattern, it is supposed that it shifts to SP reach production after transition production (development) and then transitions to SPSP reach production (development), but it does not go through SP reach production after transition production The transition to SPSP reach production may be made to In addition, although zone effects (indication effects) are performed in the change effect pattern involving the execution of the pseudo continuous effect, the zone effect (indication effect) may be performed in the variable effect pattern without the execution of the pseudo continuous effect.

  Also, although the zone precursor effect and the prefetch zone effect are not executed in the effect mode B (probability change gaming state) and the effect mode C (low probability time short game state), they are executed in the effect mode B and the effect mode C Alternatively, it may be executed in the effect mode B or the effect mode C.

  In addition, the execution probability of zone precursor effect and prefetch zone effect may be made different in each effect mode, for example, zone precursor effect and the effect mode for the player in order to eliminate the annoyance of the player. In order to lower the execution probability of the pre-reading zone effect (effect mode A> effect mode B, effect mode A> effect mode C, effect mode A> effect mode C> effect mode B, etc.), or vice versa In order to further increase the player's sense of expectation, the execution probability of zone precursor effect and prefetch zone effect increases as the effect mode becomes more advantageous to the player (effect mode A <effect mode B, effect mode A <effect Mode C, effect mode A <effect mode C <effect mode B, etc.).

  Furthermore, only the pre-read zone effect may be performed without performing the zone precursor effect in each effect mode, or the zone precursor effect and the pre-read zone effect may be performed in some of the effect modes, but in the other effect modes Only the pre-reading zone effect may be performed. Even in this case, the execution probability of the prefetch zone effect in each effect mode may be different as described above.

(Presence production judgment processing of production control board)
The precise effect determination processing of the effect control board 102 will be described with reference to FIG.

  In step S1313-1, the sub CPU 102a confirms the jackpot determination result and the variation effect pattern, and in step S1313 acquires a random value for determination effect pattern determination.

  In step S1313-3, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the current time is the short time gaming state (including the high probability short time and the low probability time short). If the sub CPU 102a determines that the time saving game mode is not set, the process proceeds to step S1313-4. If it is determined that the time saving game mode is set, the process proceeds to step S1313-5.

  In step S1313-4, the sub CPU 102a selects the precise effect pattern determination table 1 (see FIG. 75A), and shifts the processing to step S1313-6. In step S1313-5, the sub CPU 102a selects the precise effect pattern determination table 2 (see FIG. 75B), and shifts the processing to step S1313-6. The precise effect pattern determination table will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S1313-6, the sub CPU 102a determines a winning effect pattern by collating the selected winning effect pattern determination table with the jackpot determination result, the variation effect pattern, the random effect value for determining the positive effect pattern, and the like.

  In addition, the accurate effect pattern is an execution mode of the accurate effect that announces (indicates) that the result of the fluctuation display (variation effect) will be a big win, and a pattern in which the accurate effect is not executed, and the voice output device 15 There are a pattern in which the accurate effect is executed by the combination of the sound effect by the sound effect and the light emission effect by the illumination device 16 for effect and the handle illumination device 33, and a pattern in which the accurate effect is executed by the air effect by the air blower.

  In step S1313-7, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the determined accurate effect pattern is a precise effect execution pattern that is to execute the accurate effect. The sub CPU 102a shifts the processing to step S1313-8 if it determines that it is the accurate rendering execution pattern, and ends the true effect determination processing if it determines that it is not the accurate rendering execution pattern.

  In step S1313-8, the sub CPU 102a sets the accurate effect pattern command corresponding to the accurate effect execution pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c, and ends the accurate effect determination process.

  The accurate effect pattern command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output process of step S1900. When the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 receive the accurate effect pattern command, the lamp control substrate 104 and the image control substrate 105 cause the various effect devices to execute the accurate effect based on the accurate effect pattern indicated by the command at the timing based on the accurate effect pattern. .

(Present effect pattern determination table)
FIG. 75 (a) is a view showing the accurate effect pattern determination table 1 referred to in the normal gaming state, and FIG. 75 (b) is the accurate effect referenced in the high probability time short gaming state or the low probability time short gaming state It is a figure which shows the pattern determination table 2. FIG.

  In the accurate rendering pattern determination table shown in FIG. 75, the determination result of the jackpot, the variation effect pattern, the execution rate (%) of the accurate rendering by the random value for determining the accurate rendering pattern, and the selection ratio of the execution location of the accurate rendering The type of the selected accurate effect pattern to be selected is uniquely associated and stored.

  The execution place of this effect effect is the change start first frame at which the image of the first frame is displayed when the variable display of the effect pattern 70a is started by the image display device 14, and the reach effect is performed by the image display device 14 SP that is the timing at which the image of the first frame is displayed when the image of the first frame is displayed when the image of the SP reach effect is started by the image display device 14 is displayed. The SPSP reach start first frame, which is the timing at which the image of the first frame is displayed when the SPSP reach effect is started by the image display device 14, is set as the first reach start frame.

  The accurate effect pattern 0 is an accurate effect pattern in which the accurate effect is not executed, the accurate effect pattern 1 is an accurate effect pattern in which the accurate effect is executed in the first frame of the fluctuation start, and the accurate effect pattern 2 is a reach start 1 An accurate effect pattern in which the accurate effect is executed in the frame, an accurate effect pattern 3 is an accurate effect pattern in which the accurate effect is executed in the first frame of the SP reach start, and an accurate effect pattern 4 is the SPSP reach start 1 This is an accurate effect pattern in which the accurate effect is executed at the frame.

  Further, the accurate effect patterns 1A to 4A are the first accurate effect patterns configured by the light effect produced by the sound output device 15 and the light effect produced by the illumination device 16 for the effect and the handle illumination device 33, and the accurate effect pattern 1B to 4B are a second probability effect pattern configured by the air blowing effect performed by the air blower 34.

  As a first feature of the accurate effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 75, the accurate effect pattern is referred to with reference to the accurate effect pattern determination table 2 than in the case of determining the accurate effect pattern with reference to the accurate effect pattern determination table 1 There is a point that is set so that the execution rate of the accurate presentation is higher when it is determined.

  In this way, the probability effect will be executed with a higher probability in the short game state (high probability / low probability) than in the normal game state, maintaining the rarity of the precision effect in the normal game state When it is desired to make the game progress smoothly, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the short game state. In addition, the execution probability of the ineffective effect may be set to be the same in the normal gaming state and the time saving gaming state, or may be in the reverse relationship.

  As a second feature of the accurate effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 75, the accurate effect pattern is referred to with reference to the accurate effect pattern determination table 2 than when the accurate effect pattern is determined with reference to the accurate effect pattern determination table 1 There is a point that it is set so that the accurate presentation is more easily performed in the early stage (step) of the variable display (the variable presentation) when the determination is made.

  In this way, in the normal gaming state, the accurate presentation is easily performed at a late timing of the variable display, and in the time-saving gaming state (probability fluctuation gaming state), the accurate presentation is easily performed at the early timing of the variable display. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the sense of procrastination in the time saving game state (probability fluctuation gaming state) while pulling the expectation of the player to the jackpot game in the normal gaming state to the late stage of the fluctuation display. It should be noted that the execution time of the in-use effect may be set in the same manner in the normal gaming state and the time saving gaming state, or may be set so as to have a reverse relationship.

  As a third feature of the accurate effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 75, the first accurate effect pattern and the second accurate effect pattern are determined in the normal gaming state, whereas the (high / low probability) time short game state There is a point set so that only the first accurate presentation pattern can be determined.

  In this way, since it is easy to execute the accurate presentation by the first accurate presentation pattern that is more noticeable than the second accurate presentation pattern in the time-saving gaming state advantageous to the player, the player's delight and excitement are effectively achieved. It becomes possible to scold and to improve the interest of the game. In the time-saving game state, the second probability presentation pattern may be determined in the same proportion as the first probability presentation pattern, or may be determined in a proportion different from the first probability presentation pattern. Also, in the normal gaming state, only either one of the first probability effect pattern and the second probability effect pattern is determined, and in the short time gaming state, only the other of the first probability effect pattern and the second probability effect pattern is determined. It may be determined.

(Pre-reading zone effect execution judgment processing of effect control board)
With reference to FIG. 76, the pre-reading zone effect execution determination process of the effect control board 102 will be described.

  In step S1314-1, the sub CPU 102a confirms the prefetch zone effect scenario indicated by the prefetch zone effect scenario data stored in the effect information of the sub RAM 102c in the step S1314-1, and executes the real prefetch zone effect execution in step S1314-2. It is determined whether or not the prefetch zone effect is to be executed by the (current) change effect corresponding to the special image change pattern designating command according to the determination process. The sub CPU 102a shifts the processing to step S1314-3 when it is determined that the pre-reading zone effect is to be performed, and ends the real pre-reading zone effect execution determination process when it is determined that the pre-reading zone effect is not to be performed.

  In step S1314-3, the sub CPU 102a sets the prefetch zone effect control command corresponding to the prefetch zone effect scenario in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c, and in step S1314-4, performs the icon effect control command for prefetch zone effect in the sub RAM 102c. Set in the send buffer of

  The prefetch zone effect control command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 in the data output process of step S1900. When the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 receive the pre-reading zone effect control command, the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 cause the pre-reading zone effect to be executed in the current fluctuation effect and when the pre-reading zone effect control command is not received The pre-reading zone effect is not executed in the fluctuation effect of.

  The icon effect control command for prefetch zone effect set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 in the data output process of step S1900. When receiving the icon effect control command for the pre-reading zone effect, the image control board 105 changes the pre-reading zone effect notification mode to the pre-reading zone effect notification mode when the display mode of the icon currently displayed is not the pre-reading zone effect notification mode. The image control board 105 continues the pre-reading zone effect notification mode if the icon is already displayed in the pre-reading zone effect notification mode when the pre-reading zone effect icon effect control command is received.

(Icon change notice execution judgment processing of effect control board)
The icon change notice execution determination processing of the effect control board 102 will be described using FIG.

  In step S1315-1, the sub CPU 102a confirms the icon display mode scenario data stored in the storage area of the effect information in the sub RAM 102c, and in step S1315-2, the sub CPU 102a determines the present icon change advance notice determination process. It is determined whether or not to execute a throwing kiss notice in a fluctuation effect (corresponding to a special figure fluctuation pattern designation command).

  The sub CPU 102a shifts the processing to step S1315-3 if it decides to execute the throwing kiss announcement, and shifts the processing to step S1315-4 if it decides not to execute the throwing kiss announcement.

  In step S1315-3, the sub CPU 102a sets, in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c, a throwing kiss announcement presentation control command indicating presentation contents according to the icon display mode scenario confirmed in step S1315-1 above, and this icon change announcement judgment End the process. Here, in the "content of effect according to the icon display mode scenario", whether the character relating to the throwing kiss notice throws kisses or leaves and an icon hit by the thrown heart when throwing kisses (the notice of the notice The target icon), whether or not to change the display mode of the icon, and the display mode after the change in the case of changing are included.

  The cast kiss announcement effect control command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 in the data output process of step S1900. When the image control board 105 receives the throwing kiss announcement effect control command, the image control board 105 executes throwing kiss announcement according to the icon display mode scenario indicated by the received throwing kiss announcement effect control command. Details of the throwing kiss notice will be described later.

  In step S 1315-4, the sub CPU 102 a determines whether or not to execute the handshake meeting advance notice with the fluctuation effect (corresponding to the special view fluctuation pattern designation command related to the icon change determination process) at this time. If it is determined to execute, the process proceeds to step S1315-5, and if it is determined not to execute a handshake meeting advance notice, the icon change notice determination processing is ended.

  In step S1315-5, the sub CPU 102a sets a handshake meeting advance presentation control command indicating the contents of the presentation according to the icon display mode scenario confirmed in step S1315-1 in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c, and determines this icon change announcement. End the process. Here, the “content of effect according to the icon display mode scenario” includes the number of lines in the notice of the handshake meeting and the change pattern of the display mode of the icon during fluctuation.

  The handshake event advance notice control command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 in the data output process of step S1900. When receiving the handshake presentation advance notice control command, the image control board 105 executes handshake presentation according to the icon display mode scenario indicated by the received handshake presentation presentation control command. Details of the handshake meeting advance notice will be described later.

(Pre-reading zone effect end judgment processing of effect control board)
The pre-reading zone effect end determination processing of the effect control board 102 will be described using FIG.

  In step S 1318-1, the sub CPU 102 a confirms the pre-reading zone effect scenario indicated by the pre-reading zone effect scenario data stored in the storage area of the sub RAM 102 c in the effect information of the sub RAM 102 c, and pre-reading zone effect ends with the current variable effect. It is determined whether or not. The sub CPU 102a moves the process to step S1318-2 when determining that the pre-reading zone effect is ended, and moves the process to step S1318-4 when determining that the pre-reading zone effect is not ended.

  In step S1318-2, the sub CPU 102a ends the pre-reading zone effect and sets the pre-reading zone effect end control command for returning to the background image or the like for effect mode A in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102 c.

  The pre-reading zone effect end control command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 in the data output process of step S1900. When the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 receive the pre-reading zone effect end control command, the pre-reading zone effect is ended, and the background image, the BGM and the illumination effect mode of the effect lighting device 16 are for the current effect mode. Return to

  In step S 1318-3, the sub CPU 102 a performs an icon effect control command (hereinafter referred to as “first operation mode”) to set the display mode of all the icons displayed in the prefetch zone effect notification mode by executing the prefetch zone effect. The reset icon effect control command is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c.

  Thereby, the icon effect control command is transmitted to the image control board 105 in the data output process of step S1900, and the icons of all the pre-reading zone effect notification modes displayed on the image display device 14 by the image control board 105 are changed to the normal mode. A process for changing (returning) is performed.

  In step S 1318-4, the sub CPU 102 a confirms the zone precursor presentation scenario indicated by the zone precursor presentation scenario data stored in the storage area of the sub RAM 102 c in the presentation information of the sub RAM 102 c, and the cassette zone precursor presentation ends in the current fluctuation presentation. It is determined whether or not. The sub CPU 102a shifts the processing to step S1318-5 when it is determined that the gasse zone precursor effect is finished, and ends the main pre-reading zone effect end determination processing when it is determined that the gasse zone precursor effect is not finished.

  The sub CPU 102a performs an icon effect control command (hereinafter referred to as “second operation method”) in which the display mode of all the icons displayed in the pre-reading zone effect suggestion mode is set to a normal mode by executing the gasse zone precursor effect in step S1318-5. The reset icon effect control command is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c.

  Thereby, the second reset icon effect control command is transmitted to the image control board 105 in the data output process of step S1900, and the icons of all the pre-reading zone effect suggestion modes displayed on the image display device 14 by the image control board 105 are displayed. A process is performed to change (return) to the normal mode.

(Awaiting customer display control process of effect control board)
The customer waiting display control process of the effect control board 102 will be described with reference to FIG.

  In step S 1400-1, the sub CPU 102 a determines whether the menu display in the customer waiting state is currently being performed. Specifically, it is determined whether the menu display execution flag "01M" is set in the menu display execution flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the menu display is being performed, the process proceeds to step S1400-2, and if the sub CPU 102a determines that the menu display is not being performed, the process proceeds to step S1400-5.

  In step S1400-2, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not an effect button detection signal indicating that the operation of the effect button 18A has been performed is input. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the operation of the effect button 18A has been performed, the process proceeds to step S1400-3. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the operation of the effect button 18A is not performed, the process proceeds to step S1400-9.

  In step S1400-3, sub CPU 102a sets a menu display end command for instructing the end of menu display in the transmission buffer of sub RAM 102c, and shifts the process to step S1400-4.

  In step S1400-4, sub CPU 102a clears the menu display execution flag "01M" set in the menu display execution flag storage area of sub RAM 102c, and moves the process to step S1400-5.

  In step S1400-5, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not a customer waiting state is currently in progress. Specifically, the sub CPU 102a determines whether the command stored in the reception buffer is a customer waiting state designation command. The sub CPU 102a moves the process to step S1400-6 when it is determined that the customer waiting state is in progress, and moves the process to step S1400-9 when it is determined that the customer waiting state is not in progress.

  In step S1400-6, the sub CPU 102a determines whether an effect button detection signal indicating that the operation of the effect button 18A has been performed is input. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the operation of the effect button 18A has been performed, the process proceeds to step S1400-7, and if the sub CPU 102a determines that the operation of the effect button 18A is not performed, the process proceeds to step S1400-9.

  In step S1400-7, sub CPU 102a sets a menu display start command for instructing start of menu display in the transmission buffer of sub RAM 102c, and shifts the process to step S1400-8.

  In step S1400-8, sub CPU 102a sets the menu display execution flag "01M" in the menu display execution flag storage area of sub RAM 102c, and shifts the process to step S1400-9.

  In step S1400-9, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not a variable effect or a jackpot game has been started. The sub CPU 102a shifts the processing to step S1400-10 if it determines that the fluctuation effect or the big hit game has been started, and ends the present customer waiting display control processing if it determines that the fluctuation effect or the big hit game has not been started.

  In step S1400-10, the sub CPU 102a clears the information related to the customer waiting state set in the sub RAM 102c, and ends the customer waiting display control process. Specifically, the menu display execution flag set in the menu display execution flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c is cleared.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, in the customer waiting state in which the variable effects and the big hit game are not performed, the menu display is performed by the operation of the effect button 18A, and the display is performed by operating the effect button 18A again. The previously displayed menu display is deleted from the image display device 14.

((Right-handed display control process 1 for effect control board)
The right-handed display control processing 1 of the effect control board 102 will be described with reference to FIG.

  In the right-handed display control process of the effect control board 102 in the present embodiment, the player is directed to the right side area 2AR of the game area 2A during the high probability short game state, the low probability time short game state, and the big hit game round. The first right-handed image KMG1 (ZMG, OMG) is displayed on the upper right side of the display unit 140 of the image display device 14 in order to urge the game ball to be fired (FIG. 82 (b)-( d) see).

  Furthermore, during the high probability time short game state, during the low probability time short game state, during the jackpot game, when the game ball is entered into the first start opening 6 of the left area 2AL of the game area 2A, for the player The second right-handed image KMG2 or the second right-handed image KMG2 is displayed at the center of the display unit 140 where the display of the first right-handed image KMG1 has already been performed in order to urge that the game ball should be fired toward the right side region 2AR. The right-handed image KMG3 is to be additionally displayed. Specific modes of display of the first right-handed image KMG1 to the third right-handed image KMG3 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S 1700-1, the sub CPU 102 a determines whether the second right-handed image KMG 2 or the third right-handed image KMG 3 is currently displayed on the image display device 14. Specifically, whether or not the second right-turn display flag "02R" is set in the second right-turn display flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c, or the third right-turn display in the third right-turn display flag storage area It is determined whether the flag "03R" is set. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the second right-handed image KMG2 or the third right-handed image KMG3 is not being displayed, the process proceeds to step S1700-2 to display the second right-handed image KMG2 or the third right-handed image KMG3. If it is determined that is, the process proceeds to step S1700-6.

  In step S 1700-2, the sub CPU 102 a determines whether or not the first right-handed image KMG 1 is currently displayed on the image display device 14. Specifically, it is determined whether the first right-turn display flag "01R" is set in the first right-turn display flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the first right-handed image KMG1 is being displayed, the process proceeds to step S1700-10, and if it is determined that the first right-handed image KMG1 is not being displayed, the process proceeds to step S1700-3. .

  In step S1700-3, the sub CPU 102a determines whether the gaming state has been changed to the jackpot gaming state or the short time gaming state (high probability time short gaming state, low probability time short gaming state). Specifically, whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer is a round designation command, and in the effect mode setting process shown in FIG. 64, the effect mode flag “01H” in the effect mode flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c. It is determined whether "04 H" has been set. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the gaming state has been changed to the jackpot gaming state or the time saving gaming state, it shifts the process to step S1700-4 and determines that the gaming state is not changed to the jackpot gaming state or the time saving gaming state. , This right-handed display control process is ended.

  In step S1700-4, sub CPU 102a sets a first rightward display start command for instructing start of display of first right-handed image KMG1 in the transmission buffer of sub RAM 102c, and shifts the process to step S1700-5. . The first right-handed display start command is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output process of step S1900, and the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 include the display of the first right-handed image KMG1. The "first right-hand notification" is to be executed. The details of the “first right-hand notification” will be described later.

  In step S1700-5, sub CPU 102a sets the first right-handed display flag "01R" in the first right-handed display flag storage area of sub RAM 102c, and ends the right-handed display control process.

  In step S 1700-6, sub CPU 102 a determines whether the second rightward display time or the third rightward display time set in the second rightward display time timer counter or the third rightward display time timer counter has elapsed in step S 1700-6. Determine if If the sub CPU 102a determines that the second rightward display time or the third rightward display time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S1700-7, and the second rightward display time or the third rightward display time has not elapsed If it is determined that, the process proceeds to step S1700-9.

  In step S1700-7, sub CPU 102a instructs termination of "third right-handed notification" including display of "second-handed right notification" including display of second right-handed image KMG2 or display of third right-handed image KMG3. Therefore, the second rightward display end command or the third rightward display end command is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c, and the process proceeds to step S1700-8. The second rightward display end command or the third rightward display end command is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output process of step S1900, and the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 [2] The right-handed notification ”or the“ third right-handed notification ”is ended.

  In step S1700-8, sub CPU 102a performs the second rightward display flag "02R" in the second rightward display flag storage area of sub RAM 102c or the third rightward display flag "03R" in the third rightward display flag storage area. Is cleared, and the process proceeds to step S1700-2.

  In step S1700-9, the sub CPU 102a determines whether the gaming state has been changed to the normal gaming state. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the effect mode flag "00H" is set in the effect mode flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c in the effect mode setting process shown in FIG. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the gaming state has been changed to the normal gaming state, the process proceeds to step S1700-7, and if it is determined that the gaming state is not changed to the normal gaming state, the process proceeds to step S1700-2.

  In step S 1700-10, the sub CPU 102 a determines whether the gaming state has been changed to the normal gaming state, or the jackpot gaming state has ended. Specifically, in the effect mode setting process shown in FIG. 64, whether or not the effect mode flag "00H" is set in the effect mode flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c, or the command stored in the reception buffer is designated as ending It is determined whether or not it is a command. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the gaming state has been changed to the normal gaming state or the jackpot gaming state has ended, the processing is transferred to step S1700-11 and the gaming state is not changed to the normal gaming state, or If it is determined that the state of the jackpot game has not ended, the processing moves to step S1700-13.

  In step S1700-11, sub CPU 102a sets a first rightward display end command in the transmission buffer of sub RAM 102c to instruct the end of "first rightward notification" including the display of first rightward image KMG1. , And moves the process to step S1700-12. The first right-handed display end command is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output process of step S1900, and the “first right-handed notification” is ended by the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105. It will be

  In step S1700-12, sub CPU 102a clears the first right-handed display flag "01R" in the first right-handed display flag storage area of sub RAM 102c, and ends the right-handed display control process.

  In step S1700-13, the sub CPU 102a determines whether the gaming ball has entered the first starting opening 6 or not. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer of the sub RAM 102c is a first starting opening winning combination designation command. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the gaming ball has entered the first starting opening 6, the process proceeds to step S1700-14, and if it is determined that the gaming ball has not entered the first starting opening 6, the real right strike End display control processing.

  In step S1700-14, the sub CPU 102a adds "1" to the counter value of the first starting opening ball number counter N to update it, and shifts the processing to step S1700-15.

  In step S1700-15, the sub CPU 102a determines whether the counter value of the first starting opening ball number counter N is 2 or more. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the counter value is not 2 or more, the rightward hit display control process ends, and if it is determined that the counter value of the first starting opening ball number counter N is 2 or more, step S1700-16. Transfer the process to

  In step S1700-16, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not a customer waiting state is currently in progress. Specifically, the sub CPU 102a determines whether the command stored in the reception buffer is a customer waiting state designation command. The sub CPU 102a moves the process to step S1700-21 when it is determined that the customer waiting state is in progress, and moves the process to step S1700-17 when it is determined that the customer waiting state is not in progress.

  In step S1700-17, sub CPU 102a sets a second rightward display start command in the transmission buffer of sub RAM 102c to instruct the start of display of second right-handed image KMG2, and shifts the process to step S1700-18. . The second right-handed display start command is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output process of step S1900, and includes the display of the second right-handed image KMG2 by the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105. The “second right-hand notification” is to be executed. The details of the “second right-handed notification” will be described later.

  In step S1700-18, the sub CPU 102a sets a second rightward display flag "02R" in the second rightward display flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c, and shifts the process to step S1700-19.

  In step S1700-19, sub CPU 102a sets the right-handed display time (for example, 10 seconds) to the second right-handed display time timer counter or the third right-handed display time timer counter, and proceeds to step S1700-20. Transfer.

  In step S1700-20, the sub CPU 102a clears the first starting opening ball number counter value N, and shifts the processing to step S1700-3.

  In step S1700-21, sub CPU 102a sets a third rightward display start command for instructing start of display of third rightwarded image KMG3 in the transmission buffer of sub RAM 102c, and shifts the process to step S1700-22. . The third right-handed display start command is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output process of step S1900, and the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 include the display of the third right-handed image KMG3. The "third right-handed notification" is to be executed. The details of the “third right-handed notification” will be described later.

  In step S1700-22, sub CPU 102a sets the third rightward display flag "03R" in the third rightward display flag storage area of sub RAM 102c, and shifts the process to step S1700-19.

  Here, in the right-handed display control process, it is determined whether or not the counter value of the first starting opening ball number counter N is 2 or more in step S1700-15 above, and the counter value is 2 or more. If it is determined that there is a second right-handed display start command or a third right-handed display start command in step S1700-17 or step S1700-21 described above, the first starting opening ball entry If the counter value of the number counter N is 1 or more, the second right-handed display start command or the third right-handed display start command may be set in step S1700-17 or step S1700-21. In this case, when the ball entering the first starting opening 6 is detected, the player immediately includes the "second right hit notification" including the second right hit display or the third right hit display to the player. The third right-handed notification can be executed.

  Further, in the present rightward display control process, “second rightward notification” or “third rightward notification” is performed based on the detection of entering the first start hole 6. However, instead of entering the ball into the first starting hole 6, instead of entering the ball into the first starting hole 6, predetermined to the first to third general winning holes 11-1, 11-2, 11-3. When a number of ball entry is detected, “second right-handed notification” or “third right-handed notification” may be executed.

((Left-handed display control process 1 for effect control board)
The leftward display control process of the effect control board 102 will be described with reference to FIG.

  In the leftward display control process of the effect control board 102 in the present embodiment, when the gaming state is changed from the high probability short game state or the low probability time short game state to the normal gaming state, the player sees the left side of the game area 2A. In order to urge the game ball to be launched toward the area 2AL, as shown in FIG. 116 (c), the first left strike image 1612 is displayed on the display unit 140 of the image display device 14. A specific aspect of the display of the first left-handed image 1612 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In addition, when it is detected that the game ball has passed through the prize gate 10 in the right area 2AR of the game area 2A during the normal gaming state, the player shoots the game ball toward the left area 2AL. As shown in FIG. 117 (b) and FIG. 118 (b), the second left-handed image 1622 or the third left-handed image 1632 may be displayed on the display unit 140 of the image display device 14 in order to urge There is. Specific modes of the display of the second left-handed image 1622 and the third left-handed image 1632 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 117 and 118.

  In step S1800-1, the sub CPU 102a is currently displaying an image of any one of the first left-handed image 1612, the second left-handed image 1622, and the third left-handed image 1632 on the image display device 14. It is determined whether or not. Specifically, whether or not the first left-handed display flag "01L" is set in the first left-handed display flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c, the second left-handed display flag "secondly left-handed display flag storage area" It is determined whether the second left hit display flag "03L" is set in the third left hit display flag storage area or not. If the sub CPU 102a determines that one of the first left-handed image 1612, the second left-handed image 1622, and the third left-handed image 1632 is being displayed, the process proceeds to step S1800-6. If it is determined that none of the first left-handed image 1612, the second left-handed image 1622, and the third left-handed image 1632 is being displayed, the process proceeds to step S1800-2.

  In step S1800-2, the sub CPU 102a determines whether the gaming state has been changed from the high probability short game state or the low probability short game state to the normal gaming state. Specifically, in the effect mode setting process shown in FIG. 64, it is determined whether or not the effect mode flag "00H" is set in the effect mode flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the game mode has been changed to the normal gaming state, the process proceeds to step S1800-3, and if it is determined that the game mode is not changed to the normal gaming state, the process proceeds to step S1800-9.

  In step S1800-3, sub CPU 102a sets a first leftward display start command for instructing start of display of first leftward image 1612 in the transmission buffer of sub RAM 102c, and shifts the process to step S1800-4. . The first left-handed display start command is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output process of step S1900, and includes the display of the first left-handed image 1612 by the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105. The "first left hit notification" is to be executed. The details of the “first left hit notification” will be described later.

  In step S1800-4, sub CPU 102a sets the first left-handed display flag "01L" in the first left-handed display flag storage area of sub RAM 102c, and shifts the process to step S1800-5.

  In step S1800-5, sub CPU 102a causes the left-handed display time (for example, 3 seconds) to be the first left-handed display time timer counter, or the second left-handed display time timer counter, or the third left-handed display time timer It sets to the counter and ends this left hitting display control processing.

  In step S1800-6, sub CPU 102a left-turns the timer counter that is set to any one of the first left-handed display time timer counter, the second left-handed display time timer counter, and the third left-handed display time timer counter. It is determined whether the display time has elapsed. If sub CPU 102a determines that the left hit display time has elapsed for any timer counter, the process proceeds to step S1800-7, and if it is determined that the left hit display time has not elapsed for any timer counter, the present left The hit display control process ends.

  If it is determined in step S1800-7 that the display time of the first left-handed image 1612 has elapsed based on the timer counter that has determined that the left-handed display time has elapsed in step S1800-6. When it is determined that the display time for the second left-handed image 1622 has elapsed, it is determined that the display time for the second left-handed image 1632 has elapsed. If it is determined, the third leftward display end command is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c, and the process proceeds to step S1800-8.

Here, since the first left hit display end command instructs the end of the “first left hit notification” including the display of the first left hit image 1612, the second left hit display end command is the second left hit image 1622. In order to instruct the end of the "second left hit notification" including display, the third left hit display end command instructs the end of the "third left hit notification" including the display of the third left hit image 1632; It is set in the transmission buffer of the RAM 102c.
The first to third left-handed display end commands are transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output process of step S1900, and the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 execute "first left-handed notification". Alternatively, the "second left hit notification" or the "third left hit notification" is ended.

  The sub CPU 102a ends the display of the first left-handed image 1612, the second left-handed image 1622, and the third left-handed image 1632 in step S1800-8. Clear the first left hit display flag “01L”, the second left hit display flag “02L” of the second left hit display flag storage area, and the third left hit display flag “03L” of the third left hit display flag storage area .

  In step S1800-9, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the gaming ball has passed through the winning gate 10. Specifically, it is determined whether the command stored in the reception buffer of sub RAM 102c is a winning gate passage designation command. The sub CPU 102a shifts the processing to step S1800-12 when it is determined that the gaming ball has passed through the winning gate 10, and shifts the processing to step S1800-10 when it is determined that the gaming ball has not passed through the winning gate 10.

  In step S1800-10, the sub CPU 102a determines whether the gaming ball has entered the fourth general winning opening 11-4. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer of the sub RAM 102c is a fourth general winning opening entrance ball specifying command. If it is determined that the game ball has entered the fourth general winning opening 11-4, the sub CPU 102a shifts the processing to step S1800-12, and determines that the game ball has not entered the fourth general winning opening 11-4. Then, the process proceeds to step S1800-11.

  In step S1800-11, the sub CPU 102a determines whether the gaming ball has entered the second starting opening 7 or not. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer of the sub RAM 102c is a second starting opening winning combination designation command. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the gaming ball has entered the second starting opening 7, the process proceeds to step S1800-12, and if it is determined that the gaming ball has not entered the second starting opening 7, the left strike display End the control process.

  In step S1800-12, sub CPU 102a determines whether the gaming state is the normal gaming state or not. Specifically, it is determined whether the effect mode flag "00H" is set in the effect mode flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the gaming state is the normal gaming state, the process proceeds to step S1700-13, and if it is determined that the gaming state is not the normal gaming state, the present left hit display control processing ends.

  In step S1800-13, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not a customer waiting state is currently in progress. Specifically, the sub CPU 102a determines whether the command stored in the reception buffer is a customer waiting state designation command. If it is determined that the sub CPU 102a is in the customer waiting state, the process proceeds to step S1800-14, and it is not in the customer waiting state, that is, it is determined that the display pattern 140 of the image display device 14 is changing the rendering symbol. , And moves the process to step S1800-16.

  In step S1800-14, sub CPU 102a sets a second left display start command in the transmission buffer of sub RAM 102c to instruct the start of display of second left image 1622, and shifts the processing to step S1800-15. . The second left-handed display start command is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output process of step S1900, and the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 include the display of the second left-handed image 1622 The "second left hit notification" is to be executed. The details of the "second left-handed notification" will be described later.

  In step S1800-15, sub CPU 102a sets the second left-handed display flag "02L" in the second left-handed display flag storage area of sub RAM 102c, and moves the process to step S1800-5.

  In step S1800-16, sub CPU 102a sets a third leftward display start command for instructing start of display of third lefthanded image 1632 in the transmission buffer of sub RAM 102c, and shifts the process to step S1800-17. . The third left-handed display start command is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output process of step S1900, and the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 include the display of the third left-handed image 1632. The "third left hit notification" is to be executed. The details of the “third left-handed notification” will be described later.

  In step S1800-17, sub CPU 102a sets the third left-handed display flag "03L" in the third left-handed display flag storage area of sub RAM 102c, and moves the process to step S1800-5.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the display of the second left-handed image 1622 in the customer waiting state shown in step S1800-14 to step S1800-15, and the variation of the rendering symbol shown in step S1800-16 to step S1800-17. Regarding the display of the third left-handed image 1632 in, it is also possible to make the execution condition of each image display different. In this case, for example, while the process shown in step S1800-14 to step S1800-15 is taken as the process accompanying the passage of the winning gate 10, the fourth general winning hole is the process shown in step S1800-16 to step S1800-17. The display of the second left-handed image 1622 in the customer waiting state is executed by passing through the winning gate 10 by processing as entering the ball 11-4 or entering the second starting opening 7 and the effect pattern is displayed. The display of the third left-handed image 1632 during the fluctuation is executed by entering the fourth general winning opening 11-4 or entering the second start opening 7, and by switching the processing content, It is also possible to reverse the execution conditions.

(Display example of image display device in each gaming state)
Next, a display example of the image display device 14 in each gaming state will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 82 (a) is a display example during normal gaming state (effect mode A), and FIG. 82 (b) is a display example during high probability short game state (effect mode B), and FIG. 82 (c) Is a display example of the low probability time short game state (effect mode C), and FIG. 82 (d) is a display example of a jackpot game.

  As shown in FIG. 82 (a), during the normal gaming state, an effect mode image AMG indicating that the effect mode A is displayed is displayed on the upper left side of the display unit 140 of the image display device 14; In the central portion, three effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are displayed side by side, and three special effect symbols TZ4 are displayed side by side between the effect symbol TZ3 on the lower right side of the display unit 140 and the second hold icon display area. Ru.

  As shown in FIG. 82 (b), during the high probability short game state, an effect mode image BMG indicating that the effect mode B is displayed is displayed on the upper left side of the display unit 140 of the image display device 14, and the display unit The right-handed image KMG1, which is the display mode for high probability described above, is displayed on the upper right side of the 140, and the jackpot number of times image KRG is the display mode for high probability described above near the upper center of the display unit 140. Is displayed, and the high probability remaining number image KKG, which is the display mode for high probability described above, is displayed on the lower left side of the display unit 140, and three effect designs TZ1 to TZ3 are arranged side by side in the center of the display unit 140. Three special effect designs TZ4 are displayed side by side between the effect pattern TZ3 displayed on the lower right side of the display unit 140 and the second hold icon display area 143.

  As shown in FIG. 82 (c), during the low probability time short game state, an effect mode image CMG indicating that the effect mode C is displayed is displayed on the upper left side of the display unit 140 of the image display device 14, and the display unit The right-handed image ZMG, which is the display mode for time shortening described above, is displayed on the upper right side of 140, and the big hit consecutive number image ZRG, which is the display mode for time shortening described above, is displayed closer to the upper center of the display unit 140. In the lower left side of the display unit 140, the time reduction remaining number image ZKG, which is the above-described display mode for time reduction, is displayed, and in the center of the display unit 140, three effect designs TZ1 to TZ3 are displayed side by side. Three special effect designs TZ4 are displayed side by side between the effect pattern TZ3 on the lower right side of 140 and the second reserved icon display area 143.

  As shown in FIG. 82 (d), during the jackpot game (during opening), the right-handed image OMG1 which is the display mode in the above-mentioned jackpot is displayed on the upper right side of the display unit 140 of the image display device 14, An opening image OPG indicating the opening of the jackpot game is displayed on the remaining portion of the display unit 140.

  The effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 to be displayed mainly in the normal game state (during wait for customer waiting effects, during normal variable movement effects under high execution frequency, etc.) are vertically elongated rectangular pattern base images ZBG and nine types of characters. The composite image is a composite image in which the character image CYG showing any of the above and the identification image SG showing any one of the numbers 1 to 9 corresponding to one of the 9 The design is complicated, there are many colors, bright colors, etc.) The first display mode is a rendering pattern (first rendering pattern).

  The character image CYG is a single image imitating any of nine types of characters, and the identification image SG superimposes a hexagonal base image and one of the numeral images (identifiers) 1 to 9 It has become a composite image.

  The effect pattern of the first display mode may be stored as a single pattern data in the CGROM 105Bb, or the pattern base image ZBG, the character image CYG, and the identification image SG may be stored separately in the CGROM 105Bb. It may be synthesized when displaying on the display device 14. Alternatively, the base image and the number image forming the identification image SG may be separately stored in the CGROM 105 Bb and may be combined when displayed on the image display device 14.

  In this embodiment, even during the normal gaming state, during the period from when the transition effect (development effect) starts in the change effect until the SP / SPSP reach effect ends, that is, as described later In a period in which TZ3 is displayed in a reduced size, the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are displayed in a second display mode (second effect symbol) to be described later, but in most other periods, effect symbols TZ1 to T1 Since TZ3 is displayed in the first display mode, the basic display mode of the effect symbols in the normal gaming state can be said to be the first display mode.

  In the high probability time short game state and during the low probability time short game state, the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 displayed mainly (during customer waiting effect waiting, all variation effects) are any one of the numeral images 1 to 9 (identifier A single image only), with a lower decorativeness than the effect pattern of the first display mode (simple design, less color, dark color etc.) effect pattern of the second display mode (second effect pattern) It has become.

  In addition, about the production design of the 2nd display mode, although it is memorized in CGROM105Bb as single graphic data, it is the same figure (form) as the number image which constitutes identification image SG in the production design of the 1st display mode. Therefore, when the numeral image is stored independently in the CGROM 105Bb, the same image data may be used to display on the image display device 14. This makes it possible to suppress the compression of the capacity of the CGROM 105Bb.

  In this embodiment, in the high probability time short gaming state and in the low probability time short gaming state, in the waiting for customer waiting effect or in the execution period of all the fluctuation effects, the effect pattern of the second display mode as the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 From being displayed, it can be said that the basic display mode of the production symbols in the high probability time short game state and the low probability time short game state is the second display mode.

  The special effect pattern TZ4 displayed during the normal gaming state, during the high probability time short gaming state and during the low probability time short gaming state, superimposes a hexagonal base image and one of the numeral images (identifiers) of 1 to 9 It has become a composite image that has been made, and the decorativeness is lower than the effect design of the first display mode, but higher than the effect design of the second display mode (the design is complicated, there are many colors, bright colors etc.) It is an effect pattern (third effect pattern) of 3 display modes.

  In addition, about the production | presentation design of a 3rd display mode, although it is memorize | stored in CGROM105Bb as single pattern data, since it is the same figure (form) as the identification image SG in the production | presentation design of a 1st display mode, the said identification When the image SG is independently stored in the CGROM 105Bb, the same image data may be used to display on the image display device 14. This makes it possible to suppress the compression of the capacity of the CGROM 105Bb.

  In this manner, the types (basic display modes) of the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 mainly displayed in the normal gaming state (rendering mode A) and the high probability time short gaming state (rendering mode B) and the low probability time short gaming state The effect displayed on the image display device 14 when there is a change in the gaming state by differentiating the type (basic display mode) of the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 mainly displayed in (render mode C) The display mode of the symbol can be changed, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, in the normal gaming state (rendering mode A), the high probability time short gaming state (rendering mode B), and the low probability time minor gaming state (rendering mode C), the special effect pattern TZ4 is displayed in the third display mode It was made to display with the symbol (the 3rd production design), but the 2nd indicatory feature like the production design TZ1-TZ3 in the high probability time short game state (rendering mode B) and the low probability time short game state (rendering mode C) You may make it display with the production | presentation symbol (2nd production | presentation symbol) of.

  In addition, in the normal gaming state (rendering mode A), during the period when the specific reach effect (SP / SPSP reach effect) is being executed, the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are displayed as effect symbols (second effect symbols) in the second display mode. Although it was made to do, you may make it display with the production design (3rd production design) of the 3rd display mode like special production design TZ4.

In addition, the basic display mode of effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 in the normal gaming state (rendering mode A) is the first display mode, and the high probability time short gaming state (rendering mode B) and the low probability time short gaming state (rendering mode C) Although the basic display mode of the effect patterns TZ1 to TZ3 was the second display mode,
The basic display mode of the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 in the normal gaming state is the third display mode having a higher decorativeness than the second display mode, and the basics of the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 in the high probability short game state and the low probability time short game state The display mode may be set as the second display mode. In this case, it is preferable to display the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 in the second display mode between the transition effect in the fluctuation effect executed in the normal gaming state and the end of the SP / SPSP reach effect.

  Also, instead of notifying the result of the fluctuation effect (variation display) by the combination of three effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3, the fluctuation effect (variation display) is performed by the combination of three effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 and three special effect symbols TZ4 The result of may be reported.

  In addition, the combination of three special design symbols TZ1 to TZ3 and the combination of three special special design symbols TZ4 when the fluctuation effect (variation display) is finished are the same, but in the case of a big hit, the effect pattern TZ1 to T8 The combination of TZ3 and the combination of the three special effect designs TZ4 are made identical, and in the case of a loss, the combination of the effect designs TZ1 to TZ3 and the combination of the three special effect symbols TZ4 may be different. It is also good. In that case, the number of combinations of the three special effect designs TZ4 may be more or less than the number of combinations of the three effects designs TZ1 to TZ3.

  In addition, although it did not touch about the change of the display mode of the production symbols TZ1 to TZ3 when there is a change in the gaming state, here, a predetermined return condition (in the present embodiment, the variable display of a predetermined number of times is executed) However, based on the establishment of a fall lottery, etc.), the case of returning from a specific gaming state such as a high probability short game state or a low probability short game state to a normal gaming state will be briefly described. Keep it.

  When returning from the specific gaming state to the normal gaming state based on the establishment of the predetermined return condition, an effect image for shielding the effect pattern displayed on the image display device 14 (for example, a background image of the display unit 140 A stage change image for switching, a dedicated effect image for switching only a rendering pattern, etc. A movable member (position in front of the rendering pattern) for blocking a rendering effect displayed on a display or the image display device 14 With the execution of the predetermined effect such as the effect of operating the member that can be converted to the state of moving and the state of retracting from the front), the first display of the effect design of the second display mode that is blocked (visual control is restricted) It is good to switch to the effect design of the aspect. Note that the predetermined effect may be an effect that can attract the player's attention instead of an effect such as shielding the effect pattern.

(Flow of presentation of handshake meeting advance notice)
The flow of presentation of a handshake meeting advance notice will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, when the fluctuating icon to be notified of the handshake meeting is displayed in the fluctuating icon display area 142 and the fluctuating display of the effect pattern (fluctuating effect) is started, the fluctuating icon is displayed first as the handshake meeting notice. A handshake meeting place appears in the vicinity of the area 142, and a handshake character that shakes hands with the silhouette of a person relating to the changing icon and a guard character that guards the handshake character appear at a predetermined location on the display unit 140.

  Then, next, when the handshake character and the fluctuating icon shake hands, and a predetermined line appears from the handshake character along with the handshake, the color starts to gradually change under the fluctuating icon, and the color of the fluctuating icon changes. An effect (hereinafter referred to as "changing icon color change turning effect") of whether or not to change (whether or not the display mode of the changing icon changes) is executed. Then, when the color is completely changed (color change is successful), so-called "promotion success (chance up)" is obtained, and while the jackpot expectation for the icon during the change is increased, the color change is ended halfway, When returning to the color before the variable icon color change overdrow effect is performed (color change fails), it becomes so-called "promotion failure", and the jackpot expectation for the variable icon is maintained.

  When the first changing icon color change turning effect is over, then the second line appears again from the handshake character, and the handshake meeting notice continues, and the escort character is sent out for the changing icon Branch and branch when the notice of the handshake meeting is finished.

  When the second dialogue appears again from the handshake character and the handshake meeting advance is continued, the second changing icon color change turning presentation is executed. Then, during the second variation, as in the first case, during the second variation, the color changes completely (the color change is successful) and becomes the promotion success (chance up), or the color change is halfway It ends (color change fails) and it becomes promotion failure.

  Then, when the second changing icon color change overdrow effect is finished, the third line appears again from the handshake character, and the handshake party's notice continues again, and the escort character leaves the changing icon. A guide is given, and branching is performed when the handshake meeting advance notice ends.

  When the third dialogue appears from the handshake character and the handshake meeting advance is continued, the third changing icon color change turning presentation is executed. Then, during the third variation, as in the case of the first and second times, the color changes completely and becomes a promotion success (chance up), or the color change ends halfway along as in the case of the first and second changes during the third change. It becomes promotion failure.

  Then, when the third changing icon color change turning effect is finished, the fourth line appears from the handshake character, and the handshake meeting notice continues further, and the escort character gives a discharge guidance to the changing icon. Go and branch when the notice of the handshake meeting is ended.

  When the fourth dialogue appears from the handshake character and the notice of the handshake meeting continues, in the fourth fluctuating icon color change inclining effect, the color must completely change and become a promotion success (chance up), The escort character gives an exit guidance to the changing icon, and the handshake meeting advance notice ends.

(Example of production of notice of handshake meeting)
Next, an example of presentation of a handshake meeting advance notice will be described. For example, as shown in FIG. 84 (a), when the hold icons A10 to A12 of the normal mode are displayed on the first display portion 141a to the third display portion 141c of the first hold icon display area 141, a loss is indicated. It is assumed that the stop display of the effect pattern shown is performed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 84 (b) to FIG. 84 (c), pending icons A10 to A12 displayed on the first display portion 141a to the third display portion 141c are changing icon display area 142, the first While shifting to the display part 141a and the 2nd display part 141b, the fluctuation display of a production | presentation pattern is started. In addition, since the hold icon A10 is shifted to the changing icon display area 142, it changes from the holding icon A10 to the changing icon A10.

  And, when the fluctuation display of the production design (the fluctuation display of the special design) is executed, the game ball enters the 1st starting opening 6, the 1st special figure reservation occurs newly, the said 1st The first start opening winning combination designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 102 in response to the occurrence of the special view reservation, and it is determined in the start opening winning processing that it is determined to execute a handshake meeting advance notice, and the number of lines of the handshake meeting announcement is twice. The color of the changing icon changes to green (fourth special embodiment 12) in the fourth special aspect 21 → first line at the time of winning → the color of the changing icon in the second line is red (fourth It is assumed that an icon display mode scenario for notifying the handshake event of the content of the effect changing to the special mode 13) is selected.

  In this case, first, as shown in FIG. 85A, the hold icon A13 corresponding to the newly generated first special view hold is displayed in the fourth special mode 21. At this time, as shown in FIG. 85 (b), the display mode of the fluctuating icon A10 does not change, but the hold icons A11 and A12 corresponding to the advance hold for the newly generated first special view hold is the fourth special While changing to the mode 41, as shown in FIG. 85C, the handshake meeting room AK appears in the vicinity of the fluctuating icon display area 142 while partially hiding in the effect EF1.

  In addition, holding icon A13 is displayed in the fourth special mode 21 and holding icons A11 and A12 are displayed in the fourth special mode 41 by executing the handshake meeting advance notice based on the occurrence of the first special view holding. In this case, a heart is attached to the chest portion of the silhouette of the person pertaining to the hold icon A13 that is the subject of the handshake meeting advance notice so that the player can easily recognize the target of the handshake meeting advance notice. .

  Then, as shown in FIG. 85 (d), when the effect EF1 is deleted, a handshake character C1 that performs a handshake related to a handshake meeting advance notice and an escort character C2 that guards the handshake character C1 Appear.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 86 (a), the stop display of the effect pattern indicating a loss is performed, and the fluctuating icon A10 is erased, and as shown in FIG. 86 (b), it corresponds to the hold icon A11. When the variable display of the effect pattern to be performed is started, the reserved icons A11 to A13 shift, and shift to the changing icon display area 142, the first display portion 141a, and the second display portion 141b, respectively. Here, the hold icon A11 shifts from the hold icon A11 to the changing icon A11 to shift to the changing icon display area 142, and the display mode changes from the fourth special mode 41 to the fourth special mode 31 along with the shift. Change.

  Also, as soon as the floating icon A11 is displayed in the floating icon display area 142, as shown in FIG. 86 (b), the silhouette of the person related to the floating icon A11 and the handshake character C1 shake hands. Here, since the fluctuating icon A11 is not the target of the suggestion of the jackpot expectation of the handshake meeting advance notice, the dialogue character does not appear from the handshake character C1, and the display mode (color) of the fluctuating icon A11 also changes. do not do.

  As shown in FIGS. 86 (b) and 86 (c), the hold icon A13 of the fourth special mode 21, the hold icon A12 of the fourth special mode 41, and the changing icon A11 of the fourth special mode 31 are displayed. When the game ball enters the first starting opening 6 while the handshake event notice suggestion effect is being executed, in other words, when the game ball enters the first starting opening 6, the hold icon A14 corresponding to the ball entry is displayed in the normal mode. Ru.

  In the present embodiment, when it is determined that the handshake meeting advance notice is to be performed, this occurs because the first start opening 6 or the second start opening 7 is entered before the handshake meeting advance notice is completed. This is because the execution of the icon change notice is prohibited for the hold icon corresponding to the figure hold. However, the execution of the icon change notice for the hold icon corresponding to the special view hold generated by entering the first starting opening 6 etc. by the end of the handshake meeting advance notice is permitted, and the icon display mode determined The hold icon A14 may be displayed in a predetermined special mode based on the scenario.

  While the variable display of the effect pattern corresponding to the fluctuating icon A11 is finished, as shown in FIG. 86 (d), the escort character C2 performs an operation of confirming the clock, and the variable display of the effect pattern is ended. Suggest that. Then, when the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 in the variation start to stop, as shown in FIG. 87 (a) to FIG. 87 (b), the escort character C2 performs an exit guidance operation for the changing icon A11. The handshake character C1 performs an action (bye-bye) to say goodbye to the fluctuating icon A11, and the fluctuating icon A11 is shrunk as if it is leaving. Then, as shown in FIG. 87C, when the stop display of the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ4 is performed, the fluctuating icon A11 is completely erased, and the handshake character C1 and the escort character C2 return to the standby state.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 88 (a), the hold icon A13 which is the target of the handshake meeting advance notice is shifted from the first display portion 141a to the changing icon display area 142, and the changing icon of the fourth special aspect 11 is obtained. As A13, the silhouette of the person relating to the fluctuating icon A13 and the handshake character C1 immediately shake hands.

  As shown in FIG. 88 (a), when the game ball enters the first starting opening 6 while the handshake party advance notice is being executed, the reserved icon A15 corresponding to the entered ball is displayed in the normal mode. Be done. In the present embodiment, this is caused by entering the first starting opening 6 or the second starting opening 7 before the end of the handshake meeting advance notice, when it is determined to execute the handshake meeting advance notice. This is because the execution of the icon change notice is prohibited for the hold icon corresponding to the special view hold. However, the execution of the icon change notice for the hold icon corresponding to the special view hold generated by entering the first starting opening 6 etc. by the end of the handshake meeting advance notice is permitted, and the icon display mode determined The hold icon A14 may be displayed in a predetermined special mode based on the scenario.

  When a handshake is performed between the fluctuating icon A13 and the handshake character C1 in the fourth special mode 11, as shown in FIG. 88 (b), the first dialogue appears from the handshake character C1, and FIG. 88 (c) As shown in FIG. 6, during the change, the color of the changing icon A13 gradually changes from the bottom (here, from white to green). Then, as shown in FIG. 88 (d), when the color of the fluctuating icon A13 completely changes and the color change is successful, the fluctuating icon A13 performs a gut pose to succeed in the change (promotion) of the color. The semi-transparent effect EF2 indicating the success of the color change is displayed visibly on the fluctuating icon A13.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 89 (a), when the fluctuating icon A13 continues the handshake with the handshake character C1 in the color (here, green) after changing due to the first fluctuating icon color change overturn effect. As shown in FIG. 89 (b), the second line appears from the handshake character C1, and the color of the fluctuating icon A13 gradually changes from the bottom (here, from green to red). A roaring effect is performed. Then, as shown in FIG. 89 (c), when the color of the fluctuating icon A13 completely changes and the color change succeeds, the fluctuating icon A13 performs a pause again, and the color change (promotion) is performed. Take action to indicate success.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 90 (a), while the reach state is established, the escort character C2 performs an exit guidance operation on the fluctuating icon A13, and the handshake character C1 separates from the fluctuating icon A13. When it is notified that the notice of the handshake meeting is finished, the predetermined reach effect (for example, normal reach) is started, as shown in FIG. 90 (b) to FIG. 90 (c). The handshake character C1 and the escort character C2 are erased along with the execution of the transition effect (development effect) that develops into SP reach, and the display mode of the during-changing icon A13 displayed in the fourth special mode 13 is the color at that time. It changes to the 2nd special mode 13 which is common in red, and a handshake meeting advance is ended, and SP reach production is started.

  Further, at the timing when the transition effect is executed, the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are reduced and moved to the upper right portion of the display unit 140 and switched to the second display mode (the second effect symbol), and after the SP reach effect ends It returns to a 1st display mode (1st production | presentation symbol), and will return to the position on the effective line of the display part 140. FIG.

  As described above, by the notice of the handshake meeting, the color of the changing icon (in a wide sense, the display mode) gradually changes, and the changing icon color overproduction of whether the color changes or not is performed. As described above, by displaying the color change process, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the change of the changing icon and easily recognize the change of the color of the changing icon.

  In the present embodiment, although it is a color that changes as a target of the handshake meeting advance notice, the change target is not limited to the color, and may be the size or shape of the changing icon. Furthermore, the change process may be displayed by appropriately combining a plurality of elements constituting the display mode of the changing icon such as color, size and shape. When a plurality of elements are appropriately combined, for example, the color changes in the first line appearance, the size changes in the second line appearance, and the shape changes in the third line appearance; It is also possible to change the changing elements according to the order of.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the handshake meeting advance notice is carried out based on the pre-judgment result, but the jackpot decision result of the special view judgment information targeted for the handshake meeting advance notice, the special symbol judgment result, or the special view fluctuation It is also possible to do based on the pattern determination result.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the handshake meeting advance notice is executed at the start of the variable display of the effect pattern, but the execution timing of the handshake meeting advance notice is not limited to this, and is appropriately set according to the contents of the change effect production can do. As other execution timings of the handshake party advance notice, it develops into a predetermined cut-in notice, speech advance notice, appearance of character, or super reach at the time of pseudo stop or re-variation, so-called step-up advance step-up. At the time of execution of the development effect, at the time of reaching the reach state, or at the time of execution of a predetermined operation effect by the effect product device 17, the setting can be appropriately made.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the handshake meeting advance notice is given to the changing icon, but can be given to the hold icon. In this case, for example, the handshake meeting venue appears in the vicinity of any one of the first display unit 141a to the fourth display unit 141d, and is displayed on the first display unit 141a to the fourth display unit 141d where the handshake conference hall appears. It is also possible to give notice of a handshake meeting to the hold icon and display the process of color change (change in display mode). In this case, it is the same as the method (steps S1305-194-1 to S1305-19-18, etc.) in which the presentation contents of the handshake presentation are determined by the icon display mode scenario determination for the handshake presentation in the present embodiment. You can give notice of the handshake meeting in any way.

  Also, as another embodiment for giving a notice of a handshake event, for example, during the variable display of the effect pattern, the handshake character shakes hands sequentially to all or a part of the icons displayed at that time. In this way, it is possible to give notice of a handshake meeting and display the process of color change (change in display mode). In this case, for example, when change presentation is started, it can be performed by determining, for example, which icon the handshake meeting advance notice is to be executed on, and the display mode after change in the case of execution. .

  Further, in the present embodiment, while the process of the color change of the icon (change of the display mode) is displayed, the icon and the handshake character are shaking hands, in other words, the color change target icon The action is being performed, but some action is performed one or more times before the color change target icon changes color, and the color changes after the action ends (for example, a predetermined character for the target icon It is also possible to kisses and change the color of the target icon after the kiss is finished), and the color change may be more easily performed as the number of actions increases.

  Further, in the present embodiment, one to four lines of speech appear for one handshake meeting advance notice, and one changing icon color change overdue effect is executed with the appearance of one line. Ru. Therefore, as the number of lines appearing in one handshake meeting notice increases, the possibility of color change success, in other words, the probability of winning a jackpot win increases (chance up) increases, so the player The interest of the game can be improved by focusing attention on the appearance of lines. In addition, even if a color change fails in a certain changing icon color change presentation, or even if a desired change is not made, in the notice of one handshake event, if the next line appears, the player's color It is possible to maintain a sense of expectation for change (increase of jackpot expectation).

  In the present embodiment, one handshake meeting advance notice is executed in one variation production (variation display of production design), but a plurality of handshake conference notices in one fluctuation production (variation display of production design) Can also be implemented. Then, the number of lines of notice of each handshake meeting notice of the plural handshake meetings is determined by a scenario or by an independent drawing, and the color change is successful as the number of lines appearing in the plural handshake meeting notices increases. In other words, it is possible to increase the probability that the jackpot expectation is high (chance up).

  In addition, the fact that the possibility of color change success increases as the number of lines increases, it means that the time for shaking hands at the handshake meeting notice, in other words, the action is performed on the icon that is the target of the handshake meeting notice. The longer the time is spent, the higher the possibility of the color change success, so that the player can pay attention to the operation and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Further, in the present embodiment, while the notice content of the handshake event is one handshake, it is an effect that one or more lines appear, and this is caused by the time when the number of lines is shaking hands However, for example, it is possible to set the effect content in which one or more words are issued in one speech, and to change the time of shaking hands with the length of the words in one speech.

  Further, in the present embodiment, one to four lines of speech appear for one handshake meeting advance notice, and one changing icon color change overdue effect is executed with the appearance of one line. Ru. Therefore, as the number of lines appearing in one handshake meeting advance notice increases, the possibility of color change success, in other words, the probability of winning a jackpot win increases (chance up).

  Further, in the present embodiment, the appearing handshake meeting venue AK, the handshake character C1 and the escort character C2 are set to one type, but a plurality of types are set respectively, and the number of speech times ( It is also possible to make the expectation of the color change success different from the handshake meeting advance notice step number), the time of shaking hands (demonstration time of the handshake meeting advance notice), and the like.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the first line content, the second line content, the third line content and the fourth line content in the handshake meeting advance notice are set to be different from each other, and each line content Is set to one type. Here, a plurality of types of speech contents of each time are set, and the expectation degree of the color change success can be made to differ depending on the speech contents. Moreover, it is also possible to set a speech content according to the kind of handshake character. Furthermore, the handshake character can be made to be selected by the player by operating the selection button 19A and the effect button 18A, for example, in a preset period such as a customer waiting state.

(The flow of directing a kiss kisses' notice)
Using FIG. 91, the presentation flow of the throwing kiss notice will be described.

  First, when the throwing kiss announcement is started, a predetermined character appears at a predetermined position on the display unit 140 first. In the present embodiment, the throwing kiss notice is executed along with the start of the fluctuation display (variation effect) of the effect pattern.

  The character which has appeared either casts a heart toward any of the already displayed icons (hold icon or fluctuating icon) or throws away without performing a kisses and disappears from the display unit 140. When the character leaves and disappears from the display unit 140, the throwing kiss notice ends.

  When a character kisses a kisses, a heart hits the icon targeted by the kisses, and a predetermined effect is generated on the icon. Then, after the effect disappears, if the display mode of the icon changes, the character performs an operation according to the success of the change of the display mode, and then disappears.

  On the other hand, if the display mode of the icon does not change after the effect disappears, the character performs an operation according to the failure of the change of the display mode and then disappears.

(Example of the presentation of the throwing kiss notice)
Next, an example of presentation of a handshake meeting advance notice will be described.

  First, a state in which the throwing kiss notice is executed after the holding icon to be subjected to the throwing kiss notice changes to the special mode will be described with reference to FIGS. For example, as shown in FIG. 92 (a), the hold icon A21 in the normal mode is displayed on the first display portion 141a of the first hold icon display area 141, and the hold icon A20 in the normal mode is displayed in the fluctuating icon display area 142. When displayed, it is assumed that the fluctuation display (variation effect) of the effect pattern is performed.

  Then, the game ball enters the first starting opening 6, the first special view is newly generated, and the first starting opening winning designation command is the effect control board 102 according to the first special view being held. It is determined that the throwing kiss notice is to be executed in the start winning process, and the throwing kiss notice is determined to be the scenario 93.

  In this case, as shown in FIG. 92 (b), the hold icon A22 corresponding to the above-mentioned newly generated first special view hold is displayed in the normal mode, and then stop display of the effect design showing a loss is performed At the same time, the fluctuating icon A20 is erased.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 92 (c), when the variable display of the effect pattern is started, the reserved icons A21 to A22 shift to the changing icon display area 142 and the first display portion 141a, respectively. Here, the hold icon A21 is changed from the hold icon A21 to a changing icon A21 in order to shift to the changing icon display area 142. In addition, the display mode of the holding icon A22 changes to the second special mode 13 (red) along with the shift to the first display unit 141a.

  Then, the game ball enters the first starting opening 6, the first special view is newly generated, and the first starting opening winning designation command is the effect control board 102 according to the first special view being held. It is assumed that it is determined that the throwing kiss notice is not to be executed in the start winning process.

  In this case, first, as shown in FIG. 93 (a), the hold icon A23 corresponding to the newly generated first special view hold is displayed in the normal mode, and then the stop display of the effect design showing a loss is displayed. At the same time, the fluctuating icon A21 is erased.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 93 (b), when the variable display of the effect symbol is started, the holding icons A22 to A23 shift to the changing icon display area 142 and the first display portion 141a, respectively, and the throwing kiss is notified in advance. The character C3 concerned appears, and a changing icon change notice is started. Here, the hold icon A22 shifts from the hold icon A22 to the changing icon A22 in order to shift to the changing icon display area, and the display mode is changed from the second special mode 13 (red) to the second special mode according to the shift. Change to 14 (zebra pattern).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 93 (c), the character C3 performs a throwing kiss and flies the heart HT toward a predetermined icon. The icon for skipping the heart HT is determined by the normal icon display mode scenario indicated by the normal icon display mode scenario data stored in the effect information suspension storage area of the sub RAM 102c, and in this case, it is directed to the fluctuating icon A20. It is assumed that the heart HT has been skipped.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 94 (a), when the heart HT strikes the fluctuating icon A20, a predetermined effect is superimposed on the fluctuating icon A20, making the fluctuating icon A20 difficult to see or invisible. (Not shown).

  Thereafter, when the predetermined effect is erased, as shown in FIG. 94 (b), the display mode of the in-motion icon A22 changes from the second special mode 14 to the second special mode 15 (rainbow), and A change notification image HG notifying that the display mode of the icon has been changed by “20% up” is displayed in the vicinity of the fluctuating icon A22 which is the target of the throwing kiss notice, and the display mode of the icon from the voice output device 15 A voice notifying of the change of is output (for example, "power-up" is emitted by the voice of the character C3), and the illumination device 16 for effect performs the illumination effect in a mode dedicated to the change. Note that, in the present embodiment, the change notification image HG is formed of an image including the text “power up”, but the display mode is not limited to this, and can be set as appropriate.

  Then, after the character C3 performs an operation according to the success of the change in the display mode (in FIG. 94 (b), an operation of spreading both hands with a smile), it is erased as shown in FIG. 94 (c). .

  Next, the throwing kiss announcement will be described using another specific example. For example, as shown in FIG. 95 (a), when the hold icons A30 and A31 of the normal mode (white) are displayed on the first display portion 141a and the second display portion 141b of the first hold icon display area 141. It is assumed that stop display of the effect pattern indicating a loss has been performed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 95 (b), the pending icons A30 and A31 displayed on the first display unit 141a and the second display unit 141b are shifted to the changing icon display area 142 and the first display unit 141a, respectively. At the same time, when the variable display of the effect pattern is started, the character C3 relating to the throwing kiss notice appears. In addition, since the hold icon A30 is shifted to the changing icon display area 142, it changes from the hold icon A30 to the changing icon A30.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 95 (c), the character C3 throws a kisses to fly the heart HT toward a predetermined icon. Here, it is assumed that the heart HT is blown toward the fluctuating icon A30.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 96 (a), when the heart HT strikes the fluctuating icon A30, a predetermined effect is superimposed on the fluctuating icon A30, and the fluctuating icon A30 becomes difficult to recognize or invisible. (Not shown).

  After that, when the predetermined effect is erased, as shown in FIG. 96 (b), the display mode of the fluctuating icon A30 is changed to the second special mode 11 (white), and from the audio output device 15, the display mode is changed. A voice notifying of the change is output (for example, "power-up" is emitted by the voice of the character C3), and the illumination device 16 for effect performs the illumination effect in a mode dedicated to the change.

  Then, the character C3 performs an operation according to the success of the change in the display mode, and then is erased as shown in FIG. 96 (c).

  As described above, when the changing icon changes due to the throwing kiss notice, the display of the change notification image HG by the image display device 14, the occurrence of “power-up” by the audio output device 15, and the effect lighting device 16. Since it is notified that the changing icon has changed by the illumination effect according to the aspect dedicated to the change, the player can easily recognize that the changing icon has changed.

  In the present embodiment, in addition to the change notification image HG, the fact that the changing icon has changed is also notified by the character C3 performing a successful operation according to the change of the changing icon. As described above, since it is notified that the changing icon has changed due to the shape and the character, it is easy for the player to understand that the changing icon has changed.

  In the present embodiment, the image display device 14, the audio output device 15, and the effect illumination device 16 notify that the changing icon has changed, but the notification is a part of these various effect devices ( For example, any one or two of the image display device 14, the audio output device 15, and the effect illumination device 16 may be used.

  Furthermore, in FIG. 92 to FIG. 96, a specific example has been described in which the throwing kiss notice is given to the fluctuating icon, but similarly to the holding icon, the change of the throwing kiss notice and the display mode of the icon Notification is executed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, notification of the change in the display mode of the icon is performed only when the shape of the icon does not change but the color of the icon changes, but the display mode is also performed when the shape of the icon changes. It is also possible to notify of the change of As a result, it is possible to make the player easily recognize the change in the icon display mode, and to suppress the decrease in the rendering effect due to the change in the icon display mode.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, “power-up 20%” is displayed in the change notification image HG, but the “20%” part is based on the display mode before the change and the display mode after the change. It can also be made selectable. Also, the color and size of the change notification image HG can be changed instead of the "20%" portion based on the display mode before the change and the display mode after the change.

  Further, notification of the change in the display mode of the icon is not limited to the present embodiment, and can be set as appropriate. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the notification of the change of the display mode of the icon is performed for the change of the display mode of the icon performed through the action of the throwing kiss by the character C3, but such an action For example, it can also be performed for a change in the display mode of the icon that is suddenly performed when the icon is shifted.

  Also, in the present embodiment, the throwing kiss notice is performed based on the preliminary determination result, but the jackpot determination result of the special view determination information to be the target of the throwing kiss notice, the special symbol determination result, or the special figure change It is also possible to do based on the pattern determination result.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the throwing kiss notice is executed at the start of the variable display of the effect pattern, but the execution timing of the throwing kiss notice is not limited to this, and is appropriately set according to the contents of the change production. can do. As another execution timing of the throwing kiss notice, it develops to a predetermined cut-in notice, a speech notice, the appearance of a character, or an SP reach effect at the time of a temporary stop or re-variation of pseudo ream or so-called step-up notice. At the time of execution of the development effect to be performed, and when the reach state is established, it is possible to appropriately set to a predetermined operation effect or the like by the effect product device 17 or the like.

  Further, in the present embodiment, one heart is blown toward one icon at one notice of a throwing kiss, and it is notified whether or not the display mode changes once for one icon. However, it is predicted whether or not the display mode changes multiple times with respect to one icon, in which a plurality of hearts are blown toward one icon at the same time or every predetermined time interval in one throwing kiss notice. May be performed. In this case, it is also possible to execute notification of the change in the display mode of the icon each time the display mode of the icon changes, and also for one throwing kiss notice (after the last heart is skipped ) It is also possible to perform notification of changes in the display mode of the icons once at once.

  Furthermore, it may be possible to give notice of whether or not the display mode changes with respect to a plurality of icons by sending a heart to a plurality of icons in a single notice of the throwing kiss. In this case, it is also possible to execute notification of the change in the display mode of the icons for all the icons whose display modes have changed, and the display mode of the icons with respect to some of the icons whose display modes have changed. It is also possible to notify of the change of

(Overview of pre-reading zone effects, zone turn effects and zone precursor effects)
An outline of the pre-reading zone effect, the zone turning effect and the zone precursor effect will be described with reference to FIG.

  The pre-reading zone effect is an advance notice effect that suggests the jackpot winning expectation level over one or more fluctuation effects, and the zone turning effect is an advance notice effect asking whether or not the pre-reading zone effect is executed, It is performed using a special symbol in the variable display and stop display of the production symbol. The zone precursor effect is an advance notice effect for suggesting or notifying execution of the pre-reading zone effect, and is performed by displaying an icon in the pre-reading zone effect informing mode or the pre-reading zone effect informing mode. In the present embodiment, the pre-reading zone effect, the zone turning effect, and the pre-zone effect are executed in the variable effect in the effect mode A, and are performed on the basis of the preliminary determination result indicated by the start opening prize designation command. It is a kind of preview effect).

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 97 (a-1), when the zone turning success effect is executed in the variation display (variation production) of the production symbol, the time when the next variation display of the production symbol is started The pre-reading zone effect is started from. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 97 (a-2), when a zone turning failure effect is executed in the fluctuation display (variation effect) of the production symbol, the prefetch zone is started from the start of the fluctuation display of the next production symbol. The production is not performed.

  Here, when a zone turning success effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 97 (b-1), “prefetching” is initially performed as the left symbol of the left area of the display unit 140 when the change effect is being performed. The symbol stops, and then the “zone” symbol stops as the right symbol on the right side area of the display unit 140, suggesting the execution of the pre-reading zone effect, and finally, “Push as a middle symbol on the central area of the display unit 140 The symbol stops. In this way, all special symbols set in advance ("prefetched" symbol, "zone" symbol and "stop" symbol) are stopped to become "special symbol aligned", and pre-reading zone effect is executed It is informed.

  On the other hand, when zone turning failure effect 1 is executed as zone turning failure effect, as shown in FIG. 97 (b-2), when the fluctuation effect is being performed, the symbol "prefetch" is first made as the left symbol Is stopped, then the “zone” symbol is stopped as the right symbol, and finally, “previous” symbol is attempted to stop as the middle symbol, suggesting execution of pre-reading zone effect, but it slips without stopping The normal effect pattern stops as a middle pattern. As described above, when only a part of the special symbol set in advance is stopped, it becomes "special symbol irregular", and it is informed that the pre-reading zone effect is not performed.

  When a special symbol appears as a zone turning effect, the normal effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 displayed until then may be displayed in a contracted state in the upper right portion of the display unit 140, for example. For example, when a special symbol appears while the normal effect pattern is displayed in a variable manner, the reduced normal effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are variably displayed in the upper right portion of the display unit 140 along with the appearance. Then, when the variable display ends and special symbol alignment or special symbol misalignment is performed, the same stopping time (0.8 seconds in the present embodiment) as the normal case in the upper right portion of the display unit 140, A stop display of reduced normal effect designs TZ1 to TZ3 (effect symbols indicating a loss) is performed. Furthermore, when special symbol alignment or special symbol unevenness ends and new variable display is started, the special symbol is erased and the normal effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are displayed while being returned to the original size It moves to the normal position in the part 140, and the variation display of the effect pattern as usual is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 97 (c-1) and 97 (c-2), the change in size of the changing icon performed in conjunction with the zone turning effect will be described. In the present embodiment, the size of the fluctuating icon increases in accordance with the stop of the special symbol performed as the zone turning effect.

  In the zone turning success effect, the size of the fluctuating icon increases by one step according to the stop of the “prefetch” symbol, and the size of the fluctuating icon increases by one step according to the stop of the “zone” symbol, and the second step The size of the fluctuating icon is further increased by one step according to the stop of the "rush" symbol, and becomes the third step. In addition, when the zone turning success effect is finished and the pre-reading zone effect is being executed, the fluctuating icon is maintained at the size of the third step.

  On the other hand, in zone turning failure effect 1, the size of the fluctuating icon is increased by one step according to the stop of the "prefetch" symbol, and the size of the fluctuating icon is further increased by one step according to the stop of the "zone" symbol. In the second stage, the sliding of the "Plunge" symbol returns the size of the floating icon to its original normal size.

  As described above, by gradually increasing the size of the changing icon which the player can easily pay attention to, it is possible to have a stronger sense of expectation for the pre-reading zone effect.

(Example of pre-read zone effect, zone precursor effect and zone effect effect)
Next, an example of effects of pre-reading zone effect, zone precursor effect and zone turning effect will be described.

  Here, the game ball enters the first starting opening 6 when the number of the first special view reserve is "2", and the first special view reserve is newly generated, and the first special view reserve is generated. Accordingly, the first start opening winning combination designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 102, and in the start opening winning processing, finally, the pre-reading zone effect scenario No “4” shown in FIG. 41 and the precursor effect scenario “14 shown in FIG. An example of effect when the icon display mode scenario “8” shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 98 (a), when the first to third display portions 141a to 141c of the first on-hold icon display area 141 are displaying the on-hold icons A40 to A42 in the normal mode, an effect showing a loss is shown. When the stop display of the symbol is performed, the fluctuating icon displayed in the fluctuating icon display area 142 is erased.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 98 (b), when it is the start timing of the change display of the special symbol corresponding to the hold icon A40, the hold icons A40 to A42 change the icon display area 142 during fluctuation, the first display portion 141a, While shifting to the 2nd indicator 141b, the fluctuation indicatory of production design is started. In addition, since the hold icon A40 is shifted to the changing icon display area 142, it changes from the hold icon A40 to the changing icon A40.

  And, when the fluctuation display (the fluctuation production) of the production design is executed, the game ball enters the 1st starting opening 6, the 1st special figure reservation newly occurs, the 1st special figure reservation concerned In response to the occurrence of the first start opening winning combination designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 102, in the processing at the time of starting opening winning, pre-reading zone effect scenario No “4” shown in FIG. It is assumed that "-3" is selected.

  In this case, first, as shown in FIG. 98 (c), the hold icon A43 corresponding to the newly generated first special view hold is displayed in the third special mode 41 and shown in FIG. 98 (d). Thus, the suspension icons A41 and A42 and the fluctuating icon A40 corresponding to the previous suspension for the newly generated first special view suspension change to the third special mode 41 (corresponding to the suspension icon change notice).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 99 (a), as shown in FIG. 99 (b), when the variation display of the effect design started in FIG. 98 (b) is stopped and displayed with the combination of the effect designs showing a loss. , The fluctuating icon A40 is erased.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 99 (c), when the change display of the effect pattern corresponding to the hold icon A41 is started, each of the hold icons A41 to A43 is in the changing icon display area 142, the first display section 141a, while shifting to the second display portion 141b, the display mode of the icon A43 which is an execution target of the prefetch zone effect is changed to the third special mode 21 (the prefetch zone effect suggestive mode 2), and the prefetch zone effect is not performed The display modes of the icons A41 and A42, which are the icons A41 and A42, change to the third special mode 51 (pre-reading zone effect suggestion mode 2). In addition, since the hold icon A41 is shifted to the changing icon display area 142, it changes from the hold icon A41 to the changing icon A41.

  Here, when the game ball enters the first starting opening 6, the icon is already displayed in the pre-reading zone effect suggestion mode 2, so as shown in FIG. Zone effect non-target icon) A44 is displayed on the third display portion 141 c in the same pre-reading zone effect indication mode 2.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 100 (a), the fluctuation display of the production design corresponding to the fluctuating icon A41 is the production design of the production design two before the fluctuation display of the production design corresponding to the icon A43 which is the zone effect target icon. Since the variable display is performed, zone turning effects are executed during the variable display of the effect pattern.

  Here, since the zone turning effect is determined to be a zone turning success effect, as shown in FIG. 100 (a) to FIG. 100 (c), the “look ahead” symbol, “zone” symbol, as zone turning effect And, it is informed that the "rush" symbol is temporarily stopped in order, and the pre-reading zone effect is executed. Here, the size of the fluctuating icon A 42 gradually increases in accordance with the stop of the "prefetch" symbol, the stop of the "zone" symbol, and the stop of the "rush" symbol.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 101 (a), when the fluctuation display of the effect design started in FIG. 99 (c) is completely stopped and displayed in a state of being aligned with the special symbol, the fluctuation icon A41 is erased Ru. In this case, the normal effect design may be sequentially stopped and displayed in the state of being shrunk to the upper right portion of the display unit 140 of the image display device 14 corresponding to the stop display of each of the three special symbols. It becomes a combination of the production design which becomes a loss.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 101 (b), when the variable display of the effect pattern corresponding to the reserved icon A42 is started, the prefetch zone background image HK indicating that it is the prefetch zone is displayed, and the BGM and the illumination mode are displayed. By switching from one of the effect mode A to one dedicated to the pre-reading zone effect, pre-reading zone effect (corresponding to continuous advance notice effect) is started. That is, although the start icons have not been changed from the start time of the hold icon change advance notice and the continuous advance notice effect, the execution times are performed so as to overlap.

  Further, each of the hold icons A42 to A44 is shifted to the changing icon display area 142, the first display unit 141a, and the second display unit 141b. Here, since the hold icon A42 is shifted to the changing icon display area 142, it changes from the hold icon A42 to the changing icon A42.

  Furthermore, the display mode of the hold icon A43, which is an execution target of the pre-reading zone effect, changes to the third special mode 31 (pre-reading zone effect notification mode), and the changing icon A42 and the hold icon A44 which are non-target of the pre-reading zone effect Is changed to the third special mode 61 (pre-reading zone effect notification mode). In addition, the size of the fluctuating icon A 42 continues to be the third size.

  Here, when the game ball enters the first starting opening 6, since the icon is already displayed in the pre-reading zone effect notification mode, as shown in FIG. 101 (b), the hold icon (zone related to the ball entry) The effect non-target icon) A45 is displayed on the third display portion 141 c in the same pre-reading zone effect notification mode 6.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 101 (c), when the fluctuation display of the effect design started in FIG. 101 (b) is stopped and displayed with the effect design indicating a loss, it is displayed in the fluctuating icon display area 142 The fluctuating icon A42 of the third special aspect 31 is erased.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 102 (a), when the fluctuation display (variation effect) of the effect pattern corresponding to the hold icon A43 related to the starting opening prize designation command that has caused the pre-reading zone effect is started, the hold icon Each of A43 to A45 is shifted to the changing icon display area 142, the first display portion 141a, and the second display portion 141b, and the pre-reading zone effect is continued. In addition, since the hold icon A43 is shifted to the changing icon display area 142, it changes from the hold icon A43 to the changing icon A43.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 102 (b), when the production symbols TZ1 and TZ3 are temporarily stopped in the variable display of the production symbol and the reach state is established, the display mode of the fluctuating icon A43 changes to the third special mode 33. Then, the color of the main silhouette portion turns red, and the pre-reading zone effect continues.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 103 (a), when the predetermined SP reach effect is developed, the pending icons A44 and A45 displayed until just before that are not displayed, and the display mode of the changing icon A43 is the third In special mode 34, the color of the main silhouette portion becomes a zebra pattern, and the pre-reading zone effect is ended.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 103 (b), when the stop display of the effect design (“7” match) indicating a big hit is performed, the silhouettes of the seven persons pertaining to the fluctuating icon A43 are notified of the big hit. As a result, I raise my hands and express joy.

  As described above, when the pre-reading zone effect is executed, the pre-reading zone effect is a pre-reading zone effect suggesting mode before the pre-reading zone effect is executed, the zone precursor effect that suggests the execution of the pre-reading zone effect Is done. Here, in the pre-reading zone effect suggesting mode, the expectation zone 1 has high expectation from the pre-reading zone effect suggesting mode 1 and the pre-reading zone effect suggesting mode 1 (the third special aspect 1 and the third special aspect 4). A prefetch zone effect suggestion mode 2 (third special mode 2, third special mode 5) is provided. In the following, the zone precursor effect by the prefetch zone effect suggestion mode 1 is referred to as "zone precursor effect 1", and the zone flag effect by the prefetch zone effect suggestion mode 2 is referred to as "zone precursor effect 2".

  The pre-reading zone effect suggestion mode 1 is an icon display mode dedicated to the zone precursor effect 1, and the characters “? Zone?” Are attached as the icon display mode, and the number of people of the silhouette of the person is configured by three people. In addition, the pre-reading zone effect suggestion mode 2 is also an icon display mode dedicated to zone pre-event effect 2 with the letters “Δ zone Δ” attached as an icon display mode, and the number of people's silhouettes is five There is. Therefore, the player suggests that the pre-reading zone effect is to be executed by looking at the icons (the pending icon and the fluctuating icon) displayed in the pre-reading zone effect suggestion mode 1 or the pre-reading zone effect suggestion mode 2. Since it is possible to easily recognize that the prognostic effect is being performed, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the effect of the effect.

  When the pre-reading zone is being executed, it is informed that pre-reading zone effect is being executed by setting the display mode of the icon to the pre-reading zone effect notification mode (the third special mode 3 and the third special mode 6) Zone notification production is performed.

  The pre-reading zone effect notification mode is an icon display mode dedicated to zone notification effect, with the letter “○ zone ○” attached as the icon display mode, and the number of people in the silhouette is seven. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the zone notification effect is being performed by looking at the icons (the hold icon and the changing icon) displayed in the pre-reading zone effect notification mode. It is possible to prevent the reduction of the effect.

  Further, zone precursor effects 1 and 2 and zone notification effect are provided as effects indicating the prefetch zone execution expectation degree, and the prefetch zone execution expectation degrees indicated by each effect are zone precursor effect 1 <zone precursor effect 2 <zone It is an announcement effect. And since the icon display mode according to zone precursor effect 1, the icon display mode according to zone precursor effect 2 and the icon display mode according to zone notification effect are different from each other, the player can easily expect the prefetching zone execution expectation. It can be recognized.

  Further, in the present embodiment, although there are one type of prefetch zone effect, a plurality of types of prefetch zone effects different in the jackpot winning expectation may be provided. In this case, a first pre-reading zone effect and a second pre-reading zone effect having a higher jackpot expectation than the first pre-reading zone effect are provided, and the second pre-reading zone effect is via the first pre-reading zone effect. It is also possible that there is a case where it is executed from the first pre-reading zone effect and a case where it is suddenly executed without passing through the first pre-reading zone effect. Then, the type of pre-reading zone effect to be executed can be suggested according to the type of zone precursor effect.

  The icon according to the third special aspect is the same for the shape of the main silhouette portion regardless of the type, but the color of the main silhouette portion differs depending on the type, and the jackpot winning expectation differs depending on the color. Also, the icons according to the third special mode differ depending on the type of characters attached to the number of people in the secondary silhouette part (“? Zone?”, “Δ zone Δ”, “○ zone ○”) The icon according to the third special aspect is a letter attached with the number of people in the secondary silhouette part, and the prefetching execution expectation is different.

  Therefore, when the pre-reading zone suggestion effect and the pre-reading zone notification effect are executed, if attention is paid to the display mode of the icon, the player can also recognize the big hit winning expectation in addition to the pre-reading zone execution expectation. Therefore, the interest of the game is improved.

  In the present embodiment, the elements constituting the third special modes 1 to 6 suggest the prefetching execution expectation and the jackpot winning expectation, but the suggested content is not limited to this, and may be set appropriately. it can. For example, depending on the elements constituting the third special aspects 1 to 6, an expectation degree at which a specific effect such as SP reach or SPSP reach or pseudo ream is executed, or a specific type of jackpot such as a probability variation jackpot or long jack It is possible to be able to indicate the degree of expectation to be made.

Furthermore, although the prefetch execution expectation degree and the big hit winning expectation degree are suggested or notified by the display mode of the icon, these suggestions or notifications are not the display mode of the icon, for example, the display mode of the effect pattern or the feature for effect It can also be performed by other specific effects such as the operation mode of the movable part 17A of the device 17. Although the zone precursor effect is performed on an icon, it may be performed using another image such as a background image or effect pattern displayed on the display unit 140. In addition, the zone precursor effect can be performed not using the image display device 14 but using other effect devices such as the sound output device 15, the effect illumination device 16, and the effect product device 17.

  Further, depending on the elements constituting the icon display mode, the number of suggested contents is not limited to the embodiment, and can be set as appropriate. In addition, as an element constituting an icon display mode that suggests a predetermined matter, the shape, size, operation mode, etc. of the icon can be appropriately set.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the pre-reading zone effect and the pre-zone effect effect and the zone notification effect are performed based on the pre-determination result, but the special-image determination to be the target of the pre-reading zone effect and zone pre-event effect and zone notification effect It is also possible to carry out based on the jackpot determination result of information, the special symbol determination result, or the special figure fluctuation pattern determination result.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the pre-reading zone effect is executed at the start of the variable display of effect symbols, and the zone precursor effect and zone notification effect are executed at the time of winning or on hold shift, but the execution timing of these effects is The invention is not limited to this, and can be appropriately set according to the contents of the effect of the fluctuation effect. As other execution timings of these effects, for example, temporary stop or re-variation in pseudo ream, step-up notice of so-called step-up notice, development to predetermined cut-in notice, speech notice, appearance of character, or super reach At the time of execution of the development effect to be performed, and when the reach state is established, it is possible to appropriately set to a predetermined operation effect or the like by the effect product device 17.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the pre-reading zone effect is started, the zone turning success effect is always executed before the start, but the zone turning success effect is not performed, and the fluctuation display of the design pattern The preview zone effect may be performed immediately at the start of the re-variation display (including the re-variation display in the effect) or halfway through.

(Example of production of continuous step up notice production)
An example of the effect of the continuous step-up notice effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 104 and 105.

  Here, if the continuous step-up notice effect scenario No “14” shown in FIG. 46 (a) is finally selected in the starting opening winning process corresponding to the hold icon A13 in the effect mode A (normal game state) An example of the effect of will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 104 (a), when the first to third display portions 141a to 141c of the first on-hold icon display area 141 are displaying the on-hold icons A11 to A13 in the normal mode, an effect showing a loss is shown. When the stop display of the symbol is performed, the fluctuating icon displayed in the fluctuating icon display area 142 is erased.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 104 (b), when it is the start timing of the change display of the special symbol corresponding to the hold icon A11, the hold icons A11 to A13 are in the fluctuating icon display area 142, the first display portion 141a, the first While shifting to the second display portion 141b, the fluctuation display of the effect pattern is performed, and the fluctuation effect is started. In addition, since the hold icon A11 is shifted to the changing icon display area 142, it changes from the hold icon A11 to the changing icon A11.

  At this time, the first step effect of the continuous step-up notice effect is started, and the movable portion 17A of the effect character device 17 moves to the first effect position (moving width: small) located in front of the image display device 14. While the rendering operation is performed, the plurality of LEDs provided inside emit blue light, and the blue effect image EFG is displayed at a position corresponding to the movable portion 17A of the image display device 14.

  Then, when the effect period (for example, 3 seconds) of the first step effect elapses, the movable portion 17A of the effect product device 17 returns to the initial position (standby position) and the light emission of the internal LED stops, The effect image EFG displayed on the display device 14 is also erased.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 104 (c), when the combination time of the effect symbols indicating the loss is stopped and displayed on the image display device 14 after the effect time of the change effect has passed, it is displayed in the changing icon display area 142 The changing icon A11 is deleted.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 104 (d), when the start timing of the variation display of the special symbol corresponding to the holding icon A12 is reached, the holding icons A12 to A13 shift to the changing icon display area 142 and the first display portion 141a. At the same time, the variable display of the effect pattern is started. In addition, since the hold icon A12 is shifted to the changing icon display area 142, it changes from the hold icon A12 to the changing icon A12.

  At this time, the second step effect of the continuous step-up notice effect is started, and the movable portion 17A of the effect character device 17 moves to the second effect position (moving width: middle) located in front of the image display device 14. While performing the rendering operation, the plurality of LEDs provided inside emit green light, and a green effect image EFG is displayed at a position corresponding to the movable portion 17A of the image display device 14.

  Then, when the effect period (for example, 3 seconds) of the second step effect elapses, the movable portion 17A of the effect product device 17 returns to the initial position (standby position) and the light emission of the internal LED stops, The effect image EFG displayed on the display device 14 is also erased.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 104 (e), when the combination time of the effect design indicating the loss is stopped and displayed on the image display device 14 after the effect time of the change effect has passed, it is displayed in the changing icon display area 142 The changing icon A11 is deleted. When the game ball enters the first starting opening 6 at this timing and a first special view is newly generated, a second icon 141 corresponding to the first special image is additionally displayed on the second display portion 141b. Ru.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 104 (f), when it is the start timing of the change display of the special symbol corresponding to the hold icon A13 to be subjected to the continuous step-up notice effect, the hold icons A13 to A14 are changing icon display area While shifting to the first display portion 141a 142, the variable display of the effect pattern is started. In addition, since the hold icon A13 is shifted to the changing icon display area 142, it changes from the hold icon A13 to the changing icon A13.

  At this time, the third step effect of the continuous step-up notice effect is started, and the movable portion 17A of the effect character device 17 moves to the third effect position (moving width: large) located in front of the image display device 14. While performing the rendering operation, the plurality of LEDs provided inside emit red light, and a red effect image EFG is displayed at a position corresponding to the movable portion 17A of the image display device 14.

  Then, when the effect period (for example, 3 seconds) of the third step effect elapses, the movable portion 17A of the effect character apparatus 17 returns to the initial position (standby position) and the light emission of the internal LED stops, The effect image EFG displayed on the display device 14 is also erased, and the continuous step-up notice effect is finished.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 105 (a), when the rendering symbols TZ1 and TZ3 are temporarily stopped at the same symbol in the variation display of the rendering symbol, the reach state is established and normal reach rendering is started. At this time, the variable display continues for the special special symbol TZ4.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 105 (b), when a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) elapses from the start of normal reach effect, transition effect (development effect) is suggested that suggests development to SP / SPSP reach effect, The rendering symbols TZ1 to TZ3 move to the upper right portion of the display unit of the image display device 14 in the contracted state, and change to a rendering symbol of the second display mode.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 105C, when a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds) elapses from the start of the transition effect (development effect), an effect image EG in which the ally character and the enemy character battle is displayed. SP reach production is started. At this time, the variable display of the effect pattern TZ2 and the special effect pattern TZ4 continues.

  As described above, the step effect is performed so as to step up to any one of the first to fourth steps over one or a plurality of variable displays by continuous step-up notice effects, and the degree of expectation of the jackpot winning is Since the notification is given, it is possible to improve the interest of the game with the player's sense of expectation.

  In addition, in this embodiment, although the production period of continuous step-up notice production was the same in the 1st-4th step production, you may differ the production period of each step production. In that case, the first step effect <second step effect <third step effect <fourth step effect may be adopted, or vice versa. In addition, the rendering periods of any two or three step effects may be the same, and the rendering periods of the remaining step effects may be varied to be long or short.

  In addition, instead of sequentially executing the first to fourth step effects, for example, step skipping such as performing one step or a plurality of step effects such as executing the third step effect following the first step effect Continuous step-up notice effects may be executed in the mode of. Moreover, when the final step effect is the same, it is preferable to set so that the expectation of the jackpot when the step skipping is performed is higher than when the step skipping is not performed.

  Also, although the movable portion 17A of the effect character device 17 is moved to any of the first effect position to the third effect position in the first to fourth step effects, the same is applied in all step effects. You may make it move to an effect position.

(Example of production of chance eye preview production)
An example of the effect of the chance eye advance notice effect will be described with reference to FIG.

  Here, in the processing at the time of starting opening winning corresponding to the hold icon A13 in the effect mode A (normal game state), the case of the chance eye advance notice effect scenario No “9” shown in FIG. 46 (b) is finally selected. An example of the effect will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 106 (a), when the first to third display portions 141a to 141c of the first on-hold icon display area 141 are displaying the on-hold icons A11 to A13 in the normal mode, an effect showing a loss is shown. When the stop display of the symbol is performed, the fluctuating icon displayed in the fluctuating icon display area 142 is erased.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 106 (b), when it is the start timing of the variation display of the special symbol corresponding to the suspension icon A11, the suspension icons A11 to A13 change during the icon display area 142, the first display portion 141a, the first While shifting to the second display portion 141b, the fluctuation display of the effect pattern is performed, and the fluctuation effect is started. In addition, since the hold icon A11 is shifted to the changing icon display area 142, it changes from the hold icon A11 to the changing icon A11.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 106 (c), when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the change production, and the timing at which the production design is temporarily stopped, chance eye notice production is started, and the production design TZ1, the production design The effect pattern of the blue color is temporarily stopped in the order of TZ3 and the effect pattern TZ2, and a chance eye which is a combination of the effect pattern of the same color is derived.

  At this time, a white effect image EFG is displayed around the rendering symbols TZ1 to TZ3, and when a predetermined time elapses from temporary stopping of the rendering symbols, the stopping display of the rendering symbols TZ1 to TZ3 and the special rendering symbol TZ4 is performed and the fluctuation occurs The effect ends, and the fluctuating icon A11 displayed in the fluctuating icon display area 142 is erased.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 106 (d), when the start timing of the variation display of the special symbol corresponding to the holding icon A12 is reached, the holding icons A12 to A13 shift to the changing icon display area 142 and the first display portion 141a. At the same time, the fluctuation display of the effect pattern is performed and the fluctuation effect is started. In addition, since the hold icon A12 is shifted to the changing icon display area 142, it changes from the hold icon A12 to the changing icon A12.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 106 (e), when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the change production, and the timing for the production design to be temporarily stopped, the order of the production design TZ1, the production design TZ3, the production design TZ2 The green colored production design is temporarily stopped, and a chance eye that is a combination of the same colored production design is derived.

  At this time, a white effect image EFG is displayed around the rendering symbols TZ1 to TZ3, and when a predetermined time elapses from temporary stopping of the rendering symbols, the stopping display of the rendering symbols TZ1 to TZ3 and the special rendering symbol TZ4 is performed and the fluctuation occurs The effect ends, and the fluctuating icon A12 displayed in the fluctuating icon display area 142 is erased. When the game ball enters the first starting opening 6 at this timing and a first special view is newly generated, a second icon 141 corresponding to the first special image is additionally displayed on the second display portion 141b. Ru.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 106 (f), when it is the start timing of the change display of the special symbol corresponding to the hold icon A13 which is the object of the chance eye preview effect, the hold icons A13 to A14 are changing icon display area 142 , While shifting to the first display portion 141a, the variable display of the effect pattern is performed, and the variable effect is started. In addition, since the hold icon A13 is shifted to the changing icon display area 142, it changes from the hold icon A13 to the changing icon A13. In addition, since the rendition performed after this becomes the same as the rendition example of FIG. 105 mentioned above, the description here is omitted.

  As described above, the jackpot win is won by the chance eye of the same color being derived and displayed over one or a plurality of fluctuation effects by the chance eye preview effect, or being displayed by being stepped up to the chance of a different color. Since the degree of expectation of is notified, it is possible to improve the interest of the game with the player's sense of expectation just before the end of the fluctuation production.

  In the present embodiment, the same color is displayed regardless of which chance eye is displayed for the effect image displayed around the rendering pattern when the chance eye is derived and displayed in the chance eye preview production. However, it may be changed in accordance with the color of the presentation pattern that constitutes the chance eye.

  Also, instead of stepping up the order of the production symbols that make up the chance eyes in the order of blue symbols, green symbols, and red symbols, in a step-by-step mode that the color of the production symbols that make up the chance eyes is one step A chance eye advance notice may be performed. In addition, when the color of the final chance eye is the same, it is preferable to set so that the expectation of the jackpot when step skipping is performed is higher than when step skipping is not performed.

  In addition, in the chance eye advance notice effect that is executed over a plurality of times of variable stage effects, instead of executing the chance eye notice effect so that the color of the production pattern that constitutes the chance eye steps up, a plurality of chance eyes May be determined at random and derived and displayed. In addition, although the chance eye was constituted by a normal effect pattern, the chance eye may be constituted by a combination of a dedicated effect pattern, and the chance eye is constituted by a dedicated one or two effect symbols It is also good.

(Example of production of the announcement notice production of speech)
With reference to FIG. 107, an example of the production of the speech announcement effect will be described.

  Here, in the processing at the time of starting opening winning corresponding to the holding icon B23 in the effect mode B (high probability time short game state), the dialogue notification effect scenario No “7” shown in FIG. 48 (a) is finally selected, as shown in FIG. An example of effect when the icon final display mode “second special mode 21” shown in 52 is selected will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 107 (a), with the first display portion 143a and the second display portion 143b of the second held icon display area 143, the held icons B21 to B22 of the normal mode are displayed, and the third display portion 143c displays the serif notice. If the stop display of the effect pattern indicating a loss is performed while the pending icon B23 to be the object of the effect is displayed in the first special mode, the changing icon displayed in the changing icon display area 142 disappears Be done.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 107 (b), when it is the start timing of the change display of the special symbol corresponding to the hold icon B21, the hold icons B21 to B23 are in the changing icon display area 142, the first display portion 143a, the first While shifting to the second display portion 143b, the fluctuation display of the effect pattern is performed, and the fluctuation effect is started. In addition, since the hold icon B21 is shifted to the changing icon display area 142, it changes from the hold icon B21 to the changing icon B21.

  At this time, the first dialogue effect of the dialogue announcement effect is started, and a dialogue (black letters) of "that" is displayed on the character C3 and the balloon at the lower left of the display unit of the image display unit 14 and the voice output unit 15 The voice of "that?" Is output. Then, when an effect period (for example, 1.5 seconds) of the first speech effect is elapsed, the character and the balloon displayed on the image display device 14 are deleted.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 107 (c), when the combination time of the effect design indicating the loss is stopped and displayed on the image display device 14 after the effect time of the change effect elapses, it is displayed in the changing icon display area 142 The changing icon B21 is deleted.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 107 (d), when it is the start timing of the change display of the special symbol corresponding to the hold icon B22, the hold icons B22 to B23 shift to the changing icon display area 142 and the first display portion 143a. At the same time, the variable display of the effect pattern is started. In addition, since the hold icon B22 is shifted to the changing icon display area 142, the holding icon B22 becomes a changing icon B22.

  At this time, the second speech effect of the speech announcement effect is started, and a dialogue (black letter) of "Mister" is displayed in the lower part of the left side of the display of the image display 14 with the character C3 and the speech C The voice of "Motherday" is output. Then, when an effect period (for example, 1.5 seconds) of the second speech effect elapses, the character and the balloon displayed on the image display device 14 are deleted.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 107 (e), when the combination time of the effect design showing the loss is stopped and displayed on the image display device 14 after the effect time of the change effect passes, it is displayed in the changing icon display area 142 The changing icon B22 is deleted. When the game ball enters the second starting opening 7 at this timing and a second special view is newly generated, the second icon 143 b is additionally displayed on the second display 143 b. Ru.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 107 (f), when it is the start timing of the change display of the special symbol corresponding to the hold icon B23 which is the target of the serif announcement, the hold icons B23 to B24 are changing icon display area 142, While shifting to the display portion 143a, the variable display of the effect pattern is started. In addition, since the hold icon B23 is shifted to the changing icon display area 142, the holding icon B23 becomes a changing icon B23.

  At this time, the third speech line effect of the speech announcement effect is started, and the word "hot!" Speech (red letter) is displayed on the character C3 and the balloon at the lower left of the display unit of the image display device 14 and the voice output device The voice of "Hot!" Is output from 15. In addition, it is informed that the display mode of the fluctuating icon B23 changes from the first special mode to the second special mode 21 and the generation of the effect more than the SP reach effect is determined. Then, when the effect period (for example, 1.5 seconds) of the third speech effect is elapsed, the character and the balloon displayed on the image display device 14 are deleted. In addition, since the rendition performed after this becomes the same as the rendition example of FIG. 105 mentioned above, the description here is omitted.

  As described above, various speech effects are executed over one or a plurality of fluctuation effects by the speech announcement effect, or the color of the speech displayed on the image display device 14 is stepped up, and the jackpot is expected to be won. Since the degree is notified, it is possible to improve the interest of the game with the player's sense of expectation.

  In the present embodiment, the expectation of the big hit is indicated by the content and color of the speech displayed on the image display device 14 in the announcement warning effect, but the expectation of the big hit is selected by either one. You may make it alert | report.

  In addition, when the speech advance notice effect is executed, the icon change notice during fluctuation is executed so that the display mode of the icon during fluctuation is changed after the speech effect is executed in the fluctuation effect targeted for the speech advance effect. Is preferred. In this way, it is possible to prevent the expectation of the speech effect from being faded due to the icon change notice during change.

(Example of production of effect preview production)
An example of the effect preview effect production will be described with reference to FIG.

  Here, in the start-up winning process corresponding to the hold icon B22 in the effect mode B (high probability time short game state), the effect notice effect scenario scenario “11” shown in FIG. 48 (b) is finally selected, as shown in FIG. An example of effect when the icon final display mode “second special mode 22” shown in 52 is selected will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 108 (a), the hold icon B21 in the normal mode is displayed on the first display portion 143a of the second hold icon display area 143, and the hold icon B22 to be subjected to the effect preview effect on the second display portion 143b. Is displayed in the first special mode, and when the stop display of the effect pattern indicating a loss is performed, the changing icon displayed in the changing icon display area 142 is erased.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 108 (b), when it is the start timing of the change display of the special symbol corresponding to the hold icon B21, the hold icons B21 to B22 shift to the changing icon display area 142 and the first display portion 143a. At the same time, the fluctuation display of the effect pattern is performed and the fluctuation effect is started. In addition, since the hold icon B21 is shifted to the changing icon display area 142, it changes from the hold icon B21 to the changing icon B21.

  At this time, the first effect effect of the effect advance notification effect is started, and the blue effect image EFG is displayed around the swinging effect designs TZ1 to TZ3 by starting the fluctuation display, and from the audio output device 15 Sound effects (sound effects) are output.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 108 (c), when the effect period (for example, one second) of the effect effect has passed since the first effect effect was started, it is displayed around the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3. The effect image is erased and the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 start to scroll. When a game ball enters the second starting opening 7 at this timing and a second special view is newly generated, a second icon 143 corresponding to the second special view is additionally displayed on the second display portion 143b. Ru.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 108 (d), when the combination time of the effect design indicating the loss is stopped and displayed on the image display device 14 after the effect time of the change effect elapses, it is displayed in the changing icon display area 142 The changing icon B21 is deleted.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 108 (e), when it is time to start the change display of the special symbol corresponding to the hold icon B22 which is the target of the effect preview effect, the hold icon B22 to B23 is changing in icon display area 142, While shifting to the first display portion 143a, the variable display of the effect design is started. In addition, since the hold icon B22 is shifted to the changing icon display area 142, the holding icon B22 becomes a changing icon B22.

  At this time, the second effect effect of the effect advance notification effect is started, and a green effect image EFG is displayed around the swinging effect designs TZ1 to TZ3 by starting the fluctuation display, and from the audio output device 15 Sound effects (sound effects) are output. In addition, it is informed that the display mode of the fluctuating icon B22 changes from the first special mode to the second special mode 22 so that the expectation of the jackpot is intense heat with high expectation.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 108 (f), when the effect period (for example, 1 second) of the effect effect has passed since the second effect effect was started, it is displayed around the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3. The effect image is erased and the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 start to scroll. In addition, since the rendition performed after this becomes the same as the rendition example of FIG. 105 mentioned above, the description here is omitted.

  As described above, an effect image is displayed around one or a plurality of variable displays due to the effect preview effect, or the color of the effect image to be displayed is stepped up, or the expectation of the jackpot is won. Since it is notified, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by giving the player a sense of expectation immediately after the start of the fluctuation effect.

  In the present embodiment, with respect to the effect image displayed around the effect pattern in the effect preview effect, the color of the effect image is not 1 but is stepped up in the order of blue effect, green effect, red effect and rainbow effect. The effect advance presentation may be performed in the form of step skipping in which steps or multiple steps are skipped. Further, when the colors of the final effect image are the same, it is preferable to set so that the expectation of the jackpot when the step skipping is performed is higher than when the step skipping is not performed.

  In addition, in the effect advance notice effect, instead of executing the effect advance notice effect so that the color of the effect image displayed around the effect pattern steps up over a plurality of fluctuation effects, the effect image of the same color is always generated May be displayed.

  Further, it is preferable to execute the icon change notice during change so that the display mode of the icon during change changes after the effect effect is executed in the change effect to be subjected to the effect notice effect. In this way, it is possible to prevent the expectation of the effect presentation from being faded due to the icon change notice during change.

(Time chart before and after the final production and customer production)
A time chart before and after the accurate effect and the waiting effect effect will be described with reference to FIG.

  When the game ball enters the first starting opening 6 or the second starting opening 7 at the timing of T0 and the starting condition is satisfied, the fluctuation display is started in the image display device 14 and a normal fluctuation rendering period starts, and illumination for effecting In the apparatus 16, a light emission effect is started during fluctuation.

  At timing T1, normal reach effect is started in the image display device 14 and a normal reach effect period begins, and in the effect lighting device 16, a fluctuating light emitting effect corresponding to normal reach effect is started.

  At timing T2, the SP display effect is started in the image display device 14 and an SP reach effect period starts, and the one-shot notification sound constituting the accurate effect is output in the voice output device 15, and the effect illumination device 16 and the handle illumination device At 33, the accurate light emission effect constituting the accurate effect is started.

  At timing T3, in the image display device 14, the result derivation effect of deriving the result of the SP reach effect is started, and the result derivation effect starts, and in the effect product device 17, it is informed that the result of the SP reach effect is a big hit Perform a jackpot notification operation to

  At the timing of T4, when the fluctuation effect that became a big hit is finished, the exact light emission production is finished in the effect illumination device 16 and the handle illumination device 33, and the big hit effect (opening effect) is started in the image display device 14 During the period, the jackpot 16 during the jackpot during the jackpot is started.

  At the timing of T5, when the jackpot production period is over, the first and second special drawing reserve numbers become “0”, so the customer waiting state in which the fluctuation presentation and the jackpot production are not executed is started and waiting for customers In the effect standby period (for example, 30 seconds), the image display device 14 displays a customer waiting effect waiting screen, and the effect lighting device 16 starts a light emission effect during waiting corresponding to the customer waiting effect waiting period.

  In addition, the light emission effect during standby is the light emission mode of the lamp / LED of the illumination device 16 for effect than the above-mentioned fluctuation in light emission effect (especially in various reach effects), the large hit medium emission effect, and the customer waiting emission effect described later. In particular, the light emitting effect is such that the movement blinks (moving on) and / or the change in luminance (including turning on / off) is small.

  At the timing of T6, when the customer waiting effect waiting period is over, a customer waiting effect (demonstration effect) period (for example, 30 seconds) for executing the customer waiting effect is realized, and the image display device 14 is used to introduce the gaming machine. The customer waiting demonstration display (demo movie) is started, and in the effect lighting device 16 and the steering wheel lighting device 33, the light emission effect during waiting for the customer according to the customer waiting effect period is started.

  In addition, while waiting for customers, the light emission effect is at least one lighting device (a plurality of lighting devices (a plurality of lighting devices for a game board, a plurality of lighting devices for a glass door) constituting the lighting device 16 for effect (this embodiment) Then, in the lighting device for glass door and the steering wheel lighting device 33, a pseudo-precise light-emitting effect is performed in which the above-described accurate light-emitting effect and the light-emitting mode (e.g. In addition, when this pseudo correct light emission effect is performed, unlike the case where the accurate light emission effect described above is performed, the one-shot notification sound is not output from the audio output device 15.

  At the timing of T7, when a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the customer waiting rendering period, the pseudo lighting effect performed by the one lighting device and the steering wheel lighting device 33 ends and the other lighting is completed. A light emission effect is started while waiting for a customer similar to the device. It should be noted that the light emission effect while waiting for customers is a light emission effect with more changes in the light emission mode of the lamp and LED of the illumination device 16 for effect than the above-described light emission effect during standby, making it easy to draw the player's attention .

  At a timing T8, when a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) elapses from the start of the customer waiting effect, the customer waiting effect period ends, and the image display device 14 displays the customer waiting effect standby screen, and the effect lighting device 16 Then, the light emission effect on standby corresponding to the customer waiting effect waiting period is started.

(Example of production of the exact production)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 110 and 111, a rendering example of the accurate rendering will be described. Note that FIGS. 110 (a) and (b) and FIG. 111 (a) respectively correspond to the timing of T0, T1 and T2 in FIG. 109, and FIG. 111 (b) corresponds between T3 and T4 in FIG. It corresponds to the timing.

  First, as shown in FIG. 110 (a), the change effect corresponding to the changing icon A43 is executed in the display unit 140 of the image display device 14, and in the effect illumination device 16, the lamp / LED is red, blue, etc. In the non-reach state light emission pattern configured by the normal light emission color of the light emission effect is performed during fluctuation. At this time, the steering wheel illumination device 33 is in the off state.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 110 (b), in the display unit 140 of the image display device 14, the symbol "7" is temporarily stopped in the left area and the right area and the normal reach effect is executed. At 16, a light emission effect is performed while the lamp / LED is fluctuating with a light pattern for normal reach formed by normal light emission colors (light emission modes) such as red and yellow. At this time, the steering wheel illumination device 33 is in the off state.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 111A, the effect image EG in which the ally character and the enemy character battle is displayed on the display unit 140 of the image display device 14, and the SP reach effect is started. The accurate effect is executed at this timing, and the changing icon of the second special mode 15 in which the big hit is determined as the accurate display effect is displayed in the changing icon display area 142 of the display unit 140, and the voice output device 15. One-shot notification sound of "Quinquein" is output from 15, and in the illumination device 16 for effect (specifically, the illumination device for glass door) and the handle illumination device 33, the display colors of a plurality of lamps and LEDs In the special light emission pattern, which is a special light emission mode that appears to be iridescent light by changing it, the true light emission effect is started.

  In addition to the display change to the second special mode 15 in the above-mentioned icon change notice, the accurate display effect to be executed by the image display device 14 includes the rainbow SU (SU4) and the serif notice in the continuous SU notice effect. There are "decision!" Words in the production and effects such as rainbow effects in the preview effects.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 111 (b), the display unit 140 of the image display device 14 displays the symbol "7" in the left area, the center area, and the right area in a stopped state to notify the special drawing lottery result Equivalent to a kind of display effect). At this time, although the output of the one-shot notification sound from the sound output device 15 is stopped, the accurate light emission effect continues in the effect illumination device 16 and the handle illumination device 33.

  As described above, since the accurate effect is to be executed at a predetermined timing during the variable effect, it is possible to obtain the expectation of the player as to whether or not the accurate effect is to be executed. Interest will improve. Also, in addition to the one-shot notification sound from the audio output device 15, the accurate light emission effect is executed by a special light emission mode (rainbow light emission) different from the normal light emission mode in the effect illumination device 16 and the handle illumination device 33. Therefore, it is possible to effectively appeal to the player that a big hit is made.

(Example of production of pseudo correct lighting effect)
Next, with reference to FIG. 112, an example of the effect of the pseudo correct lighting effect will be described. FIGS. 112 (a) and 112 (b) respectively correspond to the timing between T4 and T5 in FIG. 109 and the timing between T6 and T7.

  As shown in FIG. 112A, on the display unit 140 of the image display device 14, the volume adjustment guide image OAG and the brightness adjustment guide image KAG are displayed in a state where the rendering symbol is stopped and displayed as the customer waiting effect standby screen. In the effect illumination device 16, light emission effects are performed while waiting with a light emission pattern for waiting for a customer waiting effect, in which the lamps and LEDs are formed of normal light emission colors such as white and yellow. At this time, the steering wheel illumination device 33 is in the off state.

  As shown in FIG. 112 (b), the display unit 140 of the image display device 14 executes a demonstration for waiting for a customer, and the voice output device 15 outputs BGM and sound effects for waiting for a customer. In the effect illumination device 16 and the handle illumination device 33, the pseudo correct light emission effect is executed with a special light emission pattern which is a special light emission mode in which the lamp and LED appear to emit light in rainbow color. The pseudo correct light emission effect is a light emission effect in which the above-mentioned accurate light emission effect and the light emission mode (emission color, light emission pattern, etc.) are the same or similar.

  As described above, in the customer waiting effect period (during customer waiting demo display), the pseudo accurate light emitting effect which causes the effect illumination device 16 and the handle illumination device 33 to emit light in the same mode or a similar mode as the accurate light effect Since execution is performed, it is possible to sufficiently attract the player's interest (enough to increase the willingness to play) while waiting for a customer.

(Modification of the time chart before and after the final production and the customer waiting production)
A modified example of the time chart before and after the accurate effect and the waiting effect effect will be described with reference to FIG. In this modification, the pseudo accurate presentation is not performed in synchronization with the start of the customer waiting presentation (demonstration display for customer waiting), but is executed in the middle of the customer waiting presentation (demonstration display for customer waiting) It is executed in synchronization with a predetermined display effect. In addition, since the timing from T0 to T5 is the same as that of the said embodiment, description is abbreviate | omitted.

  At the timing of T6, when the customer waiting effect waiting period is over, a customer waiting effect period (for example, 30 seconds) for executing the customer waiting effect is realized, and the image display device 14 starts a normal demonstration display for customer waiting, In the lighting device 16 for effect, the light emission effect is started while waiting for the customer according to the waiting period for the customer. Note that the light emission effect while waiting for a customer at this time is not a pseudo correct light emission effect, and the effect illumination device 16 emits light in a normal light emission color (light emission mode).

  At the timing T7, when a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the normal demonstration display for waiting for customers, the normal demonstration display being executed in the image display device 14 simulates the SP reach effect in the fluctuation effect Switching to a special demonstration display for waiting for customers (effect at the timing when actual light emission effect is actually performed), and of a plurality of lighting devices (lighting devices for game board, lighting devices for glass door) constituting lighting device 16 for effect In the at least specific illumination device (in the present embodiment, the illumination device for the glass door) and the handle illumination device 33, a pseudo-prediction light-emitting presentation in which the above-mentioned accurate light-emitting effect and the light-emitting mode (emitting color, light emission pattern, etc.) are the same or similar Is done.

  When a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) elapses from the start of the pseudo correct lighting effect at the timing of T8, the pseudo lighting effect performed by the specific lighting device and the handle lighting device 33 ends and the other lighting devices The light emission effect is resumed while waiting for the customer. Note that the light emission effect while waiting for a customer is a light emission effect where the change of the light emission aspect of the lamp and the LED of the illumination device 16 for effect is larger than the light emission effect during standby described above.

  At a timing T9, when a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) elapses from the start of the customer waiting effect, the customer waiting effect period ends, and the image display device 14 displays the customer waiting effect standby screen, and the effect lighting device 16 Then, the light emission effect on standby corresponding to the customer waiting effect waiting period is started.

(Exemplary example of pseudo correct lighting effect in a modified example)
Next, with reference to FIG. 114, an example of the effect of the pseudo correct lighting effect in the modification will be described. FIGS. 114 (a) and (b) correspond to the timings of T6 and T7 in FIG. 113, respectively.

  As shown in FIG. 114 (a), on the display unit 140 of the image display device 14, a normal demonstration display for waiting for customers is executed, and from the audio output device 15, BGM and sound effects for customer waiting effects are outputted. In the lighting device 16 for effect, the light emission effect is performed with a light emission pattern for customer waiting effect, in which the lamp and the LED are formed by normal light emission colors such as white and yellow. At this time, the steering wheel illumination device 33 is in the off state.

  As shown in FIG. 114 (b), the display unit 140 of the image display device 14 displays a special demonstration for waiting for a customer (here, an effect simulating an SP reach effect or an SPSP reach effect which is an opportunity to execute the effect effect in question. Is displayed, and BGM and sound effects of customer waiting effects are output from the audio output device 15. In the effect illumination device 16 and the handle illumination device 33, a plurality of lamps and LEDs emit iridescent light. In the special light emission pattern which is a special light emission aspect that appears to be false, the pseudo correct light emission effect is executed.

  As described above, the special demonstration display of the almost same mode as the presentation (SP reach presentation, SPSP reach presentation, etc.) which becomes the opportunity for the accurate presentation to be executed during the fluctuation presentation is executed during the wait for the customer presentation, and the special demonstration display thereof Since pseudo simulated lighting effect is executed at the start of the game, it is possible to sufficiently attract the player's interest (enough to increase the gaming intention) in the wait-for-customer state. In addition, it is also possible to introduce the actual light emission effect during the fluctuation effect, and the player can easily grasp the game property.

  In addition, BGM corresponding to the customer waiting demonstration display (normal demonstration display, special demonstration display) being executed instead of outputting BGM and sound effects of customer waiting presentation from the voice output device 15 during execution of customer waiting presentation And sound effects may be output.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, in addition to the handle illumination device 33, the accurate light emission effect and the pseudo accurate light emission effect are executed by the illumination device for glass door which is one of the plurality of illumination devices constituting the illumination device 16 for effect. However, instead of the lighting device for glass door, the lighting device for game board, which is one of a plurality of lighting devices constituting the lighting device for effect 16, may execute the flash lighting effect or the pseudo lighting effect. Also, both the flash lighting effect and the pseudo lighting effect may be executed by both the glass door lighting device and the game console lighting device.

  Also, the accurate light effect and the pseudo effective light effect may be performed using only a part of the plurality of illumination devices constituting the illumination device for glass door and the illumination device for game board. Furthermore, only the steering wheel illumination device 33 may execute the accurate light emission effect or the pseudo accurate light effect, or the accurate light emission effect or the pseudo accurate light effect may be performed only by the effect illumination device 16.

  Also, the precise light emission effect and the pseudo accurate light emission effect may not be performed using the same number of lighting devices, but may be performed using different numbers of lighting devices. In that case, a number of lighting devices may be used in which the number of simulated lighting effects is smaller than that of lighting effects, or a number of lighting devices in which the pseudo lighting effects are larger than the lighting effects may be used. . In the latter case, it becomes easy to draw the attention of players around.

  Further, instead of the simulated lighting effect 16 and the steering wheel lighting device 33, the simulated lighting effect may be performed by only one of them. In that case, if the pseudo lighting effect is performed by the production lighting device 16 which is above the steering wheel lighting device 33 and easily noticeable, the power consumption is reduced while the appealing power to the player is not reduced, but the false recognition is It becomes possible to execute the light emission effect.

  In addition, a reflective plate for changing the illumination mode (irradiation direction) by the lamp and LED is provided inside the handle illumination device 33, and a rotary motor for rotating (operating) the reflective plate. It is driven to operate the reflecting plate, but in the pseudo accurate lighting effect, the reflecting plate may not be operated without driving the rotary motor. In addition, the rotating motor may be driven to operate the reflecting plate in the accurate light emission effect and the pseudo accurate light emission effect.

  In addition, a dedicated rendering device that emits light and / or operates during the execution of the accurate rendering is disposed on the glass door Y2 and / or the game board 2, and the dedicated rendering device is identical to the accurate rendering during the execution of the customer waiting rendering. Alternatively, pseudo correct presentation may be performed by performing similar light emission and / or operation.

  In addition, in order to make the accurate light effect and pseudo accurate light effect more noticeable than the fluctuating light effect, the luminance (illuminance) of the lamp and LED in the accurate light effect and pseudo accurate light effect is changed It may be higher than the luminance (illuminance).

  Further, instead of executing the pseudo-presence light emission effect only once during the execution of one customer waiting effect on the image display device 14, it may be performed several times during the execution of one customer waiting effect. Alternatively, it may be performed in the customer waiting effect waiting period before the start of the customer waiting effect, or may be performed in the customer waiting effect executing period and the customer waiting effect waiting period.

  In addition, since the execution time of the accurate light emission effect is from the start timing of the accurate light emission effect in the change effect to the end of the change effect, the execution time value changes for each change effect. Therefore, although the execution time of the pseudo accurate lighting effect may be longer or shorter than the accurate lighting effect, it is fixed to be the same as the execution time of the pseudo lighting effect. It is also good.

  Further, in the present embodiment, although the accurate presentation notifying that the result of the variable display will be a special result is executed before the result of the fluctuation presentation is displayed (derived), the result of the fluctuation presentation The correct effect may be performed when is displayed, or may be performed before the result of the variable effect is displayed and when the result of the variable display is displayed. In this case, while the one-shot notification sound is output in the precise effect performed before the result of the change effect is displayed, the one-shot notification in the accurate effect performed when the result of the change effect is displayed The sound may not be output or may be output at a low rate.

(Right-handed display when the game ball enters the first starting opening 6 in the high probability time short game state)
FIG. 115 is a diagram showing a display example of right-handed display when the gaming ball enters the first starting opening 6 of the left side area 2AL in the high accuracy time short game state.

  In the effect image 1901 before the game ball enters the first starting opening 6 of the left area 2AL in the high probability time short game state, as shown in FIG. The display of the first right-handed image KMG1 is maintained as a specific notification image for notifying.

  Here, the first right-handed image KMG1 is based on the result of the special symbol lottery performed by entering the gaming ball into the first starting opening 6 or the second starting opening 7, the high probability time short game state or the low probability time short game It is displayed on the display unit 140 at the time of the game state change to the state or at the start of the execution of the jackpot game (round game).

  Specifically, the first right-handed image KMG1 displayed during the high probability time short game state is an image by the “first right-handed notification” based on the processing of step S1700-3 to step S1700-5 shown in FIG. 80. It is incorporated in the image of the effect of the high probability time short game state executed by the control board 105, and the display on the image display device 14 is started when the gaming state is changed to the high probability time short game state. Then, the first right-handed image KMG1 is erased from the image display device 14 at the time of changing the gaming state to the normal gaming state by the processing of step S1700-10 to step S1700-12 shown in FIG.

  In addition, with regard to the first right-handed image KMG1 (ZMG in FIG. 82 (c)) displayed during the low probability time short game state, also based on the processing of step S1700-3 to step S1700-5 shown in FIG. The first right-handed notification is incorporated in the image of the effect of the low probability time short game state executed by the image control board 105, and the display on the image display device 14 is changed when changing the game state to the low probability time short game state It is started. Then, the first right-handed image KMG1 (ZMG) is erased from the image display device 14 when the gaming state is changed to the normal gaming state, by the processing of step S1700-10 to step S1700-12 shown in FIG.

  Furthermore, with regard to the first right-handed image KMG1 (OMG in FIG. 82 (d)) displayed during the round of the jackpot game, “the first right based on the processing of step S1700-3 to step S1700-5 shown in FIG. The “right-handed notification” is incorporated into the image of the round effect of the jackpot game executed by the image control board 105, and the display on the image display device 14 is started at the start of the round effect. Then, the first right-handed image KMG1 (OMG) is erased from the image display device 14 at the end of the round effect by the processing of step S1700-10 to step S1700-12 shown in FIG.

  Although not shown, in the present embodiment, based on the opening effect pattern designation command set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c in the opening effect pattern determination process of step S1322, the opening according to the data output process of step S1900. The jackpot game opening effect is executed by the image control board 105 that has received the effect pattern specification command. In this opening game of the big hit game, in order to suggest the player the direction of the game ball to be fired in the big hit game, for example, a character image of "Please aim at the right!" An "advanced right-handed display" is suggested in advance that the game ball should be fired toward the right side area 2AR of 2A.

  In the state shown in FIG. 115 (a), when the gaming ball enters the first starting opening 6 of the left side area 2AL for two balls, the rightward display control process shown in FIG. 80 proceeds from step S1700-1 to S1700-2. → S1700-10 → S1700-13 → S1700-14 → S1700-15 → S1700-16 → S1700-17 → S1700-18 → S1700-19 → (omitted) → the flow of RETURN, and the sub CPU 102a performs step S1700-17. The second right-handed display start command is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c. Thereby, the second right-handed display start command is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 in the data output process of step S1900, and the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 A "second right hit notification" is performed to urge the player to shoot the game ball. The “second right-handed notification” includes processing for outputting a sound requesting right-handling by the audio output device 15 in addition to the processing for displaying the second right-handed image KMG2 on the image display device 14 May be By such processing, the effect image 1911 shown in FIG. 115 (b) is displayed on the image display device 14.

In the effect image 1911 shown in FIG. 115 (b), in addition to the first right-handed image KMG1, a second right-handed image KMG2 is displayed at the center of the display unit 140 as a specific notification image for notifying a right-handed Ru. The second right-handed image KMG2 is displayed by including a plurality of right-pointing arrows KMG2b and a character image KMG2c of "Caution! Please hit right" on the horizontally long window KMG2a.
Here, in accordance with the display timing of the character image KMG 2 c “Warning! Please hit right”, the voice output device 15 may make an audio announcement “Please hit right”.

  The display on the display unit 140 of the second right-handed image KMG2 is erased after a predetermined time has elapsed from the display start time.

  Specifically, in the right-handed display control process shown in FIG. 80, the flow of steps S1700-1 → S1700-6 → S1700-7 → S1700-8 → (omitted) → RETURN is performed, and the sub CPU 102a performs step S1700-7. The second right-handed display end command is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c.

  As a result, the second right-handed display end command is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 in the data output process of step S1900, and the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 It is finished.

  If the command stored in the reception buffer of sub RAM 102c is a customer waiting state designating command in the high probability time short game state, the rightward display control process shown in FIG. → S1700-10 → S1700-13 → S1700-14 → S1700-15 → S1700-16 → S1700-21 → S1700-22 → S1700-19 → (omitted) → the flow of RETURN, the sub CPU 102a proceeds to step S1700-21. The third right-handed display start command is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c. Thus, the third right-handed display start command is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 in the data output process of step S1900, and the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 A "third right-hand notice" is performed to urge the player to shoot the game ball. The “third right-handed notification” includes a process for displaying the third right-handed image KMG 3 on the image display device 14 and a process for outputting a voice requesting right-handling by the audio output device 15. May be

  By such processing, although illustration is omitted, the image display device 14 performs a right strike at the central portion of the display unit 140 in the same display mode as the second right strike image KMG2 shown in FIG. 115 (b). As a specific notification image to be notified, the third right-handed image KMG3 is displayed large.

  Further, although FIG. 115 is a view showing a display example of right-handed display when the game ball enters the first starting opening 6 in the high probability time short game state, during the execution of the jackpot game, low time short time Even in the gaming state of the gaming state, as shown in FIG. 115, the display etc. is executed as the same mode for "first right-hand notification", "second right-hand notification" and "third right-hand notification" Good.

(Displayed on the left when changing from the probability variation gaming state to the normal gaming state)
In FIG. 116, after the probability change gaming state in which the game proceeds by causing the game ball to project toward the right side area 2AR of the game area 2A, the game state shoots the game ball toward the left side area 2AL of the game area 2A. FIG. 31 is a view showing a display example of left-handed display for urging the player to shoot the game ball toward the left region 2AL when changing to the normal gaming state in which the game proceeds by causing the player to move.

  Here, in the present embodiment, based on the importance and urgency of the “left-handed” display, a priority regarding display is provided in relation to the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ4 and the like already displayed on the image display device 14. , And "left-handed" display is intended to be displayed by being preferentially superimposed on other display contents, which will be described below.

  In the effect image 1001 of the last variation display of the effect pattern in the probability variation gaming state, as shown in FIG. 116 (a), the remaining 0 characters are displayed in the probability variation remaining number image KKG which is the display mode for probability variation, After this, when the variable display is finished, as shown in FIG. 116 (b), the three rendering symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are stopped and displayed side by side in the central portion of the display unit 140, and the rendering on the lower right side of the display unit 140 Between the symbol TZ3 and the second reserved icon display area 143, the three special effect symbols TZ4 are stopped and displayed side by side.

From this state, when the gaming state is changed to the normal gaming state, the left hitting display control processing shown in FIG. 81 becomes a flow of steps S1800-1 → S1800-2 → S1800-3 → S1800-4 → S1800-5 → RETURN. In step S1800-3, the sub CPU 102a sets a first left-handed display start command in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c. Thus, the first left-handed display start command is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 in the data output process of step S1900, and the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 make the left area 2AL of the game area 2A. A "first left hit notification" is performed to urge the player to shoot the game ball. Due to the “first left hit notification”, an effect image 1011 shown in FIG. 116 (c) is displayed on the image display device 14.
Here, in addition to displaying the first left-handed image 1612 on the image display device 14, the “first left-handed notification” includes a process for causing the audio output device 15 to output a voice prompting for left-handed driving. It may be

  In the effect image 1011, the first left-handed image 1612 included in the above-mentioned “first left-handed notification” is displayed below the display unit 140 in a superimposed manner on the effect image in the normal gaming state during the effect symbol fluctuation. The first left-handed image 1612 comprises a horizontally long first window 1613 and a second window 1614. The first window 1613 includes a plurality of left-directed arrows 1615, and the second window 1614 Please return to the "" character image 1616 is included. Here, the priority order of image display is hold display> first left-handed image 1612, and the hold display is displayed on the first left-handed image 1612.

  In addition, in the effect image 1011, although the first left-handed image 1612 extends in the lateral direction of the image display device 14 and is displayed superimposed on the hold display, “Please return to left-handed” The character image 1616 is arranged so as not to be superimposed on the hold display.

(Left-handed display during waiting for customers)
FIG. 117 is a view showing a display example in the case where the gaming ball passes through the prize gate 10 of the right area 2AR during the customer waiting state in the normal gaming state.

  While the gaming ball is not passing through the winning gate 10 of the right area 2AR in the waiting state, the waiting image 1101 shown in FIG. 117 (a) is displayed on the display unit 140 of the image display device 14 The state is maintained.

  In the customer waiting state image 1101, the effect symbols (first effect symbols) “1”, “4” and “9” of the three first display modes showing the loss as the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are stopped and displayed, and special effects are displayed. The effect symbols (third effect symbols) "1", "4" and "9" of the three third display modes corresponding to the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 are stopped and displayed as the symbol TZ4. In the first pending icon display area 141 and the changing icon display area 142, no icon is displayed. On the upper left side of the display unit 140, an image showing a normal effect mode A indicating that the gaming state is disadvantageous to the player set corresponding to the normal gaming state which is the low probability gaming state and the non-time-short playing state. AMG is displayed.

When the gaming ball passes through the winning gate 10 of the right side area 2AR from this state, the left hitting display control process shown in FIG. 81 proceeds from step S1800-1 → S1800-2 → S1800-9 → S1800-12 → S1800-13 → S1800. The sub CPU 102a sets the second left-handed display start command in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c in step S1800-14. Thus, the second left-handed display start command is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 in the data output process of step S1900, and the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 make the left area 2AL of the game area 2A. A "second left hit notification" is performed to urge the player to shoot the game ball. By the “second left-handed notification”, the image 111 in the customer waiting state shown in FIG. 117 (b) is displayed on the image display device 14.
Here, the “second left hit notification” includes, in addition to displaying the second left hit image 1622 on the image display device 14, a process for causing the audio output device 15 to output a voice prompting a left hit. It may be

  In the customer waiting state image 1111 shown in FIG. 117 (b), the “second left-handed notification” described above is superimposed on the lower part of the display unit 140, overlapping the customer waiting state image 1101 shown in FIG. 117 (a). The second left-handed image 1622 to be included is displayed. The second left-handed image 1622 includes a horizontally long first window 1623 and a second window 1624. The first window 1623 includes a plurality of left-directed arrows 1625, and the second window 1624 indicates “left-handed "Please return to" contains the character image 1626.

  Further, in the image 1111 in the customer waiting state, the second left-handed image 1622 extends in the lateral direction of the image display device 14 and is superimposed and displayed on the hold display. The character image 1626 of "Please" is arranged so as not to be superimposed on the hold display.

(Left-handed display during production symbol fluctuation of normal gaming state)
FIG. 118 is a view showing a display example in the case where the gaming ball passes through the winning gate 10 of the right area 2AR during the effect symbol fluctuation in the normal gaming state.

  As shown in FIG. 118 (a), in the effect image 1201 during the effect symbol variation of the normal gaming state, the during fluctuation icon A01 is displayed in the during fluctuation icon display area 142, and the variation display of the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ3 is performed. In accordance with this, the special effect pattern TZ4 is also subjected to variable display. Further, at the lower center of the display unit 140, an image 1701 of a notice effect by a mini character is displayed. Then, on the upper left side of the display unit 140, an image AMG indicating a normal effect mode A is displayed.

When the gaming ball passes the winning gate 10 from the state during the effect symbol fluctuation of the normal gaming state shown in FIG. 118 (a), in the left hitting display control process shown in FIG. 81, step S1800-1 → step S1800-2. → The flow of step S1800-9 → step S1800-12 → step S1800-13 → step S1800-16 → step S1800-17 → step S1800-5 → RETURN, and the sub CPU 102a transmits the sub RAM 102c in step S1800-16. Set the third left display start command in the buffer. Thus, the third left-handed display start command is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 in the data output process of step S1900, and the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 make the left area 2AL of the game area 2A. A "third left hit notification" is performed to urge the player to shoot the game ball. By the “third left-handed notification”, the effect image 1211 shown in FIG. 118 (b) is displayed on the image display device 14.
Here, the “third left hit notification” includes, in addition to displaying the third left hit image 1632 on the image display device 14, a process for causing the audio output device 15 to output a voice prompting a left hit. It may be

  In the effect image 1211, the third part included in the above-mentioned "third left-handed notification" in the lower part of the display unit 140 is superimposed on the effect image 1201 during the effect symbol variation in the normal gaming state shown in FIG. 118 (a). The left strike image 1632 is displayed. The third left-handed image 1632 comprises a horizontally long first window 1633 and a second window 1634. The first window 1633 includes a plurality of left-directed arrows 1635, and the second window 1634 carries "Please return to the" character image 1636 is included. Here, the priority order of the image display is the image 1701 of hold display> third left-handed image 1632> notice effect, and the third left-handed image 1632 is displayed on the image 1701 of notice effect, and the third The hold display is displayed above the left-handed image 1632.

  In addition, in the effect image 1211, although the third left-handed image 1632 extends in the lateral direction of the image display device 14 and is displayed superimposed on the hold display, “Please return to left-handed” The character image 1636 is arranged so as not to be superimposed on the hold display.

(Left-handed display during menu display while waiting for customers)
FIG. 119 is a diagram showing a display example in the case where the gaming ball passes through the prize gate 10 of the right area 2AR during menu display in the customer waiting state.

  First, when an operation for the effect button 18A is performed in the customer waiting state in which the menu display is not performed, the customer waiting display control process of FIG. 79 is step S1400-1 → S1400-5 → S1400-6 → S1400-7. → Sub-CPU 102a superimposes on the screen of the image 1101 etc. in the customer waiting state shown in FIG. 117 (a) and displays the menu image that enables the menu operation. Do the process. Thus, the menu display image 1501 shown in FIG. 119 (a) is displayed so as to be superimposed.

  In the menu display image 1501, a character image 1502 of “Please select a menu with the cross key” is displayed at the top of the display unit 140, and each image 1503, 1504, 1505, 1506, 1507, the image 1508 of the character on the right side of the display unit 140, an image 1509 showing the selection button device at the lower part of the display unit 140, a character image 1510 of "select", an image 1511 showing the effect button device, characters of "set" An image 1512 is displayed.

Here, functions of respective images 1503, 1504, 1505, 1506, and 1507 of selection items shown as an example of menu display in FIG. 119 will be described.
The image 1503 of the selection item is an item for recording the game history by the reading operation of the QR code by interlocking with a portable terminal such as a smartphone as indicated by “puchi log”. The image 1504 of the selection item is, for example, an item for changing the BGM flowing during the normal gaming state, changing the background image of the liquid crystal screen, and the like, as displayed as “actual machine customization”. The image 1505 of the selection item is displayed on the image display device 14 during the game such as a specific gaming state (time reduction gaming state, probability variation gaming state) or a jackpot state, as indicated by “character selection”. This is an item that allows you to select the main character to be played. The image 1506 of the selection item is an item for explaining the game machine operation for beginners of the game machine operation as it is displayed as "pachinko course". Further, as the image 1507 of the selection item is displayed as "RETURN", the menu display can be ended by selecting the image 1507.

When the gaming ball passes through the winning gate 10 of the right area 2AR from the state where the menu display shown in FIG. 119 (a) is being performed, the left hitting display control process shown in FIG. 81 is step S1800-1 → S1800-2. → S1800-9 → S1800-12 → S1800-13 → S1800-14 → S1800-15 → S1800-5 → RETURN In the step S1800-14, the sub CPU 102 a puts the second left in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102 c. Set the display start command. Thus, the second left-handed display start command is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 in the data output process of step S1900, and the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 make the left area 2AL of the game area 2A. A "second left hit notification" is performed to urge the player to shoot the game ball. The menu display image 1520 shown in FIG. 119 (b) is displayed on the image display device 14 by the “second left hit notification”.
Here, the “second left hit notification” includes, in addition to displaying the second left hit image 1652 on the image display device 14, a process for causing the voice output device 15 to output a voice prompting a left hit. It may be

  In the menu display image 1520, the second left-handed image 1652 included in the “second left-handed notification” described above is displayed in the lower part of the display unit 140, overlapping the menu-displayed image 1501 shown in FIG. Ru. The second left-handed image 1652 comprises a horizontally long first window 1653 and a second window 1654. The first window 1653 includes a plurality of left-directed arrows 1655, and the second window 1654 shows “left-handed "Please return to the" character image 1656 is included. Here, the priority order of image display is second left-handed image 1652> image 1509 to image 1512, and the second left-handed image 1652 is displayed on the images 1509 to 1512.

First Modified Example of First Embodiment
FIG. 120 is a diagram showing a left-handed display in the first modified example of the first embodiment.
FIG. 120, like FIG. 118, is a view showing a display example when the gaming ball passes through the winning gate 10 during the effect symbol fluctuation in the normal gaming state.

  As shown in FIG. 120 (a), in the effect image 1301 in which the effect pattern in the normal gaming state is changing, the image 1701 of the notice effect by the mini character is displayed at the upper right position of the display unit 140, and the special effect pattern TZ4 is displayed. Other display contents are the same as the effect image 1201 shown in FIG. 118 (a) except that it is displayed on the upper left side of the section 140.

  When the gaming ball passes through the winning gate 10 from this state, the third leftward display command is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 in the data output process of step S1900, and the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 As a result, the “third left hit notification” is performed to urge the game ball to be launched toward the left area 2AL of the game area 2A. Processing for displaying the third left-handed image 1642 is performed by the “third left-handed notification”, and the effect image 1311 shown in FIG. 120 (b) is displayed on the image display device 14.

  In the effect image 1311, a third left-handed image 1642 is displayed on the upper portion of the display unit 140 so as to be superimposed on the effect image 1301 in the effect game pattern fluctuation in the normal gaming state shown in FIG. The third left-handed image 1642 is composed of a horizontally long first window 1643 and a second window 1644. The first window 1643 includes a plurality of left-directed arrows 1645, and the second window 1644 "left-handed" "Please return to the" character image 1646 is included. Here, the priority order of the image display is an image 1701 of special effect design TZ4> third left-handed image 1642> notice effect, and the third left-handed image 1642 is displayed on the image 1701 of the advance effect, The special effect pattern TZ4 is displayed on the third left-handed image 1642.

  In addition, in the effect image 1311, although the third left-handed image 1642 extends in the lateral direction of the image display device 14 and is superimposed and displayed on the special effect pattern TZ 4, “Please return to left-handed The character image 1646 of “is arranged so as not to overlap the special effect pattern TZ4.

Second Modified Example of First Embodiment
FIG. 121 is a diagram showing a left-handed display in a second modified example of the first embodiment.
The effect image 1411 shown in FIG. 121 is an example in which the third left-handed image 1812 included in the "third left-handed notification" is displayed when the gaming ball passes through the winning gate 10 during the effect symbol fluctuation in the normal gaming state. Is shown.

  In the effect image 1411, a third left-handed image 1812 is displayed superimposed on the area where the effect design TZ1 on the left side of the image display device 14 is displayed. The third left-handed image 1812 is a display mode in which a vertically-oriented window 1813 includes an arrow 1814 directed to the left and a character image 1815 for “return to left”.

  Here, in the second modified example of the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 121, the priority order of image display is the third left-handed image 1812> effect symbol TZ1, and the third left-handed image 1812 is the effect symbol It is assumed to be displayed preferentially over the area where TZ1 is displayed. However, the priority of the third left-handed image 1812 with respect to the rendering symbols TZ1 to TZ4 is set to be high, and the method is not limited to the method of superimposing on the rendering symbol TZ1 and displaying it. Furthermore, the size of the third left-handed image 1812 may be greatly enlarged, such as being superimposed on a plurality of effect symbols TZ1 and effect symbols TZ2 to hide the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ4. It may be superimposed and displayed.

  That is, in the second modification of the first embodiment, the third left-handed image 1812 is not superimposed on all the effect patterns TZ1 to TZ4 and is not covered, and at least at least one of the effect patterns TZ1 to TZ4. The third left-handed image 1812 is preferentially displayed with respect to the corresponding ones of the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ4 so as not to hide one effect symbol.

  As described above, in the first modified example and the second modified example of the first embodiment, in relation to the effect symbols TZ1 to TZ4 and the like which are already displayed on the image display device 14, the "left-handed" display is prioritized regarding display Because it is easy for the player to recognize the “left-handed” display immediately even if the player is focusing on the images of the preview effects by the rendering symbols TZ1 to TZ4 and the mini characters, since the It is possible to suppress the launch of the gaming ball to the gaming area which is disadvantageous.

  Furthermore, in the first embodiment, during “left-handed” display being performed on the image display device 14, in order to show the player a more effective presentation preferentially to the player, “left-handed” display is displayed. The “left-handed” display may be concealed with respect to effects using a light guide plate (not shown) having a high priority order and effects using the effect character device 17.

  Note that for warning notices that require immediate action, such as “ball drop notice” or “magnet error”, which should be given an urgent notice to the player during the game, “left-handed” indication on the image display device 14 Simultaneous display may be enabled so as not to hide the “left-handed” display without overlapping.

Second Embodiment
Hereinafter, a second embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described with reference to the drawings.

  In the above-described first embodiment, as described with reference to FIG. 80, in a state (during a big hit or during a short time), the gaming ball should be fired toward the right area 2AR of the game area 2A. The second right-handed image KMG2 displayed on the image display device 14 is to end the display on condition that a predetermined display time (second right-handed display time) has elapsed.

  On the other hand, in the second embodiment, the game ball passes through the prize gate 10 while the second right-handed image KMG2 displayed on the image display device 14 is displayed, or The display of the second right-handed image KMG2 is ended under the condition that the player enters the winning opening, which will be described below.

((Right-handed display control process 2 in the second embodiment)
The rightward display control process by the effect control board 102 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

  Here, since steps S1701-1 to S1701-5 and S1701-8 are the same as the processes in steps S1700-1 to S1700-5 and S1700-9 in the first embodiment, the description will be omitted. Do.

  In step S1701-6, the sub CPU 102a determines whether the gaming ball has passed through the winning gate 10. Specifically, it is determined whether the command stored in the reception buffer of sub RAM 102c is a winning gate passage designation command. The sub CPU 102a shifts the processing to step S1701-9 when it is determined that the gaming ball has passed through the winning gate 10, and shifts the processing to step S1701-7 when it is determined that the gaming ball has not passed through the winning gate 10.

  In step S1701-7, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the gaming ball has entered the fourth general winning opening 11-4. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer of the sub RAM 102c is a fourth general winning opening entrance ball specifying command. When determining that the game ball has entered the fourth general winning opening 11-4, the sub CPU 102a shifts the processing to step S1701-9 and determines that the game ball has not entered the fourth general winning opening 11-4. Then, the process proceeds to step S1701-8.

  In step S1701-9, sub CPU 102a instructs the end of "third right-hand notification" including display of second right-hand notification including display of second right-handed image KMG2 or display of third right-handed image KMG3. Therefore, the second rightward display end command or the third rightward display end command is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c, and the process proceeds to step S1701-10. The second rightward display end command or the third rightward display end command is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output process of step S1900, and the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 [2] The right-handed notification ”or the“ third right-handed notification ”is ended.

  In step S1701-10, sub CPU 102a performs the second rightward display flag "02R" in the second rightward display flag storage area of sub RAM 102c or the third rightward display flag "03R" in the third rightward display flag storage area. Is cleared, and the process proceeds to step S1701-2.

  The subsequent steps S17011-1 to S1701-23 are the same as the processes in steps S1700-10 to S1700-22 in the first embodiment, and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

  As described above, according to the second embodiment, "second right-handed notification" or "third right-handed notification" until passage of the game ball at the winning gate 10 or entry of the fourth general winning opening is detected. Can be maintained, so that the effectiveness of displaying the second right-handed image KMG2 or the third right-handed image KMG3 can be enhanced.

  In the second embodiment, the second right is detected when passage of the game ball for one ball at the winning gate 10 or entry of the game ball for one ball into the fourth general winning opening is detected. Although it is decided to end the display of the hit image KMG2 or the third right-touched image KMG3, passage of a predetermined number of gaming balls is detected in the winning gate 10, or a predetermined number of gaming balls in the fourth general winning opening The display of the second right-handed image KMG2 or the third right-handed image KMG3 may be ended under the condition that the entry of the ball is detected.

  Furthermore, in the second embodiment, the display of the second right-handed image KMG2 or the third right-handed image KMG3 is ended when passing through the winning gate 10 or entering the fourth general winning opening is detected. However, the display of the second right-handed image KMG2 or the third right-handed image KMG3 may be ended when the ball entering the second starting opening 7 is detected.

Third Embodiment
Hereinafter, a third embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described with reference to the drawings.

In the first embodiment described above, as described with reference to FIG. 81, the image display device 14 is temporarily set in a state (normal game state) in which the game ball should be fired toward the left area 2AL of the game area 2A. The displayed first left-handed image 1612, the second left-handed image 1622, and the third left-handed image 1632 are supposed to end the display on condition that a predetermined display time (left-handed display time) has elapsed. .
On the other hand, in the third embodiment, the game ball is displayed while the first left strike image 1612, the second left strike image 1622, and the third left strike image 1632 displayed on the image display device 14 are displayed. The display is ended on condition that the player enters the first starting opening 6 or enters the first to third general winning openings, which will be described below.

((Left-handed display control process 2 in the third embodiment)
The leftward display control process by the effect control board 102 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

  Here, step S1801-1 to step S1801-4 are the same as the process of step S1800-1 to step S1800-4 in the first embodiment, and thus the description will be omitted. Further, in the third embodiment, since it is not necessary to set the display time of the first left strike image 1612, the second left strike image 1622, and the third left strike image 1632, the process proceeds to step S1800-5 in the first embodiment. It is assumed that the corresponding processing is not performed.

  In step S1801-5, the sub CPU 102a determines whether the gaming ball has entered the first starting opening 6 or not. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer of the sub RAM 102c is a first starting opening winning combination designation command. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the gaming ball has entered the first starting opening 6, it shifts the process to step S1801-7, and if it determines that the gaming ball has not entered the first starting opening 6, the step S1801- Transfer the process to 6.

  In step S1801-6, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the game ball has entered any of the first general winning opening 11-1, the second general winning opening 11-2, and the third general winning opening 11-3. judge. Specifically, the command stored in the reception buffer of the sub RAM 102c is a first general prize winning entry ball designation command, a second general prize winning opening entry ball designation command, or a third general prize winning entrance ball entry designation command. Determine if there is. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the game ball has entered one of the first general winning opening 11-1, the second general winning opening 11-2, and the third general winning opening 11-3, the process proceeds to step S1801-7. If it is determined that the game ball has not entered any of the first general winning opening 11-1, the second general winning opening 11-2, and the third general winning opening 11-3, the left-handed display control process Finish.

  In step S1801-7, when the first left-handed display flag "01L" of the first left-handed display flag storage area is set, the sub CPU 102a performs the first left-handed display end command, the second If the second left-handed display flag "02L" in the left-handed display flag storage area is set, the second left-handed display end command is set, the third left-handed display flag "03L in the third left-handed display flag storage area Is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c, and the process proceeds to step S1801-8.

  The sub CPU 102a assumes that the display of the first left-handed image 1612, the second left-handed image 1622, and the third left-handed image 1632 is ended in step S1801-8 in the first left-handed display flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c. Clear the first left hit display flag “01L”, the second left hit display flag “02L” of the second left hit display flag storage area, and the third left hit display flag “03L” of the third left hit display flag storage area .

  The steps S1801-9 to S1801-17 are the same as the processes of steps S1800-9 to S1800-17 in the first embodiment, and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  As described above, according to the third embodiment, the first left strike image 1612 until the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 6 or the entry of the first to third general winning openings is detected. Since the display of the second left-handed image 1622 and the third left-handed image 1632 is maintained, the effectiveness of these displays can be enhanced.

Fourth Embodiment
Hereinafter, a fourth embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described with reference to the drawings.

  In the first embodiment described above, as described with reference to FIG. 81, one ball of winning gate 10 is in a state (normal game state) in which the game ball should be fired toward the left area 2AL of the game area 2A. When it is detected that the game ball of has passed, it is decided to perform "second left hit notification" or "third left hit notification".

  On the other hand, in the fourth embodiment, in the same gaming state (normal gaming state), when it is detected that the game ball for 3 balls has passed in the winning gate 10, "second left hit" "Informing" or "3rd left hitting notification" is to be performed, and thereafter, each time one game ball passes through the winning gate 10 as long as the ball entering the first starting opening 6 is not detected, the "first [2] Left-handed notification ”or“ third left-handed notification ”is performed, which will be described below.

((Left-handed display control processing 3 in the fourth embodiment)
The leftward display control process by the effect control board 102 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

  Here, step S1802-1 to step S1802-5 are the same as the process of step S1800-1 to step S1800-5 in the first embodiment, and thus the description will be omitted.

  In step S1802-6, the sub CPU 102a determines whether the gaming ball has passed through the winning gate 10. Specifically, it is determined whether the command stored in the reception buffer of sub RAM 102c is a winning gate passage designation command. The sub CPU 102a shifts the processing to step S1802-7 when it is determined that the gaming ball has passed through the winning gate 10, and shifts the processing to step S1802-12 when it is determined that the gaming ball has not passed through the winning gate 10.

  In step S1802-7, the sub CPU 102a determines whether three gaming balls have already passed through the winning gate 10. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the winning gate 3-ball passing flag "03G" is set in the winning gate 3-ball passing flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c. The sub CPU 102a shifts the processing to step S1802-15 if it determines that the winning gate 3-ball passing flag has been set, and shifts the processing to step S1802-8 if it determines that the winning gate 3-ball passing flag has not been set.

  In step S1802-8, the sub CPU 102a adds "1" to the counter value of the winning gate passage number counter S to update it, and shifts the process to step S1802-9.

  In step S1802-9, sub CPU102a determines whether the counter value of the winning gate passage number counter S is 3 or more. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the counter value is not 3 or more, the left-handed display control process ends, and if it is determined that the counter value of the winning gate passage number counter S is 3 or more, the process proceeds to step S1802-10. Move.

  In step S1802-10, the sub CPU 102a sets a winning gate 3-ball passing flag "03G" in the winning gate 3-ball passing flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c.

  In step S1802-11, the sub CPU 102a clears the counter value of the winning gate passage number counter S, and shifts the process to step S1802-15.

  In step S1802-12, the sub CPU 102a determines whether the gaming ball has entered the first starting opening 6 or not. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer of the sub RAM 102c is a first starting opening winning combination designation command. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the gaming ball has entered the first starting opening 6, it shifts the process to step S1802-13, and if it determines that the gaming ball has not entered the first starting opening 6, the real left strike End display control processing.

  In step S1802-13, the sub CPU 102a determines whether three game balls have already passed through the winning gate 10. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the winning gate 3-ball passing flag "03G" is set in the winning gate 3-ball passing flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the winning gate 3-ball passing flag has been set, the process proceeds to step S1802-14, and if it is determined that the winning gate 3-ball passing flag has not been set, the left hit display control process ends. .

  In step S1802-14, the sub CPU 102a clears the winning gate 3-ball passing flag "03G" stored in the winning gate 3-ball passing storage area of the sub RAM 102c, and ends the left hit display control process.

  At step S1802-15, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not a customer waiting state is currently in progress. Specifically, the sub CPU 102a determines whether the command stored in the reception buffer is a customer waiting state designation command. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the customer waiting state is in progress, the process proceeds to step S1802-16. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the customer waiting state is not in progress, the process proceeds to step S1802-18.

  At step S1802-16, sub CPU 102a sets a second left display start command in the transmission buffer of sub RAM 102c to instruct the start of display of second left image 1622, and shifts the processing to step S1802-17. . The second left-handed display start command is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output process of step S1900, and the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 include the display of the second left-handed image 1622 The "second left hit notification" is to be executed.

  In step S1802-17, the sub CPU 102a sets the second left-handed display flag "02L" in the second left-handed display flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c, and shifts the processing to step S1802-5.

  In step S1802-18, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the jackpot game is currently in progress, the high probability time short game state, or the low probability time short game state. Specifically, whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer of sub RAM 102c is a round designation command, and in the effect mode setting process shown in FIG. 64, an effect mode flag in the effect mode flag storage area of sub RAM 102 c. It is determined whether "01H" to "04H" are set. If the sub CPU 102a determines that it is not in the jackpot game or in time, that is, if it determines that it is in the symbol fluctuation in the normal gaming state, it transfers the process to step S1802-19 and determines that it is in the jackpot game or in time. The left-handed display control process ends.

  In step S1802-19, sub CPU 102a sets a third leftward display start command for instructing the start of display of third lefthanded image 1632 in the transmission buffer of sub RAM 102c, and shifts the process to step S1802-20. . The third left-handed display start command is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 by the data output process of step S1900, and the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 include the display of the third left-handed image 1632. The "third left hit notification" is to be executed.

  In step S1802-20, sub CPU 102a sets the third left-handed display flag "03L" in the third left-handed display flag storage area of sub RAM 102c, and shifts the process to step S1802-5.

  The processes of steps S1802-21 to S1802-23 are the same as the processes of steps S1800-6 to S1800-8 in the first embodiment, and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 124 and FIG. 125, the relationship between the passage of the game ball to the winning gate 10 in the fourth embodiment and the control related to the left hitting display will be described.

In the gaming state (normal gaming state) in which the game ball is fired toward the left side area 2AL of the game area 2A, when the game ball for three balls passes through the winning gate 10, the sub CPU 102a displays the left strike shown in FIG. In the control process, the process is performed in the sequence of step S1802-6 → step S1802-7 → step S1802-8 → step S1802-9 → step S1802-10, and thereafter, the process of step S1802-15 to step S1802-20 is performed. Based on the process, the second left-handed display start command or the third left-handed display start command is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c.
In addition, in step S1802-10, in order to store that the game balls for three balls have passed through the winning gate 10, the winning gate three ball passing flag "in the winning gate three ball passing flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c""03G" is set.

Thereby, the second leftward display start command or the third leftward display start command is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 in the data output process of step S1900, and the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 A "second left hit notification" or a "third left hit notification" is performed to urge the game ball to be launched toward the left region 2AL of the game region 2A. The second left-handed image 1622 or the third left-handed image 1632 is displayed on the image display device 14 by the “second left-handed notification” or the “third left-handed notification”.
Here, in addition to displaying the second left-handed image 1622 and the third left-handed image 1632 on the image display device 14 in “second left-handed notification” and “third left-handed notification”, the audio output device 15 May include processing for outputting a voice prompting a left strike.

  In this state, when one game ball has passed through the prize gate 10, in the left hitting display control process shown in FIG. 124, the process is performed by the flow of step S1802-6 → step S1802-7 → step S1802-15. Then, based on the processing in steps S1802-15 to S1802-20, the second left-handed display start command or the third left-handed display start command is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c.

Therefore, each time a game ball for one ball passes through the winning gate 10, the second left hit display start command or the third left hit display start command is the lamp control board 104 and the image control board in the data output process of step S1900. The “second left hit notification” or the “third left hit notification”, which is sent to 105 and prompts the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 to shoot the game ball toward the left area 2AL of the game area 2A, is To be done. The second left-handed image 1622 or the third left-handed image 1632 is displayed on the image display device 14 by the “second left-handed notification” or the “third left-handed notification”.
Also in this case, in addition to displaying the second left-handed image 1622 and the third left-handed image 1632 on the image display device 14 in “second left-handed notification” and “third left-handed notification”, sound output is performed. The apparatus 15 may include a process for outputting a voice prompting a left strike.

  In this state, when the gaming ball enters the first starting opening 6 for one ball, the main CPU 101a, in step S238, transmits the first transmission start winning designation command for the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 101c (transmission In step S700, the first start opening winning combination designation command is transmitted to the sub CPU 102a.

  Then, in the left hitting display control process shown in FIG. 124, the process is performed in the flow of step S1802-12 → step S1802-13 → step S1802-14, and thereafter, the game balls for three balls pass through the winning gate 10 At this time, processing for "second left-handed notification" or "third left-handed notification" is performed.

  That is, in the fourth embodiment, when it is detected that the predetermined first number (for example, three balls) of gaming balls have passed through the winning gate 10, the second left-handed image 1622 or the image display device 14 After the third left-handed image 1632 is displayed, the second left-handed image is displayed each time a second number (for example, one ball) of gaming balls smaller than the first number is passed on the winning gate 10. It is supposed that display of 1622 or the 3rd left hitting picture 1632 is performed.

  However, once the ball entering the first starting opening 6 is detected, the winning gate 3-ball passing flag "03G" is cleared in step S1802-14 of the left hitting display control process shown in FIG. 124. Therefore, thereafter, the second left-handed image 1622 or the third left-handed image 1632 is not displayed unless the first number of gaming balls pass at the winning gate 10.

  For this reason, in the fourth embodiment, even if the game ball for one ball that has accidentally fired toward the second game area has passed through the winning gate 10, the “left strike” is made in the fourth embodiment. Since the display is not performed immediately, it is possible to avoid the annoyance of the player due to the “left-handed” display on the image display device 14. Therefore, since "left-handed" display is made only when the player has continuously fired a predetermined number of game balls toward the second game area, an effective "left" under a more appropriate situation is provided. It is possible to display "strike". Then, in the state where the "left strike" display is displayed, the "left strike" display is ended only when the entry of the game ball for one ball into the first starting opening 6 is detected, so the player You can continue playing without feeling stress.

  In the fourth embodiment, the entry into the first starting opening 6 is detected after it is detected that the predetermined first number (for example, 3 balls) of gaming balls have passed through the winning gate 10 Therefore, although it is decided to clear the winning gate 3-ball passing flag “03G”, when entering the first to third general winning openings 11-1, 11-2, 11-3 is detected, The winning gate 3-ball passing flag "03G" may be cleared.

Fifth Embodiment
Hereinafter, a fifth embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described with reference to the drawings.

  In the above-described first embodiment, as described with reference to FIG. 80, the state in which the game ball should be fired toward the right area 2AR of the game area 2A (the state of the jackpot game, high probability time short game state or low probability In the short time game state), when it is detected that the game ball for two balls has entered in the first starting opening 6, "second right hit notification" or "third right hit notification" was to be performed .

  On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, in the same gaming state (the state of big hit gaming state, high probability time short gaming state or low probability time short gaming state), the game ball for three balls in the first starting opening 6 If passing is detected, "second right-handed notification" or "third right-handed notification" is performed, and thereafter, unless the passage of the game ball in the winning gate 10 is detected, the first starting opening Each time a game ball for one ball passes at 6, the "second right hit notification" or the "third right hit notification" is performed, which will be described below.

((Right-handed display control process 3 in the fifth embodiment)
With reference to FIG. 126, the rightward display control process by the effect control board 102 in the fifth embodiment will be described.

  Here, since step S1702-1 to step S1702-10 are the same as the process of step S1700-1 to step S1700-10 in the first embodiment, the description will be omitted.

  In step S1702-11, the sub CPU 102a determines whether the gaming ball has entered the first starting opening 6 or not. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the command stored in the reception buffer of the sub RAM 102c is a first starting opening winning combination designation command. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the gaming ball has entered the first starting opening 6, the process proceeds to step S1702-12, and if it is determined that the gaming ball has not entered the first starting opening 6, the step S1702-23. Transfer the process to

  In step S1702-12, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not gaming balls for three balls have already been entered in the first starting opening 6. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the first starting opening three ball entering ball flag "03K" is set in the first starting opening three ball entering ball storage area of the sub RAM 102c. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the first starting opening 3 ball entering ball flag has been set, the process proceeds to step S1702-16, and if it is determined that the first starting opening 3 ball entering ball flag has not been set, step S1702- Transfer the process to 13.

  In step S1702-13, the sub CPU 102a adds "1" to the counter value of the first starting opening ball number counter N for update, and shifts the processing to step S1702-14.

  In step S1702-14, the sub CPU 102a determines whether the counter value of the first starting opening ball number counter N is 3 or more. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the counter value is not 3 or more, the rightward hit display control process ends, and if it is determined that the counter value of the first starting opening ball number counter N is 3 or more, step S1702-15. Transfer the process to

  In step S1702-15, the sub CPU 102a sets the first starting opening three ball entering ball flag "03K" in the first starting opening three ball entering ball flag storage area of the sub RAM 102c.

  Here, steps S1702-16 to S1702-22 are the same as the processes of steps S1700-16 to S1700-20 and steps S1700-11 to S1700-12 in the first embodiment, and thus the description thereof is omitted. Do.

  In step S1702-23, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not the game ball has passed through the winning gate 10. Specifically, it is determined whether the command stored in the reception buffer of sub RAM 102c is a winning gate passage designation command. The sub CPU 102a shifts the processing to step S1702-24 when determining that the gaming ball has passed through the winning gate 10, and ends the left hit display control processing when determining that the gaming ball has not passed through the winning gate 10 .

  In step S1702-24, the sub CPU 102a determines whether or not three game balls have already been hit in the first starting opening 6. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the first starting opening three ball entering ball flag "03K" is set in the first starting opening three ball entering ball storage area of the sub RAM 102c. If the sub CPU 102a determines that the first starting opening 3 ball entering ball flag has been set, the process proceeds to step S1702-25, and if it is determined that the first starting opening 3 ball entering ball flag has not been set, the left strike is left End display control processing.

  In step S1702-25, the sub CPU 102a clears the first starting opening 3 ball entering ball flag "03K" stored in the first starting opening 3 ball entering ball storage area of the sub RAM 102c, and controls this left-handed display control End the process.

  In the following, since steps S1702-26 to S1702-27 are the same as the processes of steps S1700-21 to S1700-22 in the first embodiment, the description will be omitted.

From the above, in the fifth embodiment, 3 in the gaming state (the jackpot gaming state, the high probability time short gaming state or the low probability time short gaming state) in which the gaming ball is fired toward the right area 2AR of the gaming area 2A. When the game ball of the ball enters the first starting opening 6, the sub CPU 102a performs step S1702-11 → step S1702-12 → step S1702-13 → step S1702 → in the right-handed display control process shown in FIG. The processing is performed in the sequence of 14 → step S1702-15, and thereafter, based on the processing of steps S1702-16 to S1702-20, the second right-handed display start command or the third right in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c. Sets the hit display start command.
Also, in step S1702-15, in order to store that the game balls for three balls have entered the first starting opening 6, the first starting opening three balls entering ball storage area of the sub RAM 102c is stored in the first memory. 1 opening 3 ball entry flag "03K" is set.

Thereby, the second rightward display start command or the third rightward display start command is transmitted to the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 in the data output process of step S1900, and the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 A "second right hit notification" or a "third right hit notification" is performed which urges the game ball to be launched toward the right side region 2AR of the game region 2A. The second right-handed image KMG2 or the third right-handed image KMG3 is displayed on the image display device 14 by the “second right-handed notification” or the “third right-handed notification”.
Here, in addition to displaying the second right-handed image KMG2 and the third right-handed image KMG3 on the image display device 14, the "second right-handed notification" and the "third right-handed notification" May include processing for outputting a voice prompting a left strike.

  In this state, when one game ball enters the first starting opening 6, in the right-handed display control process shown in FIG. 126, the flow of step S1702-11 → step S1702-12 → step S1702-16. The second right-handed display start command or the third right-handed display start command is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 102c based on the process of steps S1702-15 to S1702-20.

Therefore, every time one game ball enters the first starting opening 6, the second rightward display start command or the third rightward display start command causes the lamp control board 104 and the data output process in step S1900 to "Second right-handed notification" or "third right-handed notification" which is sent to the image control board 105 and prompts the lamp control board 104 and the image control board 105 to shoot the game ball toward the right area 2AR of the game area 2A. "Informing" is performed. The second right-handed image KMG2 or the third right-handed image KMG3 is displayed on the image display device 14 by the “second right-handed notification” or the “third right-handed notification”.
Also in this case, in addition to the display of the second right-handed image KMG2 and the third right-handed image KMG3 on the image display device 14, the "second right-handed notification" and the "third right-handed notification" The apparatus 15 may include a process for outputting an audio prompting a right strike.

  In this state, when one game ball passes through the winning gate 10, the main CPU 101a sets a winning gate pass designation command in the effect transmission data storage area (transmission buffer) of the main RAM 101c in step S256. In step S700, a winning gate passage designation command is transmitted to the sub CPU 102a.

  Then, in the right-handed display control process shown in FIG. 126, the process is performed in the sequence of step S1702-23 → step S1702-24 → step S1702-25, and thereafter, the game ball for three balls is the first starting opening 6 When entering the ball, processing for "second right-handed notification" or "third right-handed notification" is performed.

  That is, in the fifth embodiment, when it is detected that a predetermined first number (for example, three balls) of gaming balls are entered in the first starting opening 6, the image display device 14 receives the second right After that, a second number (for example, one ball) of gaming balls smaller than the first number is entered in the first starting opening 6 after the hitting image KMG2 or the third right hitting image KMG3 is displayed. In each case, the second right-handed image KMG2 or the third right-handed image KMG3 is displayed.

  However, once passage of the game ball is detected at the winning gate 10, the first start opening three ball entering ball flag "03K" is cleared in step S1702-25 of the right-handed display control process shown in FIG. 126. Therefore, the second right-handed image KMG2 or the third right-handed image KMG3 is not displayed as long as the first number of game balls are not entered in the first starting opening 6 thereafter.

  For this reason, in the fifth embodiment, even in the case where a game ball for one ball that the player has accidentally fired toward the first game area enters the first starting opening 6, Since the “right-handed” display is not performed immediately, it is possible to avoid the annoyance of the player due to the “right-handed” display on the image display device 14. Therefore, since "right-handed" display is made only when the player has continuously fired a predetermined number of game balls toward the first game area, an effective "right" under a more appropriate situation is provided. It is possible to display "strike". Then, in the state where the "right-handed" display is displayed, the player is stressed because the "right-handed" display is ended only by the passage of one game ball in the winning gate 10 being detected. The game can be continued without feeling

  In the fifth embodiment, after it is detected that a predetermined first number (for example, 3 balls) of gaming balls have been entered in the first starting opening 6, passing of the gaming balls in the winning gate 10 is Although it is decided to clear the first starting opening 3 ball entering ball flag "03K" by being detected, when the entering of the game ball to the 4th general winning opening 11-4 is detected, the 2nd starting When entry of the game ball in the opening 7 is detected, the first start opening 3 ball entry flag “03K” may be cleared.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the waiting time of the customer waiting effect set at the time of receiving the customer waiting state designation command and the waiting time of the customer waiting effect set at the end of the customer waiting effect time are the same time value ( For example, although it is 30 seconds, the waiting time of the customer waiting effect set at the end of the effect time of the customer waiting effect may be shorter (for example, 10 seconds). Furthermore, when the state after power supply recovery is in the customer waiting state, by setting the waiting time of the customer waiting effect to a shorter time value (for example, 0 seconds), the customer waiting effect may be started earlier. Good.

  In addition, as the customer waiting effect to be executed on the display unit 140 of the image display device 14, for example, the demonstration display described above, the model name display for displaying the model name of the gaming machine Y, and the manufacturer name (manufacturer name) of the gaming machine Y Of two or more of the effect display of the manufacturer display to display, alerting information to the player (for example, "prohibition of playing under the age of 18" "prohibition of stagnation" "prohibition of in-car notification of children", etc.) It may be a combination (in any order).

  In addition, when the customer waiting effect is performed by the combination of the demonstration display, the model name display, and the manufacturer display on the image display device 14 (in any order), the pseudo correct light emission presentation is performed while the maker display is being performed. While the display and the model name display are being performed, the pseudo correct lighting effect may not be performed. By doing this, it is possible to introduce the maker name in a glamorous manner, and to improve the image of the maker to the player.

  In addition, when the customer waiting effect is performed by the combination of the demonstration display, the model name display, and the manufacturer display on the image display device 14 (in any order), while the pseudo correct light emission presentation is performed during the model name display, While the demonstration display and the maker display are being performed, the pseudo correct lighting effect may not be performed. In this way, the model name can be introduced in a glamorous manner, and the image of the gaming machine can be improved for the player.

  In addition, when the customer waiting effect is performed by the combination of the maker display, the demonstration display, the model name display, and the alert display on the image display device 14, the pseudo correct lighting effect is displayed during the model name display. On the other hand, while the maker display, the demonstration display and the alert display are being performed, the pseudo correct lighting effect may not be performed. In this way, the model name can be introduced in a glamorous manner, and the image of the gaming machine can be improved for the player.

  In addition, when the customer waiting effect is performed by any three or more (in any order) of the maker display, the demonstration display, the model name display, and the alert display on the image display device 14, any two display effects are executed. The pseudo correct lighting effect may be performed while the pseudo correct lighting effect may not be performed while the remaining display effects are being executed.

  In addition, a specific character displayed on the image display device 14 is displayed on the image display device 14 while the variation display is performed during the execution of the variation display due to the specific variation production pattern or during the execution of the accurate display effect, and the specification in the demonstration display The pseudo correct lighting effect may be performed during display of the character of.

  In addition, based on the operation of a predetermined changeover switch provided at a location where the player can not operate, but can be operated by the game store clerk, the eco mode (customer consumes less power than the normal mode or the normal mode consumes During waiting effects, it is possible to switch the brightness of the lamp or LED to a mode that reduces the brightness of the normal effect mode than the default brightness), and in normal mode the pseudo correct light effect is performed while waiting for customer effects While the customer waiting effect is being produced, the pseudo on-time light emitting effect may not be performed.

  In the present embodiment, the gaming machine Y is set to generate a high probability gaming state and a short time gaming state after the end of all the big hit games, but when the big hit game occurs due to the stop display of a specific big hit special symbol, the big hit game ends After the high probability gaming state and time saving gaming state until the next big hit game while generating a big hit game by the stop display of the normal jackpot special symbol low probability gaming state and time saving gaming state for a predetermined period (for example 100 special It is good also as game machine Y made to generate over variation display of a symbol.

  Also, when the game ball passes (winning) a specific area provided inside the large winning opening 8 in a specific round (for example, 8 rounds and 15 rounds) during the big hit game, the high probability gaming state and time saving game after the big hit game is over While the state is generated for a predetermined period (for example, the variable display of 120 special symbols), the low probability gaming state and the time saving gaming state are determined for a predetermined period (for example, It is good also as game machine Y made to generate over 100 times (variation display of a special symbol).

  ◆ By the way, in a conventional gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine described in JP 2012-228400 A), it is determined whether or not to determine whether to execute a special game advantageous to the player and store it as pending storage At the time of establishment of the start condition, it is determined whether or not the special game is to be executed based on the holding storage, and the variable display of the symbol is executed, and the special game is executed when the result of the variable display becomes a special result. In the specific gaming state (time saving gaming state, probability variation gaming state) which is more advantageous to the player than the gaming state, the fluctuation time is set to be easier to be shorter than the normal gaming state. Although the prior judgment was performed and the continuous advance notice effect of performing predetermined effects over a plurality of variable displays based on the result of the prior judgment was performed, there was a possibility that the interest of the game might be reduced.

  According to the gaming machine Y of the present embodiment, as a configuration for solving the above problems, the variable display of symbols is executed, and when the variable display is a special result, it is possible to execute a special game advantageous to the player. And a storage means for storing the determination information as to whether or not the special game is to be executed as a suspension storage, and a determination means for determining whether or not the special game is to be executed based on the suspension storage, Variation display execution means for performing the variation display based on the determination result of the determination means, prior determination means for determining whether or not to execute the special game before the determination means, and Based on the determination result, control is performed to a continuous advance notice executing unit that executes continuous advance notice effects for performing predetermined effects, a normal gaming state, and a specific gaming state in which the fluctuation time of the variable display tends to be shorter than the normal gaming state. To do Comprises a gaming state control means capable, for the continuous announcement execution unit is directed to performing the continuous announcement attraction in a high proportion towards said particular gaming state than the normal game state.

  By doing this, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  The gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to pachinko gaming machines such as gaming machines Y, and can also be used for a jingle ball gaming machine and an arrange ball gaming machine.

Y game machine 6 1st starting opening 6a 1st starting opening detection sensor 7 2nd starting opening 7a 2nd starting opening detection sensor 8 large winning opening 10 winning gate 14 image display device 15 sound output device 16 effect lighting device 70 second Start opening control device 80 large winning opening control device 101 main control board 101a main CPU
101b Main ROM
101c Main RAM
102 effect control board 102a sub CPU
102b sub ROM
102c Sub RAM
140 display unit 141 first pending icon display area 142 changing icon display area 143 second pending icon display area

Claims (1)

In a gaming machine capable of executing a special game, which is advantageous to a player when a variable display of a symbol is executed and the variable display becomes a special result,
Hold storage means for storing the determination information as to whether or not to execute the special game as a hold storage,
A determination unit that determines whether to execute the special game based on the determination information;
Variation display execution means for performing the variation display based on the determination result of the determination means;
Prior determination means for determining whether or not to execute the special game before the determination means;
A notice execution means for executing a notice effect to perform a predetermined effect based on the judgment result of the prior judgment means;
The gaming state control means capable of controlling the normal gaming state and the specific gaming state in which the fluctuation time of the variable display tends to be shorter than the normal gaming state,
The notice execution means executes the notice effect at different rates in the normal gaming state and the specific gaming state,
The first notice effect performed in the specific gaming state is an effect that adds a specific image to the symbol and suggests the degree of expectation that the special game will be executed depending on the type of the specific image added, It is the notice effect that is not executed in the normal gaming state,
Wherein the kind of the added the specific image, comprising at least a first specific image, and the second specific image, a
If the type of the appended the specific image is the second specific image, being capable of performing the expected high degree second specific effect of the special game is executed than the first specific effect,
The second notice effect performed in the normal gaming state is the notice effect that suggests the degree of expectation that the special game will be executed by changing the hold image corresponding to the hold memory to any of a plurality of types. Yes,
The direction of types number of the pending images than kind number of the specific image is large, the gaming machine, characterized in that.